All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Right-wing political interests within the Peruvian parliament backed by international finance capital have sought to besiege the newly elected socialist president of the South American state of Peru.

There was a tremendous struggle to win the right of the new president to take office since several challenges to the vote resulted in a delay in his inauguration.

The Free Peru Party which Castillo represents, along with its allies, holds approximately 50 seats within the national parliament. Their margin within the legislative body makes them a minority out of 130 members.

This party was founded by Vladimir Cerron, a regional politician who held office as governor of Junin.  Cerron remains Secretary General of the Free Peru Party while battling a criminal investigation which led to his conviction and incarceration.

Impeachment by the parliament is not a rare occurrence within Peruvian politics. Former President Martin Vizcarra was thrown out of office in 2020 as were many others elected since 1985.

Only 87 votes would be needed to remove the existing president from his position. The opposition forces are mobilizing their supporters both within and without government in order to maintain the status-quo.

Castillo was sworn into office on July 28 and only several days later, two thousand right-wing protesters held a demonstration in the capital of Lima demanding that the parliament impeach the president. Many statements have been made by supporters of the presidential candidate which Castillo defeated, Keiko Fujimori, a member of the political dynasty that has held influence in the country since the 1980s when the country faced widespread violence in the rural areas in efforts by the state to contain two liberation movements, the Shining Path and the Tupac Amaru Revolutionary Movement.

Peru’s electorate which voted in the current president has been afflicted by widespread corruption and the interference into its internal affairs by multi-national mining corporations whose profit-making ventures have left the majority of the people impoverished. Western media outlets and their surrogates in Latin America have published articles since the inauguration of President Castillo claiming that the government is dominated by “far leftists” who would discourage investment by capitalist companies.

Castillo appointed Guido Bellido as Prime Minister who is charged with forming a new government by appointing a cabinet. The anticipation of many is that the right-wing dominated legislature will not approve the executive team assembled by Free Peru. In the event of such a disapproval the cabinet could be dismissed opening up a debate over the future of the constitutional order within the country.

Bellido is another target of the corporate media and the right-wing forces in Peru. He has been accused of being a “far leftist” committed to the radical reconstruction of the national economy of Peru. Both Castillo and Bellido are in solidarity with the revolutionary governments of Cuba and Venezuela.

An indication of the hostility towards the Castillo presidency is illustrated by the Christian Science Monitor which wrote on August 6 that:

“A far-right party has demanded another five ministers be removed from the Cabinet for alleged terrorism sympathies. One is Héctor Béjar, Mr. Castillo’s foreign minister, who trained in Cuba in the 1960s and was part of a small band of guerrillas that tried to spark revolution in Peru. The other eight opposition parties in Congress have all demanded changes as well. Of the 19 ministers, 12 have raised objections from one or more party. The Castillo government ‘has chosen ideology over pragmatism,’ says Gonzalo Banda, a political science professor at the Catholic University of Santa María.” (See this)

The solidarity expressed by Free Peru with the left governments and revolutionary movements in the region is mischaracterized by the right-wing which asserts that they are supporting “dictatorships.” In addition, Castillo and Bellido are seeking to enhance ties with the People’s Republic of China (PRC) which already has joint agreements with the government in the copper mining industry.

On his first day in office, Castillo was inoculated with the Sinopharm vaccine developed by China in the efforts to guard against the further spread of COVID-19. Despite its statements of admiration for revolutionary movements and governments in Latin America, Peru still maintains ties with the United States through diplomatic channels and economic agreements.

Ideological and Political Origins of the Free Peru Party

Castillo was chosen by the Free Peru Party as its candidate in the recent elections. His background is in the education sector and trade unionism. The Party is heavily oriented towards the rural areas of Peru where it received the overwhelming votes of the peasants and farmers.

Free Peru says its ideology is based upon the teaching and activities of Karl Marx, the co-founder of the First International and the principal theoretician of scientific socialism and V.I. Lenin, the co-founder of the Bolshevik faction within the Russian Social Democratic Labor Party (RSDLP) and later the Russian Communist Party which took power in October 1917 establishing the first socialist state.

Another major influence is the Peruvian philosopher, journalist and organizer, Jose Carlos Mariategui La Chira (1894-1930). Mariategui was a major figure in the left movement in Peru and later traveled extensively in Europe. He was in Italy during the period leading up to the rise of Benito Mussolini and the fascist regime in 1922.

In Latin America, Mariategui was the founder of the Socialist Party in 1928 which later became the Communist Party of Peru in 1930. His major contribution philosophically was the book entitled “Seven Interpretive Essays on Peruvian Reality” published in 1928. This work is often credited as being the first historical materialist analysis of the social situation in South America. The author blames the land-owning elites backed by imperialism as the source of political stagnation in the region.

Mariategui discusses the “Indian question” as a manifestation of the land problem in Peru. He advances the notion that socialist ideology should be based upon the concrete circumstances of the workers and farmers inside the country. Due to years-long health problems, Mariategui died in 1930 at the age of 35. Today Mariategui’s writings are still widely read throughout Latin America and his influence continues as illustrated by the contemporary debates within Peru and other states in South America.

Implications of the Destabilization Efforts Against Peru

Of course, the present circumstances facing Castillo in Peru is indicative of the imperialist policies within South America, Central America and the Caribbean. U.S. imperialism and its allies are seeking to overthrow all revolutionary governments in Latin America while thwarting those political parties, trade unions and popular alliances fighting to transform these states from neo-colonialism to socialist construction.

Although Castillo has made statements attempting to distance himself from the characterizations made by the corporate and imperialist-allied media, this has not halted the efforts to remove his administration from office. The foreign affairs ministry immediately announced Peru’s withdrawal from the so-called Lima Group, a U.S.-sponsored alliance of conservative forces aimed at the overthrow of the Bolivarian Republic of Venezuela and the installation of a right-wing regime compliant to the dictates of Washington and Wall Street.

Telesur reported on Peru in an August 6 dispatch noting:

“On Tuesday (Aug. 3), Peru’s Foreign Affairs Minister Hector Bejar announced that his country would withdraw from the Lima Group, which supported the Venezuelan opposition to overthrow the Bolivarian Revolution in 2019. ‘From a democratic foreign policy, we will contribute to the understanding of the various political tendencies that exist in Venezuela without intervening in its internal affairs,’ Bejar stated. Conservative politicians and former presidents from Peru, Mexico, Bolivia, and Argentina formed the Lima Group, an institution that operates as an instrument of U.S. geopolitics towards Latin America. In his inaugural address, Bejar also assured that he will work to strengthen cooperation and integration among Latin American countries without making ideological distinctions.”

An independent foreign policy which recognizes the sovereignty of Venezuela, Cuba and other countries in the region will undoubtedly fuel Washington’s opposition to the Free Peru government. Bolivian President Luis Arce of the Movement for Socialism Party has welcomed the withdrawal of Peru from the Lima Group. Bolivia underwent a U.S.-backed coup in 2019 overthrowing former President Evo Morales. Nonetheless, Arce won the latest election in 2020 returning the socialist government to power.

Even though the U.S. is now governed administratively by the Democratic Party under President Joe Biden, the foreign policy imperatives have not been altered. Hostilities towards Cuba, Venezuela, Bolivia, China, Iran, Zimbabwe and other anti-imperialist states remains a hallmark of the imperialist system irrespective of the two leading capitalist parties. A shift in Washington’s posture towards the socialist states and oppressed nations will require the building of an uncompromising antiwar and anti-imperialist movement within the confines of the U.S.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Abayomi Azikiwe is the editor of Pan-African News Wire. He is a frequent contributor to Global Research.

Featured image is from Public Reading Rooms

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.

First published by Global Research on August 3, 2021


The issue, for me, is not to demonize vaccination the way fundamentalists demonize any alternative to their God, usually by attacking people who dare to talk about it.

The issue, for me, is to tell people the truth:

There are safer, more effective and less dangerous alternatives to finding the way out of this crisis.

We are in a phase of religious fundamentalist totalitarianism.

In this phase, which is reaching its hysterical climax, the Vaccine is the new God. The parallel with religions in their extremes is striking.

I am not talking about religions in the original sense, one of whose accepted etymologies is religare, to connect [1]. All religions have been used by a part of their hierarchy to control, dominate, separate, exterminate, diverting the religious message from its original ambition, which is to gather, explain, reassure, include, protect and give meaning to our lives.

Behind this specter of vaccine fundamentalism are cynical people, who go so far as to pretend that they are concerned about your well-being.

There have always been cynics, including those behind religions that preached forgiveness, inclusion, justice, goodness in words but in fact killed, separated, judged, imprisoned and exterminated by means of zealous sadistic, psychopathic, fanatical executors.

If people want trustworthy rulers, honest politicians, they should always judge rulers, financial elites, politicians by their actions rather than by their words.

An example of this in Belgium was the appointment in 2020 of a person who had already defrauded, lied and betrayed [2] years earlier as Minister of Health.

To the credit of the people, it must be said that in Belgium, elections or not, citizens have no control over ministerial appointments.

Similarly, in France, the Minister of Justice is … indicted while retaining his position [3]. He obviously retains the support of his government.

Let us continue the parallel between the Vaccine and God.

In this story of the Almighty Vaccine, there are also many sincere believers. Some are even the fanatics, the token extremists.

They believe.

No matter what you say, serious studies or solid reasoning, it won’t change anything.

A French minister said it in these fundamentalist terms in 2015, “Vaccination is not debatable” [4].

I told you, many believers are sincere. Isn’t Hell paved with good intentions?

For the Vaccine God, they do not ask for proof.

“It has been said that Vaccination saved humanity, that it eradicated polio, that’s enough, no need to look for or read the studies, the original reports that prove it. In fact, they do not exist or have been truncated (see the work of Dr. Edward H. Kass of Harvard: Enquête Choc – Les vaccines ont-ils vraiment sauvé l’humanité? – Health and Wellness –

No matter.

Blind trust.

On the other hand, for drugs that have proven themselves, 70 years of use for hydroxychloroquine, more than forty years for ivermectin considered essential by the World Health Organization, more than forty years for azithromycin, molecules defended in the treatment of COVID-19 by reliable renowned scientists, and used in the field by many doctors with success, maximum mistrust.

Nothing can be done about it.

The believer does not tolerate any deviation from his faith.

It is even on this characteristic that we identify him, that we distinguish a believer from a true scientist who doubts, who relies on a provisional truth to advance, from question to question, never satisfied with ready-made answers.

For the RNA/DNA “vaccine”, all indulgences are allowed, even though the technology has been studied for several years, these products are unknown in large-scale human therapeutics, the pharmaceutical companies’ studies are in phase III [5], their marketing authorization is conditional, and the side effects, and even deaths, are accumulating [6]. Even this is contested by believers and all the fact checkers are on the case. Fact checkers paid by whom?

For a drug as essential as ivermectin, with today’s accumulating evidence of its benefit in treating COVID-19 [7-8-9-10], at all its stages, the number of randomized double-blind peer-reviewed studies will never be high enough for the Vaccine believer.

No paper, no scientist, even one with five Nobel Prizes, will ever convince the Vaccine believer.

On the other hand, for the God of Vaccines, any contradictory information will be fake news, disinformation, automatically demolished by the fact checkers, even before being analyzed, which it will never be anyways by the believers of the Vaccine.

The Vaccination religion feeds on the scientific aura, drapes itself in objectivity, rationality but in the case of Vaccination, it is only that, rags, appearance, fog. In reality, the belief in vaccination is nothing but subjectivity, emotionality and faith.

The “science” of Vaccination, as it is spread among today’s fundamentalists, is a parasite of true Science, a tumor invading true medicine.

What I say about the fundamentalists of Vaccination, others could say about the antivax, and it is true, for some.

The fundamentalists of Vaccination as an exclusive religion have a lot of fun to make amalgams, to put all their opponents in the same basket, the easiest basket to criticize.

For my part, I consider vaccination, even this RNA/DNA genetic manipulation, as an option, why not, provided that all the authorization phases are respected, that warning signals are taken into account and that time is taken to ensure safety.

The issue, for me, is not to demonize vaccination as the fundamentalists of it demonize any alternative to their God, usually by attacking people who dare to speak about it.

The issue, for me, is to tell people the truth:

There are safer, more effective and less dangerous alternatives to finding the way out of this crisis.

These alternatives will not make money for the big laboratories and Big Pharma whose stock market shares have skyrocketed thanks to the Vaccine God, they will not allow the rulers tempted by an absolute takeover of our lives to achieve their ends.

But these safer, more effective, less dangerous alternatives will work, they will remove the danger, including the variants, without exposing a part of humanity to unacceptable side effects [11], to unacceptable deaths [12], to an irreversible locking up of our liberties.

These notions are essential to understand how to fight this fanaticism, how to get out of this health nightmare and this totalitarianism which has the Vaccine as its God and which uses it to achieve its ends.

It is perfectly acceptable for Vaccine believers to sacrifice flocks for the common good, including healthy young people who give their lives so that the new God can save humanity.

What would shock any sane person is seen as sanctification by Vaccine believers.

We cannot address in the same way the cynics, those who only use this situation for their own profit (political, financial, narcissistic), and the true believers, those who have Faith, those who sincerely believe in their new God called Vaccine, even if in this case it is not a real one.

The former, cowards as usual, hide behind the latter.

The former deserve neither dialogue nor forgiveness. We must deal with them as a healthy human body deals with a parasite, a cancer cell or a pathogen.

The latter must be dealt with in the light of their sincere faith. Vaccination is their right, but perhaps if they learned that there are more effective and less dangerous alternatives, they would come to their senses.

As for the most fanatical elements who are not cynical opportunists disguised as believers, for those who want everyone to be vaccinated, there is no way out, no way out other than to protect ourselves from them, for the common good, by keeping them away and helping them psychologically.

Humanity is really in danger today, not because of what most people believe.

Not because of a virus.

Because of the cynical psychopathy of a few, the blind Faith of some, the deception-based belief of many and the bystander passivity of the majority.

Whatever category you fall into, you will be responsible for the fate of humanity.

You can still act, choose.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Dr. Pascal Sacré is physician specialized in critical care, author and renowned public health analyst, Charleroi, Belgium. He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG). 


[1] Il y a deux sources étymologiques du mot « religion » : relegere (cueillir, rassembler) et religare (lier, relier) – [Tete de Haspinger (Egger Lienz-Albin, 1908)] (

[2] Les pots-de-vin d’Agusta font chuter le ministre des Affaires étrangères belge – Libération (

[3] Affaire Dupond-Moretti : « Un ministre de la Justice mis en examen, c’est inimaginable » (

[4] La vaccination, ça se discute (

[5] Oui, les vaccins contre la Covid 19 sont expérimentaux ! Dr Gérard Delépine, revue Sapiens numéro 9, mai 2021, pages 14-20


[7] The FDA-approved drug ivermectin inhibits the replication of SARS-CoV-2 in vitro – ScienceDirect

[8] Lab experiments show anti-parasitic drug, Ivermectin, eliminates SARS-CoV-2 in cells in 48 hours – Monash Biomedicine Discovery Institute

[9] Ivermectine contre vaccins : devinez qui GAGNE le match par KO ? – Santé Corps Esprit (

[10] L’ivermectine atténue les symptômes de la Covid-19 dans un modèle animal (

[11] Sur CNews, Brigitte Milhau : « 1 enfant sur 5 000 aura un problème cardiaque » (

[12] Maxime Beltra, 22 ans, meurt suite à la vaccination anti-covid. Son père raconte (



Translated from French. First published by

Prosternez-vous devant le Dieu Vaccin

Par Dr Pascal Sacré, 30 juillet 2021


  • Posted in English, Mobile
  • Comments Off on The Specter of Vaccine Fundamentalism: Bowing Down and Serving the “God of Vaccines”

All Roads Lead to the Battle for Kabul

By Pepe Escobar, August 11, 2021

The ever-elusive Afghan “peace” process negotiations re-start this Wednesday in Doha via the extended troika – the US, Russia, China and Pakistan. The contrast with the accumulated facts on the ground could not be starker.

Medical Fantasies, Fabrications and Deceptions: Anthony Fauci’s Unscientific Manifesto

By Richard Gale and Dr. Gary Null, August 11, 2021

Perhaps the most mistaken magic at this moment is the promise about Covid-19 vaccines: the repeated mantra that the science is now sealed that they are safe and effective.

Amid Growing Calls for Vaccine Mandates, Employers and Employees Weigh Options

By Megan Redshaw, August 11, 2021

It’s not just businesses, the federal government and the military — the push is also on to mandate COVID vaccines for school children, despite evidence showing the benefits don’t outweigh the risks.

Fiscal Tyranny: Biden Threatens to Withhold Federal Funding from Universities, Nursing Homes and Other Federally-funded Institutions if They Don’t Hit Mandatory COVID Vaccination Quotas

By Ethan Huff, August 11, 2021

In an effort to bully more Americans into getting “vaccinated” for the Wuhan coronavirus (Covid-19), Joe Biden is now threatening to withhold federal funding from schools, nursing homes and other critical sectors.

Video: French Police Patrol Cafes Asking to See Citizens’ Vaccine Papers

By Steve Watson, August 11, 2021

Video has emerged out of Paris, France, showing police patrolling cafes and bars demanding to see people’s credentials and making sure they are not breaking the law by enjoying themselves while unvaccinated.

‘Economic Warfare, Designed to Starve the Cuban People into Rebellion’

By Janine Jackson and James Early, August 11, 2021

Anti-government demonstrations in Cuba have received a good deal of glorifying US media attention—in contrast to other, larger movements elsewhere in Latin America.

Afghanistan: a Tale of never ending Tragedy

By Prof. John Ryan, August 11, 2021

It must be recalled that the mujahedeen had been initially created by the CIA to fight the USSR. They were later defeated by the Taliban and were confined to about 10 percent of the country in the north.

T Is for Tyranny: How Freedom Dies from A to Z

By John W. Whitehead, August 11, 2021

The American people, the permanent underclass in America, have allowed themselves to be so distracted and divided that they have failed to notice the building blocks of tyranny being laid down right under their noses by the architects of the Deep State.

The Fake “Delta Variant” and the Fourth Wave: Another Lockdown? Upcoming Financial Crash? Worldwide Economic and Social Sabotage?

By Prof Michel Chossudovsky, August 11, 2021

The original virus categorized by the WHO and the CDC as “similar to seasonal influenza” is not a killer virus. Moreover, virus variants are always “less vigilant” and “less dangerous” than the original virus.

  • Posted in NO READ MORE LINK
  • Comments Off on Selected Articles: Medical Fantasies, Fabrications and Deceptions: Anthony Fauci’s Unscientific Manifesto

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


The desperate attempt by the US imperium to nab Julian Assange was elevated to another level on August 11 in a preliminary hearing before the UK High Court.  The central component to this gruesome affair was the continuing libel of the expert witness upon which District Justice Vanessa Baraitser placed so much emphasis in her January 4 decision not to extradite the WikiLeaks publisher.

The prosecution effort was intended to add more strings to their bow.  The US had already been given leave to appeal in July on the basis that the judge erred in law by deciding that Assange’s extradition would be oppressive.  This particular fatuous argument assumes that Baraitser was being too presumptuous about the appalling conditions that would face the publisher.  Why, they lament, did she not seek the relevant assurances from the US authorities?  If she had, they would have promised that Special Administrative Measures would not be imposed on Assange in pre-trial detention or in prison.  Nor would he find himself degrading in the appalling conditions of a Supermax facility.

This dubious undertaking was made alongside others, including the assurance that Assange would receive appropriate clinical and psychological treatment as recommended by the relevant clinician, and that he would qualify under the Council of Europe Convention on the Transfer of Sentenced Persons.  Doing so would enable him to be transferred to Australia with the approval of the US Department of Justice.   The obvious question to ask here, and one put by the defence at the time, was why the prosecution had avoided giving these assurances at the extradition trial itself.

The judges looked favourably upon the prosecutor’s arguments that Professor Michael Kopelman’s evidence was possibly given undue weight.  Kopelman had not disclosed to the district court his knowledge of Assange’s relationship with Stella Moris and the existence of their two children.  Not doing so meant he had misled the court. 

According to Clair Dobbin QC from the Crown Prosecution Service, Kopelman had given an undertaking to the court via a signed declaration that he would be an impartial expert witness.   He had been informed about his obligation to the court not to withhold information that might colour the evidence provided.  “If an expert has misled the court, he has failed in his duty.”  The district judge had failed to “appreciate the significance of the fact that Kopelman was willing to mislead”.

Had Dobbin bothered going through Baraitser’s judgment in detail she would have found a different picture.  The justice had described the concealment as “misleading and inappropriate in the context of [Kopelman’s] obligations to the court, but an understandable human response.”  This did not prevent her accepting the neuropsychiatrist’s view that “Assange suffers from recurrent depressive disorder, which was severe in December 2019, and sometimes accompanied by psychotic features (hallucinations), often with ruminative suicidal ideas.”  Nor had the concealment impaired Baraitser’s judgment, given that she already knew of the existence of Moris and the children before reading “the medical evidence or heard evidence on the issue.” 

Defence counsel Edward Fitzgerald QC reiterated these points to the High Court bench.  The lower court was fully apprised of the evidence in its entirety, including two psychiatric reports and personal testimony.  Taken together, Kopelman could not be said to have breached his duty to the court.  As Fitzgerald explained, there was no “tactical advantage being gained” in Kopelman not disclosing the existence of Moris or the children in the first report but a very serious concern about their welfare given the threat posed by UC Global.  That particularly ignominious security firm was tasked by US authorities to bug the Ecuadorian embassy in London, attempted to make off with a diaper of one of Assange’s children for DNA testing, and chewed over the option of abducting or poisoning the publisher.

The effect of Kopelman’s concealment upon the evidence, the court found, could be raised in appeal by the prosecution.  As one of the two justices presiding, Lord Justice Holroyde reasoned, “Given the importance to the administration of justice of a court being able to rely on the impartiality of an expert witness, it is in my view arguable that more details and critical consideration should have been given to why [Kopelman’s] ‘understandable human response’ gave rise to a misleading report.” 

The High Court also accepted the submission by the prosecution that it could argue that the district judge had erred in assessing the medical evidence on Assange’s suicide risk.  Dobbin, as she did at the extradition trial, continued the rubbishing campaign against Assange’s mental wellbeing.  “It really requires a mental illness of a type that the ability to resist suicide has been lost.  Part of the appeal will be that Assange did not have a mental illness that came close to being of that nature and degree.” 

Too much weight, the prosecution contended in written submissions, had been given to Kopelman and the evidence of Dr. Quinton Deeley, the latter finding that Assange could be placed at the “high functioning end” of the autism spectrum.  Too little consideration had been given to the evidence from the prosecution witnesses, forensic psychiatrists Seena Fazel and Dr. Nigel Blackwood.  Along the way, the prosecution did its best to misrepresent Deeley’s evidence, arguing that he had prescribed the suicide risk as arising from a rational and voluntary choice. This ignored the actual court evidence which considered the combined circumstances of both Assange’s autism and the conditions of his detention.  When taken together, the risk of suicide risk was a high one.

The troubling feature of the High Court decision is that it facilitates an assault on a lower judge’s assessment of expert evidence, something even Holroyde admitted to be exceptional.  This point was forcefully made by the defence in written submissions: the prosecution’s attack on Baraitser’s preference for the medical evidence furnished by the defence witnesses failed “to recognise the entitlement of the primary decision maker to reach her own decision on the weight to be attached to the expert evidence of the defence on the one hand and the prosecution experts on the other.”

To assume that granting the US grounds to challenge Kopelman and the way Baraitser read the medical evidence as matters of justice are matters of farce, not fact.  After the hearing, Assange reminded Fitzgerald via video link from Belmarsh Prison that the human rights dimension in the case was unavoidable: Kopelman had simply wished to protect his client’s children from harm.  Reference to the discovery of guns found in the home of David Morales, the director of UC Global, was made.  The brand and serial numbers of the weapons had been effaced.

If justice was an appropriate consideration in this politicised case, which has featured surveillance by a superpower, privacy breaches, harassment and even suggested kidnapping or assassination of a publisher, Assange would be free.  Instead, the US imperium has been given more room to wriggle.      


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Dr. Binoy Kampmark was a Commonwealth Scholar at Selwyn College, Cambridge.  He lectures at RMIT University, Melbourne. He is a frequent contributor to Global Research and Asia-Pacific Research. Email: [email protected]

Featured image: Julian Assange in Belmarsh Prison in 2019 (Source: WSWS)

The Danger of Anti-China Rhetoric

August 12th, 2021 by Li Zhou

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on The Danger of Anti-China Rhetoric

Biden Must Call Off the B-52s Bombing Afghan Cities

August 12th, 2021 by Medea Benjamin

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Nine provincial capitals in Afghanistan have fallen to the Taliban in six days – Zaranj, Sheberghan, Sar-e-Pul, Kunduz, Taloqan, Aybak, Farah, Pul-e-Khumri and Faizabad – while fighting continues in four more – Lashkargah, Kandahar, Herat & Mazar-i-Sharif. U.S. military officials now believe Kabul, Afghanistan’s capital, could fall in one to three months

It is horrific to watch the death, destruction and mass displacement of thousands of terrified Afghans and the triumph of the misogynist Taliban that ruled the nation 20 years ago. But the fall of the centralized, corrupt government propped up by the Western powers was inevitable, whether this year, next year or ten years from now.      

President Biden has reacted to America’s snowballing humiliation in the graveyard of empires by once again dispatching U.S. envoy Zalmay Khalilzad to Doha to urge the government and the Taliban to seek a political solution, while at the same time dispatching B-52 bombers to attack at least two provincial capitals.

In Lashkargah, the capital of Helmand province, the U.S. bombing has already reportedly destroyed a high school and a health clinic. Another B-52 bombed Sheberghan, the capital of Jowzjan province and the home of the infamous warlord and accused war criminal Abdul Rashid Dostum, who is now the military commander of the U.S.-backed government’s armed forces. 

Meanwhile, the New York Times reports that U.S. Reaper drones and AC-130 gunships are also still operating in Afghanistan. 

The rapid disintegration of the Afghan forces that the U.S. and its Western allies have recruited, armed and trained for 20 years at a cost of about $90 billion should come as no surprise. On paper, the Afghan National Army has 180,000 troops, but in reality most are unemployed Afghans desperate to earn some money to support their families but not eager to fight their fellow Afghans. The Afghan Army is also notorious for its corruption and mismanagement. 

The army and the even more beleaguered and vulnerable police forces that man isolated outposts and checkpoints around the country are plagued by high casualties, rapid turnover and desertion. Most troops feel no loyalty to the corrupt U.S.-backed government and routinely abandon their posts, either to join the Taliban or just to go home. 

When the BBC asked General Khoshal Sadat, the national police chief, about the impact of high casualties on police recruitment in February 2020, he cynically replied,

“When you look at recruitment, I always think about the Afghan families and how many children they have. The good thing is there is never a shortage of fighting-age males who will be able to join the force.” 

But a police recruit at a checkpoint questioned the very purpose of the war, telling the BBC’s Nanna Muus Steffensen, “We Muslims are all brothers. We don’t have a problem with each other.” In that case, she asked him, why were they fighting? He hesitated, laughed nervously and shook his head in resignation. “You know why. I know why,” he said. “It’s not really our fight.” 

Since 2007, the jewel of U.S. and Western military training missions in Afghanistan has been the Afghan Commando Corps or special operations forces, who comprise only 7% of Afghan National Army troops but reportedly do 70 to 80% of the fighting. But the Commandos have struggled to reach their target of recruiting, arming and training 30,000 troops, and poor recruitment from Pashtuns, the largest and traditionally dominant ethnic group, has been a critical weakness, especially from the Pashtun heartland in the South. 

The Commandos and the professional officer corps of the Afghan National Army are dominated by ethnic Tajiks, effectively the successors to the Northern Alliance that the U.S. supported against the Taliban 20 years ago. As of 2017, the Commandos numbered only 16,000 to 21,000, and it is not clear how many of these Western-trained troops now serve as the last line of defense between the U.S.-backed puppet government and total defeat. 

The Taliban’s speedy and simultaneous occupation of large amounts of territory all over the country appears to be a deliberate strategy to overwhelm and outflank the government’s small number of well-trained, well-armed troops. The Taliban have had more success winning the loyalty of minorities in the North and West than government forces have had recruiting Pashtuns from the South, and the government’s small number of well-trained troops cannot be everywhere at once.

But what of the United States? Its deployment of B-52 bombers, Reaper drones and AC-130 gunships are a brutal response by a failing, flailing imperial power to a historic, humiliating defeat. 

The United States does not flinch from committing mass murder against its enemies. Just look at the U.S.-led destruction of Fallujah and Mosul in Iraq, and Raqqa in Syria. How many Americans even know about the officially-sanctioned massacre of civilians that Iraqi forces committed when the U.S.-led coalition finally took control of Mosul in 2017, after President Trump said it should “take out the families” of Islamic State fighters?

Twenty years after Bush, Cheney and Rumsfeld committed a full range of war crimes, from torture and the deliberate killing of civilians to the “supreme international crime” of aggression, Biden is clearly no more concerned than they were with criminal accountability or the judgment of history. But even from the most pragmatic and callous point of view, what can continued aerial bombardment of Afghan cities accomplish, besides a final but futile climax to the 20-year-long U.S. slaughter of Afghans by over 80,000 American bombs and missiles?

The intellectually and strategically bankrupt U.S. military and CIA bureaucracy has a history of congratulating itself for fleeting, superficial victories. It quickly declared victory in Afghanistan in 2001 and set out to duplicate its imagined conquest in Iraq. Then the short-lived success of their 2011 regime change operation in Libya encouraged the United States and its allies to turn Al Qaeda loose in Syria, spawning a decade of intractable violence and chaos and the rise of the Islamic State. 

In the same manner, Biden’s unaccountable and corrupt national security advisors seem to be urging him to use the same weapons that obliterated the Islamic State’s urban bases in Iraq and Syria to attack Taliban-held cities in Afghanistan. 

But Afghanistan is not Iraq or Syria. Only 26% of Afghans live in cities, compared with 71% in Iraq and 54% in Syria, and the Taliban’s base is not in the cities but in the rural areas where the other three quarters of Afghans live. Despite support from Pakistan over the years, the Taliban are not an invading force like Islamic State in Iraq but an Afghan nationalist movement that has fought for 20 years to expel foreign invasion and occupation forces from their country. 

In many areas, Afghan government forces have not fled from the Taliban, as the Iraqi Army did from the Islamic State, but joined them. On August 9th, the Taliban occupied Aybak, the sixth provincial capital to fall, after a local warlord and his 250 fighters agreed to join forces with the Taliban and the governor of Samangan province handed the city over to them.

That very same day, the Afghan government’s chief negotiator, Abdullah Abdullah, returned to Doha for further peace talks with the Taliban. His American allies must make it clear to him and his government, and to the Taliban, that the United States will fully support every effort to achieve a more peaceful political transition. 

But the United States must not keep bombing and killing Afghans to provide cover for the U.S.-backed puppet government to avoid difficult but necessary compromises at the negotiating table to bring peace to the incredibly long-suffering, war-weary people of Afghanistan. Bombing Taliban-occupied cities and the people who live in them is a savage and criminal policy that President Biden must renounce.           

The defeat of the United States and its allies in Afghanistan now seems to be unfolding even faster than the collapse of South Vietnam between 1973 and 1975. The public takeaway from the U.S. defeat in Southeast Asia was the “Vietnam syndrome,” an aversion to overseas military interventions that lasted for decades. 

As we approach the 20-year anniversary of the 9/11 attacks, we should reflect on how the Bush administration exploited the U.S. public’s thirst for revenge to unleash this bloody, tragic and utterly futile 20-year war. 

The lesson of America’s experience in Afghanistan should be a new “Afghanistan syndrome,” a public aversion to war that prevents future U.S. military attacks and invasions, rejects attempts to socially engineer the governments of other nations and leads to a new and active American commitment to peace, diplomacy and disarmament.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Medea Benjamin is cofounder of CODEPINK for Peace, and author of several books, including Inside Iran: The Real History and Politics of the Islamic Republic of Iran

Nicolas J. S. Davies is an independent journalist, a researcher with CODEPINK and the author of Blood On Our Hands: the American Invasion and Destruction of Iraq.             

waronterrorism.jpgby Michel Chossudovsky
ISBN Number: 9780973714715
List Price: $24.95
click here to order

Special Price: $18.00

In this new and expanded edition of Michel Chossudovsky’s 2002 best seller, the author blows away the smokescreen put up by the mainstream media, that 9/11 was an attack on America by “Islamic terrorists”.  Through meticulous research, the author uncovers a military-intelligence ploy behind the September 11 attacks, and the cover-up and complicity of key members of the Bush Administration.

The expanded edition, which includes twelve new chapters focuses on the use of 9/11 as a pretext for the invasion and illegal occupation of Iraq, the militarisation of justice and law enforcement and the repeal of democracy.

According to Chossudovsky, the  “war on terrorism” is a complete fabrication based on the illusion that one man, Osama bin Laden, outwitted the $40 billion-a-year American intelligence apparatus. The “war on terrorism” is a war of conquest. Globalisation is the final march to the “New World Order”, dominated by Wall Street and the U.S. military-industrial complex.

September 11, 2001 provides a justification for waging a war without borders. Washington’s agenda consists in extending the frontiers of the American Empire to facilitate complete U.S. corporate control, while installing within America the institutions of the Homeland Security State.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Justice Holmes recently sided with the Crown and against Meng Wanzhou’s legal team to exclude 300 HSBC bank documents as evidence during the final round of extradition hearings, which began Aug. 3. These documents prove Meng gave HSBC complete disclosure of transactions related to Iran and no fraud was committed. Huawei obtained the documents through a successful court proceeding in Hong Kong. Justice Holmes ruled that the documents would be more appropriately handled at a future date in a U.S. court where Meng may be sent, depending on the outcome of the trial.

Naturally, we, in the cross-Canada campaign to free Meng Wanzhou do not agree with the judge’s decision. Our campaign takes the position that, in view of the evidence contained in the trove of 300 HSBC documents, Minister of Justice Lametti ought to use his discretionary power, as provided by Sec. 23 of the Extradition Act, to terminate Meng’s extradition and release her immediately to return to China. After all, the minister and cabinet are well aware of the content of the new HSBC documents: the substance of this new evidence has been widely covered in the mainstream media around the globe.

Meng’s legal team opened their final arguments by terming Meng’s arrest as “a legal kidnapping.” We maintain that the Trudeau government should never have collaborated with the Trump administration to arrest her nearly three years ago. The very fact that Trump explicitly remarked, several days later, that he intended to hold Meng hostage and use her as a bargaining chip in his trade war with China, showed that the extradition request was political in nature and should therefore have invalidated the U.S. request under Canada’s Extradition Act. Moreover, the U.S. request was based on the false premise of U.S. extraterritoriality, that is to say, attempting to exert non-existent U.S. jurisdiction over dealings between Huawei, a Chinese high-tech company; HSBC, a British bank; and Iran, a sovereign state, none of whose dealings (in this matter) took place in the U.S.A. By requesting Meng’s extradition from Canada to the U.S.A., Trump was also sending a signal to global political and business leaders that the U.S. would continue to enforce its unilateral and illegal economic sanctions on Iran which were supposed to have been lifted under UN Security Council Resolution 2231 when the JCPOA (Iran Nuclear Deal) came into effect on Jan. 16, 2016. Finally, Trudeau shouldn’t have collaborated with Trump because of Trump’s malicious intent to cripple Huawei and to keep China permanently underdeveloped.

None of the U.S. aims above in arresting Meng were in Canada’s national interest, including the last: Huawei employs some 1,400 very highly-paid professionals in Canada, 400 of whom work in its research and development centre in Markham. Huawei Canada has voluntarily collaborated with the federal government to increase internet connectivity for the mainly-Indigenous people of Canada’s North.

By releasing Meng, Canada could show a measure of independence of foreign policy and begin to restore friendly political and economic relations with the People’s Republic of China, our second-largest trading partner.

Our campaign intends to participate in the probable, upcoming, federal election by challenging candidates on their stands about the immediate and unconditional release of Meng. Stay tuned also for an upcoming cross-Canada online webinar laying out all the details of this glaring Canadian miscarriage of justice.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

This article was originally published on The Hamilton Spectator.

Ken Stone is treasurer of the Hamilton Coalition To Stop The War ([email protected]) and a member of the steering committee of the cross-Canada campaign to free Meng Wanzhou.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.



“Formerly, when religion was strong and science weak, men mistook magic for medicine; now, when science is strong and religion is weak, men mistake medicine for magic.”  —  Thomas Szasz, The Second Sin, 1973


For those who have managed to hold onto a thread of sanity amidst our government’s surreal handling of the SARS-2 frenzy, Szasz’s quote drills down into the dark basement of the medical fantasies, fabrications, and deceptions. This is misinformation now being preached from the pulpits at the CDC, NIAID, the World Health Organization, and presidencies throughout the developed world.

Perhaps the most mistaken magic at this moment is the promise about Covid-19 vaccines: the repeated mantra that the science is now sealed that they are safe and effective.  We are harangued that unless we get vaccinated the virus will continue to spread. Those who refuse are threats to public health safety.  In light of the actual evidence, this is voodoo medicine at its worst. It is the paragon of pseudoscience and “woo.” It also illustrates our health officials’ callous disregard towards every citizen – old, young, ill or pregnant.  And this stubborn unsound belief has reached criminal proportions.

Indeed, every effort should to be made to investigate and evaluate the available medical science before slipping into either of the two opposing camps; those embracing irrational conspiracy theories and those adhering to official medical magic. We must also take into account the real-life empirical evidence and professional accounts of physicians in the field. Of course, not all conspiracy theories are false. The US government’s Tuskegee syphilis experiment was a conspiracy as was the CDC’s intentional whitewashing of its own research showing a vaccine-autism association. In an earlier investigation we enumerated many documented examples of the CDC’s malfeasance. Now the agency’s manipulation and falsification of research and data convinces us that the CDC and its sibling health agencies no longer warrant the public’s trust.

The current conspiracy theories about the SARS-2 virus as well as the governments’ response raise very legitimate concerns about the emergence of a growing conspiratorial fundamentalism. Such conspiratorial thinking is largely based upon uncritical a priori assumptions that everything issued from the medical establishment is an orchestrated sedition to wrestle democratic control, personal freedoms and civil liberties away from citizens.

There are other alternative explanations to be weighed. For example, it might simply be the case that those leaders calling the shots are horribly delusional and have forgotten the basic principles of every science course they took in college.  Medicine has been hijacked by these entitled authorities.

Medical fundamentalism, now being endorsed by Anthony Fauci at the NIAID, the CDC’s Rachel Wolensky, Bill Gates and the World Health Organization, refuses to budge from its zealous, religious-like love affair in the value of its own research; similar to a vicious feedback loop, their biases reconfirm and strengthen a vested authoritarian control over the narrative.

What both sides fail to realize is that each is empowering and inflaming the other. Unfounded conspiratorial illusions, such as those being promulgated by trackers of invisible Illuminati and pedophile cartels, as well as the inquisitional dogma of the government’s medical fundamentalism, contaminate the discourse and narrative. Both are equally destructive repudiations of the fundamental basis for how science reaches plausible facts.

In Washington, the widely accepted methods of scientific inquiry, including inductive and deductive reasoning, have been mauled by the political and economic agendas of conquest and rule in the name of “science.” Its odor is reminiscent of the stench that wafted through the halls of science during the Stalinist era in the USSR. This fanatical frenzy has more in common with a crusade’s “god on our side” marching orders than objective scientific investigation. Its anti-evidence-based platitudes are grist for the mill to feed carefully massaged statistics, such as Covid infection cases and adverse vaccine reactions, to a thoroughly compromised media, particularly the armies of irresponsible journalists at the New York Times, Washington Post, MSNBC, CNN, PBS and NPR, BBC and the Guardian, and the Daily Beast. Over the course of the pandemic we have been at loggerheads to make rational sense about the outright stupidity that infects our federal health agencies. It is not always easy to distinguish between intentional malice from simple blind ignorance and gross ineptitude, even among the most highly intelligent and professional people.

American medical science has failed to evolve beyond the scientific fundamentalism launched by Thomas Huxley in the mid-19th century. Huxley, famously known as Darwin’s bulldog, is properly regarded as the father of a growing aberration within the biological sciences that he termed “the Church Scientific” or what today is known as Scientism. Scientism is a dogmatic form of scientific materialism taken to a radical and farcical extreme. It might best be defined as an “excessive belief in the power or value of science.”  It is also a form of secular imperialism or expansionism, as it was Huxley’s ambition to see science displace religion as the world’s universal belief system.

At best, human biology and medicine should be regarded as “soft” sciences. They lack the rigor of the “hard” sciences such as physics, inorganic chemistry, engineering and mathematics. In fact, there is ample evidence to suggest that the practice of medicine is not a true science at all. Authentic science makes every effort to observe and investigate very carefully that which it is trying to understand. It doesn’t exclude anomalies that might challenge prior partiality, prejudices and conflicts of interest. After we can appreciate the legitimate questions raised by this premise, we can realize the media’s blather “to follow the science”, to get vaccinated, to surrender yourself to useless PCR testing, to wear masks and obey lockdowns is a dangerous bromide. There is no consensual data aside from groupthink to convincingly validate any of these orders.

In 1892, the Canadian physician Sir William Osler, regarded as the father of modern medicine, was a co-founder of the now prestigious Johns Hopkins Hospital. Sir Osler believed that medicine may never become a true science.  “The practice of medicine is an art, based on science,” Osler wrote. “Working with science, in general, it has not reached, perhaps never will, the dignity of a complete science, with exact laws, like astronomy or engineering.”  He further posed the question whether there can be any authentic science in medicine. “Yes, but in parts only, such as anatomy and physiology.”  In other words, if a body doesn’t move, breathe or have a heartbeat, medicine can commence with real scientific inquiry and evaluation.

One stark example of the anti-science employed by drug and vaccine makers is the reliance on placebos in double-blinded clinical studies. To realize how a placebo is incorporated and understood by the medical establishment is rather comical. It has long been believed that the gold standard for conducting randomized controlled trials (RCTs) is to test for the efficacy and safety of a new drug or vaccine against a placebo group. Unless new products are tested with a control group receiving an inert substance, such as a sugar pill or saline solution, the study cannot be given much credibility.

The majority of vaccines currently administered in the US were in fact never tested against a valid placebo group. Why the CDC and FDA do not require this of vaccine makers remains a weird mystery. It is not just bad regulatory policy; it is terrible science. When a trial placebo recipient has a positive outcome that is similar to or in some cases identical to having taken the actual drug or vaccine, there is no way to quantifiably measure the non-pharmacological mechanism that brought about the result.  This led Dr. Ted Kaptchuck at Harvard-affiliated Beth Deaconess Medical Center to postulate that many positive results of clinical trial participants receiving the actual drug may also display a placebo effect.  The same is equally true for vaccine trials. In other words, although we are told that the Pfizer and Moderna Covid vaccines are approximately 95 percent effective, based upon the data after comparing vaccine and placebo groups, the actual effectiveness may be much lower due to placebo effects among vaccine recipients. On the other hand, a nocebo may account for the remaining estimated 5 percent of vaccine recipients. In either case, scientists have no means at their disposal to determine whether antibody immunity is induced by mind-body activity or the vaccine in any given individual.

The absurd irony is that if one were to ask a random sampling of a thousand federal health officials and scientists, physicians and clinicians, drug company executives, and university medical school professors to explain the actual mind-body mechanisms contributing to the placebo effect, there would be a thousand different answers or a chorus of shrugged shoulders. How scientific is it that for almost every human clinical trial required to bring a pharmaceutical drug and vaccine to market, modern medicine relies on a principle it has yet to understand? Consequently vaccine-friendly data that makes newsheadlines is largely based upon institutionalized bias. Skeptic medical materialism’s hypocrisy is further compounded when the placebo effect is used in a disparaging context to discredit natural non-conventional medical therapies. To jump to such conclusions, medicine has had to rely heavily upon metaphysical realism as its starting point. This is where modern medicine departs from being a true science and enters a make-believe world where we find its evidence standing on shaky ground.

A recent anomaly during the current Covid-19 vaccine trials last autumn violates conventional standards. The placebo control groups were not carried through to their full conclusion. Contrary to common sense and clinical trial protocols, placebo participants were vaccinated long before the trials were completed. In effect the vaccine companies wiped out any potential clinical trace to properly observe and evaluate long-term adverse vaccine events. In addition, the vaccines are being administered indiscriminately aside from very small selected populations. Physicians and immunological experts now admonishing Fauci and government and institutional mandates are raising legitimate medical concerns that vaccinating individuals who had already contracted the virus could put these persons’ health and lives at risk.

Moreover, published research on the nature of the placebo effect is scant and unimpressive. There is no serious interest within the medical establishment to fund the necessary studies to get down to the bottom of this phenomenon despite its central role in clinical trial protocols and methodologies. The logic for this avoidance is likely the petrified fear that pervades the federal health regime in general. Yet this guarded fear has served well to barricade medical orthodoxy against acknowledging mind-body relationships beyond a strict reductionist hypothesis.

It could thoroughly disrupt the establishment’s faith in scientific materialism upon which so much medical research is based, especially within the pharmaceutical industry. Similar to Galileo’s threats to the Church’s geocentric universe, it could shake the cathedrals of our now dominant medical Scientism and the doctrinal edicts it levies upon the American public. Galileo’s persecutors too wanted to preserve the common good; albeit it was a good framed by tyranny and the mistreatment of dissidents.

As we make efforts to unravel the trail of contradictions, and often the outright lies promulgated by our medical authorities regarding mass vaccine mandates, irresponsible diagnostic testing with imprecise tools to identify a viral infection, we may heed MIT’s Thomas Kuhn’s analysis of dominant paradigms within the sciences and their tendency towards dogmatic and authoritarian control.  In order to understand the truth or falsehood of the government’s medical declarations, the very nature of these authoritative voices should be investigated. What values do they hold? What are the boundaries between what they tolerate and what they disdain?

In our opinion, the official Covid narrative’s boundaries are exceedingly narrow, compartmentalized and heavily attired with grotesque armor forged with religious-like faith and zeal. Repeatedly we note that Fauci’s pogroms against alternative viral therapies by front line doctors and medical experts, who are providing sound evidence about the Covid-vaccines’ risks of long-term injury and death, are blatantly American-Eurocentric.

China for example regularly prescribes Traditional Chinese medical treatments against SARS-2 infections as do many other countries with strong traditional medical systems. Frequently, medical research laboratories and medical schools outside the American-Euro arena are discovering natural molecules both for prevention and treatment. Worldwide there are nations that require treating Covid patients with ivermectin, hydroxychloroquine, vitamin D and other inexpensive safe drugs and supplements. But such promising and cheaper alternatives that compromise the CDC’s and Wall Street’s interests in the drug industry are categorically ignored or ridiculed. This highlights one sharp distinction between dependable research and pseudoscientific fraud that might explain Washington’s frequent ridiculous decisions and its aggressive public relations endeavors to silence medical opponents. Their reactive diatribes, which either brazenly or casually advocate for censorship, contribute nothing constructive to the medical arts; rather it makes us all the less wise and naive. For the younger generation of future physicians and medical researchers, it is coercive brainwashing into a materialist creed that once found a home in the USSR.

The USSR made efforts to institute strict legislative control over the areas of scientific research permitted at Soviet technological and medical institutions. For example, Linus Pauling’s theory of resonating structures earned him a Nobel Prize; however the Soviet scientific bureaucracy ruled the theory was “bourgeois pseudoscience.”

Today, of course, resonance is no longer questioned and is a standard entry in science’s lexicon. Starting in 1949, an antiresonance campaign arose to force Soviet supporters of the theory “to confess their ideological sins and to publicly denounce resonance.”  For the Soviets, the resonance theory was not “materialistic” enough. The defining roots of the Soviets’ strong belief in the doctrine of scientific materialism had more in common with theology. Any scientific theory that hinted of idealism was censored. In order to advance their science within the limited confines of a materialist ideology, Soviet scientists had to creatively invent new definitions. We are again witnessing a similar practice as the CDC redefines the very definitions of a vaccine and the parameters of vaccine efficacy in order to fit its economic and political agendas. And these redefinitions have little plausible basis in reality.

The Soviet example serves as a dire public warning against the growing influence of radicalized and dogmatic scientific materialists in the US. These include groups that identify themselves as Skeptics who now infiltrate our universities and control large portions of the medical discourse on Wikipedia.

Leading proponents of the American medical fundamentalist project, particularly outspoken Skeptics such as vaccine guru Paul Offit, Doris Reiss and Skepticism’s army of internet trolls, give their support to the Fauci Manifesto and frequently come to the defense of the nation’s most rabid vaccine proponents such as California state senator Richard Pan and New York governor Andrew Cuomo. Skeptic platforms, and its’ penetration into the mainstream media, is our nation’s version of Soviet grassroots movements to banish critical scientific voices questioning the state-sanctioned narrative.  More recently discussions commenced to launch a Stalinist-styled campaign to reprimand physicians for holding medical views and opinions contrary to the Fauci Manifesto. Last month the Federation of State Medical Boards, the umbrella organization representing all US state boards, issued a statement that doctors could lose their medical license for communicating misinformation about the pandemic, without any further definition.

University of Southern California chemistry professor Anna Krylov remembers her education studying quantum physics in Moscow under the Soviet regime. She recounts the censorship and horrible fate of scientists who dared to follow the path of reliable scientific inquiry, which demanded unbiased and objective evaluation of the phenomenon under investigation.  “Textbooks and scientific papers,” Prof Krylov recalls, “tirelessly emphasized the priority and pre-eminence of Russian and Soviet science.” Today our American science only differs in that it has been thoroughly mutilated by corporate interests and greed, instead of a political ideology seeking world domination. In her article appearing in the Journal of Physical Chemistry, she writes:

“… the USSR is no longer on the map. But I find myself experiencing its legacy some thousands of miles to the west, as if I am living in an Orwellian twilight zone. I witness ever-increasing attempts to subject science and education to ideological control and censorship. Just as in Soviet times, the censorship is being justified by the greater good.”

It is doubtful that our federal health agencies’ leaders, nor the corporate and media interests the agencies bed with, are consciously aware that they are following the Soviet script. As in the USSR, they plot behavioral schemes to seduce the American public to give obeisance to a perverted medical system erected with straw and mud. In order to keep the pseudoscience of masks, unproven patented drugs and vaccines front and center, our medical bureaucracy, with the support of Silicon Valley and the mainstream media, has few options but to purge its critics to keep the fictions alive. It is a familiar pattern that was reenacted during the Church’s Inquisition, Nazi Germany, Maoist China, and the McCarthy era. It is being revived again as the CDC and NIAID seek to realize Thomas Huxley’s dream of a Church Scientific and take its seat on the throne of a politicized directorate of medicine.

By now there is no longer a secret that coercive propaganda was being employed very early during the pandemic.  According to released documents, SAGE behavioral psychologists advising the UK government, according to Piers Robinson, co-director of the Organization of Propaganda Studies, recommended “the use of the media to increase fear levels amongst the public and talked coercive measures to use to get people to buy into lockdowns.”

Before the documents were obtained, the names of the Covid pandemic committee members were kept secret. Other measures to covertly persuade and control the British public included education, incentivization, training, restrictions and environmental restructuring. Of course none of these efforts would have succeeded without the captured mainstream media acting in full compliance with the government’s political overreach. And let there be no mistake that US health agencies and British health authorities work in lockstep together. Federal health officials escape respectable journalists’ and the public’s scrutiny over their pseudoscientific pronouncements, which are ambiguously presented as consensual research, because it is intentionally worded and framed to dodge the need to provide actual data. Consequently, it is difficult for the average American to agree with or disprove the official narrative.  This is classical behavioral indoctrination at its worst.

Genuine science seeks objective, independent scientific consensus regardless whether a truth is aligned with personal values and beliefs.  At this moment numerous orthodox physicians and medical researchers are coming forward to give very credible evidence to challenge and devalue the US government’s campaign to vaccinate the population without exception. This important battle is not being waged by conventional versus alternative medical systems. It is an uprising within the ranks of the medical establishment, the first in our history.

Tens of thousands of professional critics are conventional doctors whose careers were never antagonistic to the value of vaccines. They had always acted as devoted comrades to the ruling medical establishment. Their commitment to save American lives, even at the cost of their professional careers and reputations, has been an extraordinary motivating force.

They have energetically applied their intellectual acumen to get down to the fundamentals in the medical literature and then uncover the truths about the efficacy of masks, vaccines, and various inexpensive proven drugs such as ivermectin.

Unlike Fauci and the bureaucratic elite who sit at his table, most have actually treated infected Covid patients and now are witnessing the carnage from mass vaccination.  The Fauci Manifesto on the other hand clutches desperately to a dogmatic belief that refuses to consider contrary evidence. Its authoritarian control over the media’s airwaves doesn’t permit the Manifesto to introspectively evaluate whether its policies may be spurious or downright counterfeit. Its anti-scientific claims solely echo those who are being courted, notably the pharmaceutical industrial complex and the American public who want an end to the nonsense.

Today we are facing the serious challenge to restructure society. The new chant by many world leaders, including Biden, Trudeau, Boris Johnson, Merkel and others is to “build back better” or launch a Great Reset.

Concurrent with the meager efforts to restore sound resilient policies and democratic securities, there has been the erection of a massive censorship apparatus to marginalize and silence critics and dissenters of federal policies.

If history is to serve as a lesson, such state-controlled censorship, according to Russian scholar Frank Ellis, contributed to the collapse of Soviet Union. During the pandemic, we are observing the Washington-Silicon Valley axis following the Soviet example. Unless it takes a hard right turn and becomes entrenched in an Orwellian nightmare, the narrative is bound to collapse. Fortunately there remains the fact that conventional medicine is not an exact science.

When Fauci publicly defends himself by stating, “A lot of what you’re seeing as attacks on me, quite frankly, are attacks on science,” we can now pause and acknowledge that there is no consensual evidence to back it. Many of Fauci’s medical critics have already shown this to be the case.  And this should give us hope. There will always be observable gaps in authoritarian pseudoscientific narratives, such as the Fauci Manifesto, that can never reach a consensus to become laws of science as in physics or mathematics. This is medical Scientism’s weak dark spot that is now being exposed by the swelling number of medical professionals who are uncovering the farce.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Richard Gale is the Executive Producer of the Progressive Radio Network and a former Senior Research Analyst in the biotechnology and genomic industries.

Dr. Gary Null is host of the nation’s longest running public radio program on alternative and nutritional health and a multi-award-winning documentary film director, including his recent Last Call to Tomorrow

They are frequent contributors to Global Research.

Featured image is from Zero Hedge

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


One might reasonably assume that in the over 20 years since the 9/11 attacks, the Pentagon would have finally managed to figure out how to exercise effective supervision and control over its private military contractors. 

You know, the hired guns in Afghanistan, Iraq and elsewhere, many of whom bubbled up to our consciousness with notorious war scandals in places like Fallujah and Nisour Square. In other words, the government should have established some sort of oversight strategy by now.

Reasonable perhaps. But wrong, according to a July 29 report released by the U.S. Government Accountability Office, which said:

The Department of Defense (DOD) has been unable to comprehensively identify private security contractor (PSC) contracts and personnel supporting contingency, humanitarian, peace-keeping, or other similar operations. 

That is GAO’s genteel way of saying the government still doesn’t have very good visibility into PSC activities.

A more forthright view was expressed by Peter Singer, senior fellow at the New America Foundation and longtime analyst of the private military contracting industry, who tweeted, “it is 2021 and the Pentagon still isn’t equipped to manage the private military contractors it has been hiring for over 2 decades and led to lives and billions of dollars lost in Iraq+Afghanistan.”

This is not just an accounting problem. It is a matter of risking a repeat of past debacles. A Bloomberg article noted,

The Pentagon must improve its tracking and accounting of private security contractors operating alongside military and U.S. civilian agencies or risk a repeat of a 2007 massacre of Iraqi citizens that stained the American counterinsurgency effort, according to Congress’s watchdog agency.

“If the department does not improve its means of identifying, recording, tracking, and assessing its use of PSC contracts and personnel, the associated negative strategic impacts the U.S. government experienced in Iraq and Afghanistan are at risk of reoccurring.” 

Unfortunately, this problem is not new. The U.S. government has had difficulty keeping track of its hired guns since it first started using them in Afghanistan and Iraq. As Tina Won Sherman, the lead analyst for the report, said in a GAO podcast:

…we’ve reported for several years that the Department of Defense lacks complete information about the number of contractors it employs. So it’s not entirely surprising that the department doesn’t have a full picture of its private security contractors, including how many it has, how much they cost, where they’re located, the types of operations they are supporting, and whether or not they are armed… One of the reasons for this is that the department doesn’t have a consistent definition for private security services. So job titles such as security guard and police patrol officer fall under that umbrella, while other job titles such as police detective or sheriff’s patrol officers do not. 

And if you don’t know who the players are you can’t punish them when they do something wrong. As the GAO acknowledged in a footnote, “Army and Air Force contracting officials we spoke with said they could not recall any instance of a PSC company being suspended or disbarred.” And it’s not as if PSCs haven’t done things that merit punishment. One has only to look at the numerous reports published by the Special Inspector Generals for Iraq and Afghanistan Reconstruction to find examples.

Or, another GAO report, released August 4 on human trafficking among foreign workers employed on contracts, which found that “The U.S. government has a zero tolerance policy for human trafficking, as established in a presidential directive, but trafficking in persons (TIP) of foreign workers on U.S. government contracts overseas persists.”

Another, even worse, problem comes down to properly resourcing those doing oversight. This has a long history and was officially acknowledged in the 2007 Gansler Commission report.

Consider that for decades the private security contracting industry has been declaring that it is a heavily regulated industry, with numerous military regulations and directives it must follow. This is true, but only partly. What they neglect to add is that the Pentagon doesn’t fully fund enough well-trained contract officers or contracting officer representatives to enforce it all. As Sherman noted:

Since 2009, the department has updated and clarified roles and responsibilities for overseeing private security contractors.

It’s also worked with standard setting organizations to ensure that the principles that private security companies are to follow align with and respect humanitarian law. However, we learned that despite these steps, the department does not fully monitor the roles and responsibilities by various oversight entities and also doesn’t ensure that those standards and principles to respect humanitarian law are being adhered to. This is important for the department in order to minimize the likelihood of such incidents from occurring again.

Part of the reason the Pentagon does not “fully monitor” its private contractors is that it doesn’t have anyone in charge. As GAO noted in its summary, “DoD lacks a single senior-level position assigned to fully monitor whether DoD and various entities are carrying out their respective PSC oversight roles and functions. Without assigning this position, DOD increases the risk of incidents that its framework aims to prevent.”

In short, nobody is minding the store. As the GAO report stated:

For example, the director of a certification body that has certified over 40 PSC companies said that in cases where there is an incident involving a DOD PSC company that could affect its certification status, they do not have a contact at the department to make DOD aware of the issue. This official noted that until recently there was an official at DOD that helped them resolve PSC-related issues, but that this official is no longer at the department and has not been replaced. Similarly, in June 2020 officials from the PSC industry association said that they have contacted DOD multiple times about their member companies’ questions and concerns related to complying with DOD’s PSC contracts but did not receive an adequate response from the department.

The Pentagon used to have an Armed Contingency Contractor Policy and Programs office, headed by retired Army officer Chris Mayer. But he left that post in September 2019 and was not replaced.

Currently, the Principal Director of the Defense Pricing and Contracting (DPC) office is the advisor to the Office of the Undersecretary of Defense for Acquisition and Sustainment on all matters pertaining to contingency contracting policy.

The GAO is well known for being polite to those organizations it reports on. Nevertheless, its conclusion here is unmistakably blunt and dire.

While the department is due credit for its efforts at improving PSC management, it may have fallen short and may risk losing the gains it has made over the past decade without continued attention to its PSC program. DOD needs to better identify and track its PSC personnel if the risk it faces is to be adequately identified and dealt with before the next Nisour Square.

In short, after 20 years the Pentagon still hasn’t managed to even create an effective scorecard for its PSC players. The Defense Department has better procedures for tracking a missing rifle than it does for tracking contractors carrying guns. Given the history of private military contractors in Afghanistan, Iraq, and elsewhere, this is simply unacceptable.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Featured image is from Shutterstock/PRESSLAB

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Ahead of the preliminary appeal hearing in London’s High Court tomorrow on the decision not to extradite Julian Assange to the US, Amnesty International has renewed its call on US authorities to drop the charges against him. The organisation’s Europe Director, Nils Muižnieks, said:

“This attempt by the US government to get the court to reverse its decision not to allow Julian Assange’s extradition on the basis of new diplomatic assurances is a blatant legal sleight of hand. Given that the US government has reserved the right to keep Julian Assange in a maximum security facility and subject him to Special Administrative Measures, these assurances are inherently unreliable.

“This disingenuous appeal should be dismissed by the court and President Biden should take the opportunity to drop these politically motivated charges which have put media freedom and freedom of expression in the dock.

“President Obama opened the investigation into Julian Assange. President Trump brought the charges against him. It is now time for President Biden to do the right thing and help end this farcical prosecution which should never have been brought in the first place.

“Amnesty International’s recent work as a technical partner on the Pegasus Project is just the latest example that exposes what some states will do outside the gaze of publicity. It reinforces the vital importance of whistle blowers, investigative journalists and publishers in holding the perpetrators of human rights violations to account.”


The US extradition request is based on charges directly related to the publication of leaked classified documents as part of Assange’s work with Wikileaks. Publishing information that is in the public interest is a cornerstone of media freedom and the public’s right to information about government wrongdoing. Publishing information in the public interest is protected under international human rights law and should not be criminalized.

If extradited to the US, Julian Assange could face trial on 18 charges, 17 of them under the Espionage Act; and one under the Computer Fraud and Abuse Act. He would also face a real risk of serious human rights violations due to detention conditions that could amount to torture or other ill-treatment, including prolonged solitary confinement. Julian Assange is the first publisher to face charges under the Espionage Act.

The US government is expected to challenge the grounds on which it can appeal and may request reconsideration for appeal on the other two grounds, which question the expert profile of one of the expert witnesses and also the assessed risk of Assange committing suicide.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Taliban Takes Control of Two-thirds of Afghan Territory

August 11th, 2021 by Lucas Leiroz de Almeida

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Violence continues to escalate in Afghanistan. As experts predicted, the Taliban launched a brutal offensive against government forces, achieving full control of 65% of the entire national territory. The situation is extremely dangerous for the central government, as the state does not have strength enough to combat the threat, while international support seems increasingly distant.

In a recent attack, Taliban militants have taken over Pul el Khumri, the capital of Baghlan, a province in the north of the country. According to reports from local residents, the Taliban won the fighting against the military, forcing government soldiers to quickly leave, fleeing into the Kelagi Desert, where an army military base is located. With this maneuver, the terrorist group conquered the seventh Afghan regional capital in about a week, consolidating one of the most successful military campaigns undertaken by the Taliban in recent years.

The problem goes far beyond a mere political issue, with a serious humanitarian crisis emerging. Trying to escape the fighting, around 60,000 families have been displaced from their homes in 25 different provinces in the past two months. Internationally, a wave of refugees is already starting. In Europe, several countries are concerned about the possible start of a migration crisis similar to the one in 2016 and are asking Brussels to resume the deportation of Afghans. Shortly after the serious crisis generated by the pandemic, the mass arrival of Afghan refugees could make the European economy collapse, as well as contribute to the return of health chaos, considering the possibility that many Afghans have COVID-19.

In fact, the Taliban’s advance seems almost impossible to be neutralized. Without foreign support, the country’s security forces simply cannot stop their enemies, whose military power is comparable to that of a regular national army. The loss of control over capitals, strategic cities and entire provinces is a consequence of the strong institutional vulnerability and material weakness that have affected the country for decades and which was profoundly aggravated by the withdrawal of American troops. Without a concrete plan to replace American presence with another foreign military force, the government is absolutely vulnerable and tends to lose control over almost all of its own territory.

However, this does not seem to be a concern for the American government, which persists not to give any proposal to help Afghanistan. In a recent statement, US President Joe Biden said: “Afghan leaders have to come together (…) They’ve got to fight for themselves, fight for their nation.” As we can see, from now on, Washington wants Afghans to “fight for themselves”, which reveals the new US guidelines for that people.

While “abandoning” Afghan forces, however, the US is trying to find the best solution to its own problems. The Washington Department of Defense said it is assessing the security situation at the US embassy in Kabul on a daily basis. No measures to protect the embassy have yet announced, but it is likely that Washington will decide to keep some military in the country to at least guarantee diplomatic security (but if that happens, the Taliban will become even more aggressive).

Without any expectation of foreign aid, Kabul does its best to keep it safe. Now the government is encouraging civilian people to take arms and urge the entire population to defend the country in the streets, appealing to stop further Taliban incursions, helping the armed forces in their quest for victory. In addition, governments in some provinces are trying to form alliances with local militias in order to establish a coalition to rival the Taliban.

All these plans to try to contain the Taliban seem insufficient. In fact, without foreign forces, the Afghan government will not have strength enough to deal with the situation. A new international alliance needs to cooperate with Afghanistan to ensure national security. In the same sense, it is essential that the peace negotiations in Doha move forward as quickly as possible.

The Taliban recently announced that it is willing to negotiate in a more advanced way, but Kabul requires international observers to talk with its enemy. The scenario of discussions to reach a peace agreement still seems very far from being achieved, but decisions need to be taken as quickly as possible because many lives are being lost. For this, foreign diplomatic intervention will be necessary. It is necessary that the powers of the ‘extended troika’ actively act in the mediation of the dialogue and help to reach an agreement. Only with international cooperation, both military and diplomatic, it will be possible for the Afghan people to overcome the current crisis.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Lucas Leiroz is a research fellow in international law at the Federal University of Rio de Janeiro.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


In an effort to bully more Americans into getting “vaccinated” for the Wuhan coronavirus (Covid-19), Joe Biden is now threatening to withhold federal funding from schools, nursing homes and other critical sectors.

According to reports, Dementia Joe thinks that depriving colleges and universities, elderly care facilities, and cruise ships of the funds they need to function will help convince more unvaccinated people to stay “safe” from the Chinese Virus by agreeing to get their “Operation Warp Speed” injections as soon as possible.

While no official decision has been made, Hunter’s dad is said to be in the “early phases” of conversations with the people who believe they hold the power to do something like this and achieve the desired outcome.

One idea is to withhold Medicare dollars and other federal funds from nursing homes where not all residents are injected. As the old people who live in these facilities slowly start to die off due to lack of money, the idea is that they will come begging Beijing Biden for the jab and for the resources they need to survive.

There are some 90 million more Americans who are just saying no to Donald Trump’s “warp speed” injections, and Biden is working on new ways to try to convince them to get jabbed, too.

Due to mainstream media fears about the “delta variant,” the Pedophile-in-Chief is considering other drastic measures aimed at “flattening the curve” and “stopping the spread.” Many government agencies are now “mandating” the injections, and some in the private sector are also following suit.

Biden is salivating at the idea of medically raping you with a covid needle

Even if every unvaccinated person today were to rush out and get jabbed for the Fauci Flu, it would still take as many as six weeks for the faux “immunity” to kick in, experts say. Because of this, China Joe is scrambling to come up with new authoritarian ways of getting more people jabbed immediately.

In the short term, Biden is threatening that more new “cases” will emerge if those who still have not permanently altered their DNA by getting syringed refuse to obey. “Infections” will rise, Biden says, until every last American gets the needle in accordance with the government’s wishes.

When asked specifically if he plans to try to impose a vaccine “mandate,” Hunter’s dad told the media that he is looking at various options while encouraging more Americans to get vaccinated if they wish to do so.

Some public health “experts” are chomping at the bit for mandatory injections. As it turns out, a sizeable percentage of Western medicine “specialists” have never met a vaccine needle they did not want forcibly jammed into every person’s body, so the prospect of a Biden mandate is music to their ears.

The government claims that more than 100,000 people per day are now testing “positive” for the latest editions of the Chinese Flu. This is scary for some people to hear talked about on television and social media, which the Biden regime is hoping will convince the remaining holdouts to comply already.

“I think wisely using the federal spending power is absolutely right,” says Lawrence Gostin, director of Georgetown University‘s O’Neill Institute for National and Global Health Law, in full support of depriving unvaccinated elderly people and students of funding as punishment for their non-compliance.

Instead of “bludgeoning the private sector,” Biden is “starting with high-risk settings with an absolute ethical obligation and legal obligation to keep your workers and your clients safe” through injection, Gostin added in a statement to The Washington Post, clearly thrilled about such a power grab.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


It’s not just businesses, the federal government and the military — the push is also on to mandate COVID vaccines for school children, despite evidence showing the benefits don’t outweigh the risks.

National Institutes of Health Director Dr. Francis Collins said Sunday he believes the U.S. should adopt more COVID vaccine mandates. Collins praised businesses for requiring the shots.

“I am glad to see the president insisting that we go forward requiring vaccinations or, if people are unwilling to do that, then regular testing at least once or twice a week, which will be very inconvenient,” Collins told ABC “This Week” anchor George Stephanopoulos.

When asked if it was time for more compulsory COVID vaccine policies, Collins said,

“Yeah, I think we ought to use every public health tool we can when people are dying. Death rates are starting up again.”

“That was about as close to a yes as you could get,” Stephanopoulos said. “You clearly believe vaccine mandates could make a difference.”

“I understand how that can sometimes set off all kinds of resistance,” Collins said. “But isn’t that a shame?”

Collins also spoke directly to vaccine skeptics:

“If you’re on the fence, get off the fence. … Roll up your sleeve. Become part of the winning team.”

Are vaccine mandates coming soon to schools?

Dr. Peter Hotez, vaccinologist and dean of the National School of Tropical Medicine at Baylor College of Medicine, today told CNN he believes vaccine mandates for children 12 to 17 may be necessary as the school year begins.

Hotez, an outspoken proponent of vaccines, said it won’t be enough to have mask mandates in the schools.

“We need all of the adolescents vaccinated, and really we need to move towards vaccine mandates for the 12- to 17-year-olds in the schools,” he said.

According to Hotez, in some states, only a quarter of the adolescent population is vaccinated, so masks and an increase in vaccination rates among students will be necessary to contain in-school spread.

“If we’re going to give our fighting chance to have a successful school year, we’re going to need everyone who is vaccine-eligible to get vaccinated and everybody masked,” Hotez said.

According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), ​​compared with adults, children and adolescents who are infected with SARS-CoV-2 are more commonly asymptomatic (never develop symptoms) or have mild, non-specific symptoms, and are less likely to develop severe illness or die from COVID.

Rates of severe outcomes (e.g. hospitalization, mortality) from COVID among children and adolescents are low. In children hospitalized or admitted to the ICU, underlying medical conditions are commonly reported.

As of July 7, there were 271 COVID deaths among 5- to 17-year-olds, and 120 deaths among 0- to 4-year-olds reported to the National Center for Health Statistics.

According to the CDC, COVID adolescent hospitalization rates in the 12-17 age group were 2.1 per 100,000 in early January 2021, and 1.3 per 100,000 in April. Of 204 hospitalizations assessed by the CDC from March 1, 2020 to April 24, 2021, no deaths occurred.

CDC data also showed the death rate among 0- to 17-year-olds who get COVID and are subsequently hospitalized is 0.7% — with many experiencing either mild or no symptoms at all. The COVID death rate in all adolescent age categories is less than 0.1%, according to the CDC.

As The Defender reported, two papers published May 19 in the journal Hospital Pediatrics found pediatric hospitalizations for COVID were overcounted by at least 40%, carrying potential implications for nationwide figures used to justify vaccinating children.

Some physicians and scientists oppose vaccinating children against COVID because they believe the data and science show the vaccines’ risks outweigh the benefits for that age group.

In June, a group of 40 doctors told UK drug regulators that vaccinating kids is “irresponsible, unethical and unnecessary.”

In an open letter addressed to the Medicines and Healthcare Products Regulatory Agency, the group said no one under 18 should be vaccinated for COVID because evidence shows the virus poses almost no risk to healthy children. The authors of the letter said the risk of death from COVID in healthy children is 1 in 1.25 million.

Last month, Doctors for COVID Ethics, a Europe-based international alliance of hundreds of concerned doctors and scientists, submitted expert evidence to the  European General Court as part of a lawsuit challenging the European Medicines Agency’s late-May decision to extend emergency use of Pfizer’s vaccine for 12- to 15-year-olds.

According to the latest data from the CDC’s Vaccine Adverse Events Reporting System there have been a total of 15,741 reported adverse events among adolescents aged 12 to 17, including 947 rated as serious and 18 reported deaths.

Unvaccinated may soon face monthly surcharges by employers

Most employers continue to hold off on mandates due to potential employee relations issues that such a move might provoke, but many employers have taken additional measures to increase vaccine levels by offering incentives — some positive, others punitive.

For example, some employers are considering tacking on a $20 to $50 monthly surcharge to their unvaccinated workers, according to a health benefits consultant group.

Wade Symons, with consultancy group Mercer, told Forbes on Aug. 8:

“Employers have tried encouraging employees to get vaccinated through offering incentives like paid time off and cash, but with the Delta variant driving up infections and hospitalizations throughout the country — at the same time that vaccination rates have stalled — we have received inquiries from at least 20 employers over the past few weeks who are giving consideration to adding health coverage surcharges for the unvaccinated as a way to drive up vaccination rates in their workforce.”

Mercer didn’t disclose the names of companies working on the surcharges but said the amount of the surcharge being discussed is akin to the $20- to $50-a-month employers charge workers who smoke.

According to the benefit firm’s website, if an employee is unvaccinated and gets COVID, that creates higher claims costs, which can impact the employer’s bottom line and mean higher future contributions for other employees.

“Beyond plan costs, there are the public health benefits of greater vaccination rates, in addition to workplace safety considerations,” Symons wrote. “The surcharge approach is intended to cause employees to change behavior voluntarily.”

San Francisco deputies threaten to quit over vaccine mandate

Employers on the fence about mandating the vaccine may be concerned about losing good employees. According to a recent poll, 18% of Americans say they would quit their job over vaccine or mask mandates.

The city of San Francisco is one of the most recent examples where loss of employees is a potential threat. That’s because the union representing San Francisco sheriff’s deputies said Friday up to 160 of its officers will quit or retire early if they are forced to get a COVID vaccine, the Associated Press reported.

The city issued a mandate last month requiring city employees who work in jails or other settings deemed high-risk to get vaccinated by Sept 15., or risk losing their jobs.

The San Francisco Deputy Sheriffs’ Association said on its Facebook page Friday that about 160 of 600 sheriff employees are rejecting the vaccine due to religious or other beliefs, and would rather wear masks or test weekly.

“If deputy sheriffs are forced to vaccinate, a percentage of them will retire early or seek employment elsewhere,” the statement said.

Deputy Sheriff’s Association President Ken Lomba said in an interview with Fox News the mandate “is on the extreme side” and “will not be good” for San Francisco’s public safety.

The union said the staffing level at the sheriff’s office is already low, and the loss of more deputies will affect public safety. It is asking the city to follow state guidelines, which offer employees the option of testing regularly.

The city’s human resources department denounced the union’s statement saying, “There is also an undue and unacceptable health and safety risk that is imposed upon the city, our employees and the public we serve, by those who are not vaccinated against COVID-19. Vaccines are safe, effective and readily available to our employees.”

Nancy Crowley, a spokesperson for the sheriff’s department, said officials are working with the human resources department to obtain full compliance by the deadline.

Pentagon will seek mandate for vaccination of all active-duty military personnel by mid-September

More than a week after President Biden announced federal employees would have to either get the vaccine or be subject to routine testing, social distancing and masks as a condition of employment, the U.S. Department of Defense followed with its own announcement that military personnel will be required to get the COVID vaccine by Sept. 15.

The Pentagon on Monday laid out its COVID vaccine mandate plan, which was immediately endorsed by President Biden.

In memos distributed to all troops, top Pentagon leaders said the vaccine is a necessary step to maintain military readiness.

Sec. of Defense Llyod J. Austin wrote that he would “seek the president’s approval to make the vaccines mandatory no later than mid-September, or immediately upon” approval by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, “whichever comes first,” The Hill reported.

Austin added that Pentagon officials “will also be keeping a close eye on infection rates,” currently on the rise due to the Delta variant. If the rates begin to impact military readiness, “I will not hesitate to act sooner or recommend a different course to the president if l feel the need to do so,” Austin said. “To defend this nation, we need a healthy and ready force.”

Austin’s memo was followed by one from Army Gen. Mark Milley, chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff.

“The secretary of defense intends to mandate vaccinations for all service members in the coming weeks,” said Milley, adding that the military’s medical professionals recommended the move. At the bottom of his message, Milley scrawled a handwritten note: “Getting vaccinated against COVID-19 is a key force protection and readiness issue.”


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Megan Redshaw is a freelance reporter for The Defender. She has a background in political science, a law degree and extensive training in natural health.

Featured image is from CHD

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


The US military is ready to begin enforcing a coronavirus vaccine mandate across all branches, the Associated Press is reporting Monday based on a Pentagon memo it’s obtained. The memo is expected to go out on Monday and is intended to “warn” troops to “prepare” for the new requirement. 

It will require service members to get the jab by a Sept. 15 deadline, a date which could actually be pushed up if the FDA gives final approval for the Pfizer vaccine or if infection rates rise rapidly. Here’s what’s in the memo, according to AP:

“I will seek the president’s approval to make the vaccines mandatory no later than mid-September, or immediately upon” licensure by the Food and Drug Administration “whichever comes first,” Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin says in the memo to troops, warning them to prepare for the requirement. “I will not hesitate to act sooner or recommend a different course to the President if l feel the need to do so.”

Biden is expected to give the greenlight, given other recent federal mandates for civilian workers. The memo also serves to give military commands a heads up in terms of putting in place proper logistics and assessing what’s needed to implement the new plan on large scale.

Prior reports have strongly suggested there’s a large segment of the US armed forces which remain ‘vaccine skeptical’ and hesitant, for example this report from just last week:

A New York state military law attorney said he is receiving calls from Airmen serving at Wright-Patterson Air Force Base — and from active-duty service members across the country — asking about options should the Department of Defense mandate that military members take the COVID vaccine.

…Some service members “are scared and skeptical, basically, to take the vaccine when it’s an experimental vaccine,” he said. “That’s really what we’re seeing.”

He said his firm is getting “multiple calls” from service members interested in litigation or class-action lawsuits.

While currently service members are given as many as a dozen or up to 17 different vaccines – most often upon entry into boot camp (and based on deployment status and what their military job is) – it remains that the COVID vaccine is still a non-FDA approved “emergency-use basis” shot.

Further it remains that throughout the entirety of the pandemic deaths among US military personnel have remained very low compared to the broader population. This is likely due to military personnel tending to be a healthier, fitter, and younger demographic. Some have argued this fact alone should make a vaccine mandate unnecessary.

Legal pushback against a Pentagon-ordered services wide mandate could hinge on whether FDA approval finally comes ahead of the Sept. 15 requirement. If FDA full approval isn’t there by then, it will no doubt trigger legal controversy akin to the anthrax vaccine mandate for select personnel (usually infantry and forward operating forces) in the 1990’s.

“Up until the point the vaccine is … FDA-approved, military members can’t be mandated to take the vaccine, unless the president of the United States would waive that requirement,” he [attorney and military law specialist Greg Rinckey] said. “It’s very similar to what we kind of saw with the anthrax vaccine back in the ‘90s.”

In 2003, a federal judge sided with service members who sued, maintaining that the military could not administer a vaccine that has not been fully licensed without their consent. That program was stopped, the Associated Press reported recently.

This comes on the heels of federal workers, with the exception of the Post Office, being ordered to get the vaccine.

Very likely we’ll see instances of refusals to get the jab among military ranks, perhaps leading to mass resignations or punitive measures taken against them. While the Pentagon will mandate the jab, it’s as yet unclear what the “or else” in terms of dealing with those who resist the mandate will be. Officials have hinted it could be punishable under the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ) as a refusal to obey lawful orders.

Read the full memo here:


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Featured image is from DOD/Air Force 

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Video has emerged out of Paris, France, showing police patrolling cafes and bars demanding to see people’s credentials and making sure they are not breaking the law by enjoying themselves while unvaccinated.

Reuters reporter Antony Paone shared the video noting

“The first checks of Police started as a preventive measure at Paris in cafes and restaurants where the Pass Sanitaire is mandatory as of today. Fines of 135 euros and verbal warnings from next week, up to 9,000 euros in the event of a repeat offense.”


Other footage also emerged of private security, train staff and business owners checking the passes which confirm vaccination, a negative test, or (for the time being) recent recovery from the virus on people’s phones:

‘Proof of vaccination please.’

This is what a hi-tech dictatorship looks like in 2021.

And that is exactly why most cafes and restaurants in France currently look like this:

As we reported last month, French President Emmanuel Macron announced that those who don’t have a ‘Pass Sanitaire’ will be banned from participating in basic life activities such as visiting restaurants and using public transport.

The move quickly prompted citizens to take to the streets, with riot police called in to put the protests down:

The protests forced Macron to back down on imposing the mandatory vaccine passports for entry to shopping malls, but they are now in place for practically everywhere else.

As we previously documented, under the the draconian law, people in France who enter a bar or restaurant without a COVID pass face 6 months in jail, while business owners who fail to check their status face a 1 year prison sentence and a €45,000 fine.

Make no mistake, this tyranny is imminently coming to Britain, the U.S. and beyond unless people stand up en mass and reject it, and even then it may be too late.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Featured image is a screenshot from the Twitter video

Nicaragua: The Right to Live in Peace

August 11th, 2021 by Francisco Dominguez

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Sovereignty is not argued about. It is defended” – Cesar Augusto Sandino

It is an irrefutable fact that the United States orchestrated, financed and unleashed the violent coup attempt in 2018 against the democratically elected FSLN government. Spokespeople of the U.S. establishment, from former president Trump, extreme right-wing senators and deputies, all the way down the food chain of its formidable ‘regime change’ machinery, including National Security Advisor John Bolton, the CIA, the National Endowment for Democracy (NED) and, of course, USAID, repeatedly stated their aim was to bring about ‘regime change’ in Nicaragua. In this connection, the significance of U.S. Nicaraguan proxies is ephemeral and purely utilitarian (does anybody remember Adolfo Calero, Miami-based Contra leader?). Such proxies are activated to sow chaos, violence and confusion to facilitate a U.S.-driven ‘regime change’ intervention, but for the huge U.S. democracy-crushing machine, when plans do not work, its proxies are disposable human assets. In the 2018 coup attempt, the operatives on the ground, disguised as civil society bodies committed to the rule of law, democracy, civil liberties, human rights and other fake descriptions, were in fact U.S.-funded proxies entrusted with the task to bring down the FSLN government by means of violence. The resistance of the Nicaraguan people defeated the coup and thus the nation will go to the polls in November 2021, prompting the U.S. ‘regime change’ apparatus to launch, in despair, an international campaign aimed at demonising the electoral process itself.

The brutal ‘regime change’ machinery

The US, through open and shady channels, disbursed millions to pay, organise, and train thousands of the cadre that would carry out the coup attempt in 2018. Between 2014 and 2017 the U.S. funded over 50 projects in Nicaragua for a total of US$4.2 million. Furthermore, William Grigsby, an investigative journalist, revealed that USAID and the NED distributed over US$30 million to a range of groups opposed to the Nicaraguan government who were involved in the violence of 2018.1

A pro-U.S. commentator, writing in NED-funded magazine Global Americans (1 May 2018), admitted that these resources had been deployed to lay the ‘groundwork for insurrection’: “Looking back at the developments of the last several months it is now quite evident that the U.S. government actively helped build the political space and capacity of Nicaraguan society for the social uprising that is currently unfolding”.2 Furthermore, millions of U.S. taxpayers’ money also went into financing a Nicaraguan coup-plotting media.3

The ingredients of U.S. ‘regime change’ operations are buttressed by illegal unilateral coercive measures (aka sanctions) aimed at isolating internationally the target government and causing as much havoc as possible to its economy so as to destabilise it thus bringing about a crisis, leading to the ousting of the government, and to a U.S.-led transition. For example, since 2016-17, the U.S. has applied 431 and 243 sanctions against Venezuela and Cuba, respectively. With the NICA Act and the RENACER bill, the U.S. is piling up sanctions against Nicaragua’s economy and FSLN government officials. The strategy is invariably complemented by a worldwide intoxicating corporate media demonization campaign labelling these governments ‘authoritarian’ and ‘dictatorial’, sometimes going as far as charging them as ‘fascists’ and, in the case of Nicaragua, even of ‘Somocismo’.4

This technique has been used in the efforts to violently oust the government of Venezuela (including the recognition of Juan Guaidó as “interim president”), and also in the recent violent push to overthrow the government in Cuba5. U.S. National Security Adviser, John Bolton, identified Cuba, Venezuela and Nicaragua (“a troika of tyranny”) as target governments to be overthrown. In the speech (1 Nov 2018), he also praised Bolsonaro as one of the “positive signs for the future of the region”).

U.S. war on Latin American democracy

Reams have been written about U.S. interventions in Latin America (and the world) both by U.S. sycophants and detractors, who, despite their antipodal viewpoints, agree that notwithstanding the altruistic pronouncements of U.S. officialdom and their accomplices, they have never led to the establishment of democracy and, in most cases, such as in Salvador Allende’s Chile, ended in its total destruction. Thus, the 1954 U.S. military invasion of Guatemala leading to the violent ousting of democratically elected president Jacobo Arbenz, was celebrated by U.S. president Eisenhower as a “magnificent effort’ and “devotion to the cause of freedom”, an event that was followed by decades of US-supported and US-sponsored slaughter of well over 200,000 Guatemalans. El Salvador did not have the ‘benefit’ of a U.S. military invasion but in the 1980s, U.S.-funded, US-trained and U.S.-armed death squads, would slaughter about 80,000 mostly innocent civilians.

Nicaragua has been the target of many U.S. interventions, the largest being the military invasion of 1926-1933 that was heroically resisted by General Sandino’s guerrillas. It did not lead to anything resembling democracy but to the 43 years-long Somoza dictatorship that ended in 1979, when the Sandinista revolution implemented democracy for the first time in the country’s history. Sadly, the U.S. sought to prevent Nicaragua from pursuing an alternative, democratic, sovereign pathway by unleashing a destructive war by proxy through organising, funding, training, arming and directing the Contras under the Reagan and Bush Sr. administrations. The war led to the obliteration of the economy, the electoral defeat of the FSLN in 1990, and to well over 40,000 people killed.6 The Sandinistas respected the election result – even though it had been obtained under U.S.-led war conditions – did not engage in violent confrontations during the 16 years of neoliberal governments (1990-2006), and participated in all electoral processes during that period, dutifully recognising unfavourable election results in 1990, 1996, and 2001.

Neoliberalism in Nicaragua was socially and economically disastrous: by 2005, 62% of the population was below the poverty line with high levels of extreme poverty (14% in 2009); 85% had no access to healthcare systems; 64% of the economically active were in the informal sector with no pension or health cover; the level of illiteracy was 22% even though it had been eradicated during the 1979-1990 Sandinista government7, and so forth, mirroring neoliberal wreckage elsewhere in the region.

Unsurprisingly, the FSLN gathered electoral strength: winning the presidency by 38% in 2006; re-elected in 2011 with 63% and again with 72% in 2016. The return of the FSLN to government in 2006 led to a reduction of poverty to 42.5% and extreme poverty to 7% in 2016, on the back of a 4.7% average rate of economic growth, one of the highest in the region. The country’s social economy, driven primarily by the informal sector, was given a gigantic impetus making Nicaragua 90% self-sufficient in food (a dream for nations under U.S. siege, such as Cuba and Venezuela). By 2018-19 poverty had been halved, 1.2 million children were taken out of food poverty, 27,378 new classrooms had been built, 11,000 new teachers had been employed, 353 new healthcare units had been created including 109 birth & childcare facilities, 229 health centres, 15 primary hospitals, plus social housing, social security, the mass inclusion of women earning the nation the 5th world position on gender equality, and much more. So why would the FSLN, enjoying an electoral support of 70%+, resort to state violence in 2018 when the economy was going well, social indexes were improving and standards of living going up? Why would the FSLN turn viciously against its own people by becoming a dictatorship overnight?

Demonization, prelude to aggression

The intense, intoxicating and well-orchestrated worldwide demonization campaign against the FSLN government has inevitably influenced and obfuscated the vision of many individuals of goodwill who may have a healthy concern about the media-generated torrent of allegations of undemocratic behaviour attributed to the Nicaraguan government. Many also believed that Evo had fathered an illegitimate child – which, The Guardian (24 June 2016) labelled a scandalous “telenovela of sex lies, and paternity claims” – that was an undeniable factor in Morales narrowly losing a referendum in 2016. However, the child never existed but was ‘materialised’ by the world media just before the referendum was held. No media outrage was elicited by such grotesque fabrication. So, never underestimate the power and impact of U.S.-led psychological warfare carried through the world corporate media, especially when it comes to Nicaragua, Cuba, Venezuela, or any government targeted by U.S. ‘regime change’ plans.

Psychological warfare and its concomitant media demonization have the function to alienate progressive public opinion support from U.S. targeted governments or individuals. Lula and his party, for example, were subjected to such media demonization managing to persuade many primarily in Europe and the U.S. of his culpability in the Lava Jato corruption scandal that rocked Brazil, for which he was tried and convicted on [T]rumped up charges that led to his illegal and unjust imprisonment for over 580 days. No media outrage has followed Brazil Supreme Court’s verdicts of his being innocent of all the charges. Nevertheless, the damage done is pretty hefty: the lawfare against Lula prevented him from being a presidential candidate, creating propitious conditions for the election of fascist Bolsonaro.

The demonization of Evo seems to have been part of a broader plan aimed at his ousting, which was achieved in November 2019 thanks to the corrupt intervention of OAS Secretary General, Luis Almagro, who, with the support of the European Union ‘electoral mission’ in Bolivia, falsely reported ‘irregularities’ implying election fraud. The coup brought to power the de facto racist and fascist government led by Jeanine Añez, that unleashed brutal police repression and persecution against the social movements, perpetrated several massacres, and engaged in vast amounts of corruption. No media outrage has followed Almagro’s disgusting behaviour, not even after him being publicly denounced by Bolivia’s president, Luis Arce, and Mexico’s foreign minister.

Actually, the plot thickens: the Bolivian government with the help of the government of Argentina, have produced irrefutable evidence that in November 2019 right-wing former president of Argentina, Mauricio Macri, sent to Bolivia a war arsenal of thousands of rounds of ammunition, 70,000 anti-riot cartridges, thousands of rubber bullets, many long and short weapons, including machine guns, as a ‘contribution’ to the coup that ousted president Morales. No media outrage has followed this either; instead, most of the corporate media has opted for omitting it.

In Venezuela, President Maduro has denounced several attempts on his life, one of which in 2018 was televised; yet it led to no corporate media condemnation. In May 2020 Venezuela was subjected to a mercenary attack with the perpetrators publicly admitting it, yet it led to no media condemnation either. At least the brutal assassination of Haiti’s president Jovenel Moise by a hit squad of Colombian mercenaries that appear to be connected to the Colombian authorities, has received a modicum of media condemnation and there is some journalistic probing into Colombia’s involvement in it. Haiti’s gory magnicide (Moise was first tortured then killed with 12 bullets) shows the U.S. and its allies in the region are prepared to go to any lengths to obtain results. There is no reason to think Nicaragua, as the 2018 coup attempt shows, would be treated differently.

The empire’s desperation

Right now the issue for the U.S. interventionist machinery in Nicaragua is the coming election to be held on 7 November 2021 with the likely victory of the FSLN. The people of Nicaragua will elect president, vice-president and 90 national assembly deputies. The U.S. is desperate to discredit these elections by orchestrating a stream of media-oriented provocations that may allow it not to recognise the results (though, after the embarrassing experience with corrupt primus inter pares, Juan Guaidó, it is unlikely to proclaim a Nicaraguan ‘interim president’; though I wouldn’t hold my breath). The desperation of the U.S. interventionist establishment, especially its extreme right-wing (Marco Rubio, Ted Cruz, the NED, USAID et al), manifests itself in a media-driven effort to discredit the coming election by seeking to influence international progressive public opinion with a narrative of disillusionment with the FSLN (labelled Orteguismo), aimed at creating the impression the FSLN is isolated, thus resorting to dictatorial measures, and that it has betrayed Sandinismo. Apart from being malicious this is thoroughly false.

Under president Daniel Ortega and vice-president Rosario Murillo Nicaragua has successfully defended the nation’s sovereignty by restoring the social gains of the 1979-1990 revolution, by defeating the U.S.-orchestrated violent coup attempt of 2018, and by deepening the progressive socio-economic measures implemented since 2006. A good gauge of what would have happened had the 2018 coup attempt been victorious are the Añez government actions in Bolivia, Bolsonaro’s fascist brutality and recklessness, Guaidó’s criminal “interim presidency”, and Almagro’s abject servility to imperial objectives, whose common factor is the United States. Had the coup succeeded, the structural connection between Nicaragua’s socio-economic developments and national sovereignty, on which the latter rests, would have been brutally demolished, including the repression and murder of many Sandinistas and social leaders. The atrocities perpetrated during the coup attempt in 2018 (torture, burning people, setting fire to houses, health centres, radio stations, and generalised violence), are irrefutable proof of this.

The FSLN government is not isolated; it not only enjoys majority support in Nicaragua but it also has the robust solidarity of the Sao Paulo Forum, the Latin American body that brings together 48 social and political organizations. Among these are the Cuban Communist party, Venezuela’s PSUV, Bolivia’s MAS, Brazil’s Workers Party, Argentina’s Frente Grande, and Mexico’s MORENA – just to mention the most important ones – parties that command literally well over 120 million votes, and are or have been in government. The Forum (16 June 2021) has issued a robust statement in support of Nicaragua’s sovereignty stating as false the allegations of “arbitrary detention of opposition figures”.8

The Puebla Group, a body that assembles a large number of regional political leaders set up jointly by Lopez Obrador and Alberto Fernandez, presidents of Mexico and Argentina, respectively, issued a manifesto in February 2021 expressing support for Nicaragua (as well as Cuba and Venezuela) and condemning the aggression, external interference, and destabilisation these nations have been subjected to by the U.S.9Among the Group’s members are Lula, Dilma Rousseff, Evo, Rafael Correa, Fernando Lugo, Ernesto Samper, Leonel Fernandez, Luis Guillermo Solis and Jose Luis Zapatero, former presidents of Brazil, Bolivia, Ecuador, Paraguay, Colombia, Dominican Republic, Costa Rica and Spain, and many other prominent politicians.

Furthermore, the Executive Secretary of the Bolivarian Alliance for the Peoples of Our America – People’s Trade Treaty (ALBA-TCP), Sacha Llorenti, also condemned the aggression and the illegal sanctions against Nicaragua (and Cuba and Venezuela). Llorenti praised the “lessons of dignity given by the Nicaraguan people to the world” and paid tribute to them for the “achievements [of]the Sandinista Revolution.”10 He was attending the 42nd anniversary of the Sandinista Revolution held in Caracas. ALBA-TCP is a radical coordination founded in 2004 that includes Venezuela, Cuba, Bolivia, Nicaragua, Dominica, Antigua and Barbuda, Saint Vincent and the Grenadines, Saint Lucia, Grenada and the Federation of Saint Kitts and Nevis.

Though in Europe opposition to U.S. aggression is strong, it is less so than in Latin America. Foreign affairs are dominated by the European Union’s abject and systematic capitulation to U.S. foreign policy (on Latin America, and the world). Thus we have witnessed the shameful spectacle of Europe’s recognition of Guaidó as Venezuela’s ‘interim president’, and the European Parliament, led by the nose by Spanish extreme right-wing Vox party, to issue condemnations of Cuba, Nicaragua, Venezuela and Bolivia. The latter for the temerity of bringing Jeanine Añez to justice, key player in the 2019 coup against Evo and directly responsible for the persecution, repression and massacres perpetrated against Bolivians during her illegal 11 months in office.

Since the EU supports every violent assault against democracy in the Americas, it would be coherent to have supported the Trump-inspired assault on Washington’s Capitol. On January 6, 2021, U.S.’s extreme right applied techniques of “regime change” at home as the televised violent storming of the Capitol showed. The assault was carried out by armed, extreme right-wing (white supremacist) thugs, almost identical to U.S.-led efforts in Venezuela, Bolivia, Nicaragua, and Cuba, which involved non-recognition of election results, incessant spread of fake news, questioning the credibility of state institutions, fanaticization of supporters, all aimed at bringing about a crisis seeking to prevent the proclamation as president of the real winner.


Supporting any form of U.S. interference in the internal affairs of a sovereign nation under U.S. attack, by calling for ‘the international community to act’, or by (un)wittingly parroting U.S. State Dept. narrative on that nation, is tantamount to legitimising U.S. policy of “regime change”.

Were it not for U.S. aggression and interference, countries such as Nicaragua would have taken off and developed democracy and social progress, as the short national sovereignty intervals (1979-1990 and 2006-2018) have demonstrated. Cuba, for example, is an educational, sport, medical and biotechnological power, even though it has lost US$144 bn. (that is, the equivalent of 10 Nicaraguan economies at current prices) in the past six decades due to the U.S. blockade. Imagine how Cuba could have developed and multiplied its generous solidarity contribution to the world if it had not had to endure the criminal Yankee blockade.

Taking from its 1909 intervention, the U.S. maintained Nicaragua militarily invaded from 1912 until 1933, exerted direct control during the Somoza dictatorship until 1979, then when the Contra War (1980-1990) and the neoliberal governments (1990-2016), are added, the U.S. systemically curtailed or annulled Nicaragua’s national sovereignty for 97 years in the 20th century! If we add U.S. aggressive 19th century expansionism in the Caribbean, including the U.S. mercenary incursion of William Walker in 1856 –when he took power by military force and restored slavery – poor Nicaragua has been under the U.S. imperial thumb for over 140 years!

Nicaragua is entitled to embark on its own alternative path of development that, as a matter of sacrosanct moral principle, must be determined by Nicaraguans only without any external interference, and above all, in peace.

U.S. hands off Latin America, U.S. hands off Nicaragua!


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

This article was originally published on Public Reading Rooms.


1 Nicaragua – USAID, corporate non profits and CIA coup attempts –

2 Benjamin Waddell, Laying the groundwork for insurrection: A closer look at the U.S. role in Nicaragua’s social unrest, Global Americans, 1 May 2018,

3 M Blumenthal & B Norton, “How US govt-funded media fueled a violent coup in Nicaragua, The Grayzone, 12 June 2021 –

4 Name comes from the Somozas, a brutal dictatorship whose family led a US-protected and US-supported dynasty for 43 years, characterized by the assassination of opponents, repression, torture, vicious undemocratic practices and huge amounts of corruption.

5 The only way to end economic hardship in Cuba is to lift the blockade, Tribune, 17 July 2021,

6 Under pressure from the ‘Vietnam syndrome’, these US Republican administrations circumvented Congressional and public opposition to wars, they resorted to drug trafficking and selling secretly and illegally weapons to Iran (The Intercept, 12 May 2018 –

7 J M Franzoni, Social protections systems Nicaragua, ECLAC,

8 Comunicado defense de la soberanía de Nicaragua,

9 Manifiesto Progresista del Grupo de Puebla, 10 February 2021,

Statement on Virus Isolation (SOVI). “SARS-CoV-2 Has Never Been Isolated or Purified”

By Sally Fallon Morell, Dr. Thomas Cowan, and Dr. Andrew Kaufman, August 11, 2021

The controversy over whether the SARS-CoV-2 virus has ever been isolated or purified continues. However, using the above definition, common sense, the laws of logic and the dictates of science, any unbiased person must come to the conclusion that the SARS-CoV-2 virus has never been isolated or purified.

‘Economic Warfare, Designed to Starve the Cuban People into Rebellion’

By Janine Jackson and James Early, August 11, 2021

Anti-government demonstrations in Cuba have received a good deal of glorifying US media attention—in contrast to other, larger movements elsewhere in Latin America.

T Is for Tyranny: How Freedom Dies from A to Z

By John W. Whitehead, August 11, 2021

The American people, the permanent underclass in America, have allowed themselves to be so distracted and divided that they have failed to notice the building blocks of tyranny being laid down right under their noses by the architects of the Deep State.

All Roads Lead to the Battle for Kabul

By Pepe Escobar, August 11, 2021

The ever-elusive Afghan “peace” process negotiations re-start this Wednesday in Doha via the extended troika – the US, Russia, China and Pakistan. The contrast with the accumulated facts on the ground could not be starker.

Leaked Document Reveals ‘Shocking’ Terms of Pfizer’s International Vaccine Agreements

By Dr. Joseph Mercola, August 10, 2021

Vaccine makers have nothing to lose by marketing their experimental COVID-19 shots, even if they cause serious injury and death, as they enjoy full indemnity against injuries occurring from COVID-19 vaccines or any other pandemic vaccine under the Public Readiness and Emergency Preparedness (PREP) Act, passed in the U.S. in 2005.

From Shots to Clots: Science Shows COVID Vaccines Cause Blood Clots

By Joel S. Hirschhorn, August 10, 2021

Americans who have taken COVID vaccine shots and those who have refused to capitulate to the coercion and propaganda are ill-informed about blood clots.

African Faith Leaders Call on the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation to Drop African “Green Revolution”

By Food Tank, August 10, 2021

In August 2021, an alliance of African faith leaders delivered a powerful message to the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation: Stop promoting failing and harmful high-input Green Revolution programs, such as the Alliance for a Green Revolution in Africa (AGRA).

Coronavirus Scandal Breaking in Merkel’s Germany. False Positives and the Drosten PCR Test

By F. William Engdahl, August 10, 2021

On January 23, 2020, in the scientific journal Eurosurveillance, of the EU Center for Disease Prevention and Control, Dr. Christian Drosten, along with several colleagues from the Berlin Virology Institute at Charite Hospital, along with the head of a small Berlin biotech company, TIB Molbiol Syntheselabor GmbH, published a study claiming to have developed the first effective test for detecting whether someone is infected with the novel coronavirus identified first only days before in Wuhan.

Dr. Cole on COVID Shots: “This Is a Poisonous Attack on Our Population and It Needs to Stop Now!”

By Brian Shilhavy, August 10, 2021

He has seen over 350,000 patients in his career. We featured a lecture he gave earlier this year back in April, where he discussed cures for COVID-19 symptoms, and warned about the dangers of the COVID “vaccines.”

Appeals Court Rejects Bayer Bid to Overturn Roundup Trial Loss; Cites Monsanto “Reckless Disregard” for Consumer Safety

By Carey Gillam, August 10, 2021

Monsanto owner Bayer AG has lost another appeals court decision in the sweeping U.S. Roundup  litigation, continuing to struggle to find a way out from under the crush of tens of thousands of claims alleging that Monsanto’s glyphosate-based herbicides cause cancer.

  • Posted in NO READ MORE LINK
  • Comments Off on Selected Articles: Statement on Virus Isolation (SOVI). “SARS-CoV-2 Has Never Been Isolated or Purified”

Video: Mozambique to Finally Get Rid of Terrorists

August 11th, 2021 by South Front

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


After years of outrage generated by ISIS-linked extremists in Mozambique, the Southern African Development Community (SADC) has finally launched a military mission in the country, SAMIM.

It was officially inaugurated by the Mozambican president and his counterpart in Botswana on August 9, the day after the jihadist stronghold of Mocimboa da Praia was taken.

SAMIM will number up to 3,000 troops and is aimed to secure the situation in northern Mozambique to allow the resumption of the gas megaproject of the French group Total which is crucial for the country’s development.

De facto, the military operation against the ISIS-linked Al-Shabab started weeks earlier.

The key role in its implementation was played by the military contingent from Rwanda, which is not a member of the SADC. It deployed 1,000 soldiers in Mozambique on July 9.

Following Rwanda, Botswana and Angola also sent military assistance to Mozambique. Zimbabwe has also deployed thousands of military instructors.

South Africa helped with more than 1500 troops, including Special Forces. On July 31, units of the 43rd Brigade of the South African Armed Forces were deployed in Pemba. The missile boat “Makanda” of the South African Navy was also used to patrol the Cabo Delgado coast to prevent terrorists from using water transport. A Cessna 208 Caravan light aircraft was used for aerial reconnaissance of both the coastline of Mozambique and land areas in the province of Cabo Delgado.

The European Union also did not stay apart. On 12 July, it set up a military mission to train Mozambican forces to help them fight al-Shabab. Portugal is already participating in the training and its military instructors should make up half of the European mission’s contingent. Initially, it should last for two years.

After military preparations and regular clashes, the first important victory was reported on August 7th. The Rwandans with support from local forces managed to take control over the Afunji peninsula.

The next day, on August 8, they achieved a larger success and repelled the terrorists from the strategically important port city of Mocimboa da Praia, which was under al-Shabab’s control for a year. The military drove the Islamists out of the port, airport and suburbs of the town.

The number of casualties was not reported.

The terrorist activity in the province of Cabo Delgado increased four years ago. Since 2017, 2,500 people were killed and about 600 thousand fled the region, according to the UN.

Large deposits of natural gas have been discovered on its costal shelf. Near the city of Palma, the French energy group Total is building a natural gas complex worth $23 billion. It should be operational in 2024, but the work has already been suspended twice due to the terrorist threat. The last time this happened was on March 27, and the work on the project has not yet been resumed.

The possibility of foreign troops being deployed in the region was first discussed back in August 2020.

However in Maputo, they dragged out the international process and refused direct military support from neighboring states, preferring technical support from the European Union and bilateral aid from Rwanda.

The result was disastrous. Within 10 months, the Mozambican authorities lost control over more districts in Cabo Delgado and faced a severe humanitarian crisis. The Total project was put at risk.

The deployment of troops of African states in Mozambique led to a turning point in the course of the battle against the Islamists.

They have lost a significant part of their territories and, most likely, will be forced to return to the tactics of guerrilla warfare.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.


PayPal: [email protected], or via:

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Isolation: The action of isolating; the fact or condition of being isolated or standing alone; separation from other things or persons; solitariness.

– Oxford English Dictionary

The controversy over whether the SARS-CoV-2 virus has ever been isolated or purified continues. However, using the above definition, common sense, the laws of logic and the dictates of science, any unbiased person must come to the conclusion that the SARS-CoV-2 virus has never been isolated or purified. As a result, no confirmation of the virus’ existence can be found. The logical, common sense, and scientific consequences of this fact are:

  • the structure and composition of something not shown to exist can’t be known, including the presence, structure, and function of any hypothetical spike or other proteins;
  • the genetic sequence of something that has never been found can’t be known;
  • “variants” of something that hasn’t been shown to exist can’t be known;
  • it’s impossible to demonstrate that SARS-CoV-2 causes a disease called Covid-19.

In as concise terms as possible, here’s the proper way to isolate, characterize and demonstrate a new virus.

First, one takes samples (blood, sputum, secretions) from many people (e.g. 500) with symptoms which are unique and specific enough to characterize an illness. Without mixing these samples with ANY tissue or products that also contain genetic material, the virologist macerates, filters and ultracentrifuges i.e. purifies the specimen. This common virology technique, done for decades to isolate bacteriophages1 and so-called giant viruses in every virology lab, then allows the virologist to demonstrate with electron microscopy thousands of identically sized and shaped particles. These particles are the isolated and purified virus.

These identical particles are then checked for uniformity by physical and/or microscopic techniques. Once the purity is determined, the particles may be further characterized. This would include examining the structure, morphology, and chemical composition of the particles. Next, their genetic makeup is characterized by extracting the genetic material directly from the purified particles and using genetic-sequencing techniques, such as Sanger sequencing, that have also been around for decades. Then one does an analysis to confirm that these uniform particles are exogenous (outside) in origin as a virus is conceptualized to be, and not the normal breakdown products of dead and dying tissues.2 (As of May 2020, we know that virologists have no way to determine whether the particles they’re seeing are viruses or just normal break-down products of dead and dying tissues.)3

If we have come this far then we have fully isolated, characterized, and genetically sequenced an exogenous virus particle. However, we still have to show it is causally related to a disease. This is carried out by exposing a group of healthy subjects (animals are usually used) to this isolated, purified virus in the manner in which the disease is thought to be transmitted. If the animals get sick with the same disease, as confirmed by clinical and autopsy findings, one has now shown that the virus actually causes a disease. This demonstrates infectivity and transmission of an infectious agent.

None of these steps has even been attempted with the SARS-CoV-2 virus, nor have all these steps been successfully performed for any so-called pathogenic virus. Our research indicates that a single study showing these steps does not exist in the medical literature.

Instead, since 1954, virologists have taken unpurified samples from a relatively few people, often less than ten, with a similar disease. They then minimally process this sample and inoculate this unpurified sample onto tissue culture containing usually four to six other types of material — all of which contain identical genetic material as to what is called a “virus.” The tissue culture is starved and poisoned and naturally disintegrates into many types of particles, some of which contain genetic material. Against all common sense, logic, use of the English language and scientific integrity, this process is called “virus isolation.” This brew containing fragments of genetic material from many sources is then subjected to genetic analysis, which then creates in a computer-simulation process the alleged sequence of the alleged virus, a so called in silico genome. At no time is an actual virus confirmed by electron microscopy. At no time is a genome extracted and sequenced from an actual virus. This is scientific fraud.

The observation that the unpurified specimen — inoculated onto tissue culture along with toxic antibiotics, bovine fetal tissue, amniotic fluid and other tissues — destroys the kidney tissue onto which it is inoculated is given as evidence of the virus’ existence and pathogenicity. This is scientific fraud.

From now on, when anyone gives you a paper that suggests the SARS-CoV-2 virus has been isolated, please check the methods sections. If the researchers used Vero cells or any other culture method, you know that their process was not isolation. You will hear the following excuses for why actual isolation isn’t done:

  1. There were not enough virus particles found in samples from patients to analyze.
  2. Viruses are intracellular parasites; they can’t be found outside the cell in this manner.

If No. 1 is correct, and we can’t find the virus in the sputum of sick people, then on what evidence do we think the virus is dangerous or even lethal? If No. 2 is correct, then how is the virus spread from person to person? We are told it emerges from the cell to infect others. Then why isn’t it possible to find it?

Finally, questioning these virology techniques and conclusions is not some distraction or divisive issue. Shining the light on this truth is essential to stop this terrible fraud that humanity is confronting.

For, as we now know, if the virus has never been isolated, sequenced or shown to cause illness, if the virus is imaginary, then why are we wearing masks, social distancing and putting the whole world into prison?

Finally, if pathogenic viruses don’t exist, then what is going into those injectable devices erroneously called “vaccines,” and what is their purpose? This scientific question is the most urgent and relevant one of our time.

We are correct. The SARS-CoV2 virus does not exist.

Sally Fallon Morell

Sally Fallon Morell, MA

Thomas Cowan

Dr. Thomas Cowan, MD

Andy Kaufman

Dr. Andrew Kaufman, MD


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.


1 Isolation, characterization and analysis of bacteriophages from the haloalkaline lake Elmenteita, KenyaJuliah Khayeli Akhwale et al, PLOS One, Published: April 25, 2019. — accessed 2/15/21

2 “Extracellular Vesicles Derived From Apoptotic Cells: An Essential Link Between Death and Regeneration,” Maojiao Li1 et al, Frontiers in Cell and Developmental Biology, 2020 October 2. — accessed 2/15/21

3 “The Role of Extracellular Vesicles as Allies of HIV, HCV and SARS Viruses,” Flavia Giannessi, et al, Viruses, 2020 May

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on Statement on Virus Isolation (SOVI). “SARS-CoV-2 Has Never Been Isolated or Purified”
  • Tags: ,

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Janine Jackson interviewed IPS’s James Early about the Cuban blockade for the August 6, 2021, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

Janine Jackson: In the wake of Black Lives Matter and George Floyd protests, lawmakers in Florida—as elsewhere—passed legislation increasing penalties for blocking public streets, and offering protection to people who hit protesters with their car. But when people took to the street to show support for anti-government demonstrations in Cuba, the Florida Highway Patrol allowed them to block an expressway in both directions for nine hours. And the Miami police chief marched alongside them.

Anti-government demonstrations in Cuba have received a good deal of glorifying US media attention—in contrast to other, larger movements elsewhere in Latin America. The truth is, neither US governments nor corporate media make much pretense of projecting a single standard when it comes to Official Enemies. And Cuba has been high on that list for 60 years.

So little do the rules apply, multiple US outlets, from the New York Times to the Today Show, illustrated stories on Cuba’s anti-government protests with photos of huge crowds at a pro-government rally. CNN illustrated an article headlined “Cubans Take to the Streets” with a photo of a rally in Miami.

Accuracy—who cares? This is Cuba we’re talking about.

James Early has been writing about Cuba and US/Cuba policy for many years now. Currently a board member at the Institute for Policy Studies, he’s the former assistant secretary for education and public service at the Smithsonian Institution.

He joins us now by phone from Washington, DC. Welcome to CounterSpin, James Early.

James Early: Thank you. It’s my pleasure to be with you.

JJ: The fog around Cuba is so dense, and of such long standing, that it can be hard to get a sense of what is even happening—much less why it’s happening. What would you say are the primary factors driving the anti-government protests that we saw in Cuba this past month?

JE: The primary factors are both historical, dating back to 1898, when the US took over Cuba after forcing its secession from Spain, and actually invading Cuba on a number of occasions. And so, over the course of 60-some odd years, up until 1959, the US — in direct and indirect ways — dominated the sovereignty and independence and self-determination of Cuba, in alliance with some of its own elites, turning it into a playground for casinos and gambling and prostitution, and the addition of US racism with the historical racism of colonial Cuba, as is the case across the Americas. That’s one deep historical factor.

Sixty-some years later, in 1959, with the Cuban Revolution, it was the first time that Cuba took full control of its sovereignty and independence, and its own determination of how it wanted to direct its economy and its governance system, which was reinforced in 2019, with a new constitution endorsing—I believe some percentage of Cubans—endorsing Cuba as a socialist republic.

Keeping in mind that since 1959, starting with President Eisenhower, with — CIA report, people can simply go online and find this, don’t take my word for it—a document sent in March 1960 to President Eisenhower about the potential for invading Cuba, and stopping it from having its sovereignty and independence and self-determination. And many noted and acknowledged attempts at the assassination of Fidel Castro, when he was alive, over the years.

The coddling of terrorists in the bedrock of American terrorism in the Americas—which is Miami, Florida—with right-wing Cubans, right-wing Venezuelans, right-wing Colombians, right-wing Brazilians, etc. who have been coddled by the US state—some of them known terrorists—having bombed planes, killing Cuban citizens, citizens from Barbados and other areas of the Americas.

So that sets the context of not wanting to allow Cuba to be independent and sovereign and self-determining, and certainly not socialist. We should be very clear on that, whether there has been a Democratic or Republican administration.

The current situation is exacerbated by an economic warfare, since the 1960s, designed to starve the Cuban people into rebellion against their own government.

And that is not to suggest that all of the Cuban people are in agreement with the ideological and political and economic direction of Cuba. It would be surprising if such was the case of unanimity in any country. But it is a minority of people, whose voices are not unimportant, who want the restoration of capitalism and the overthrow of Cuban socialism. Those are factual matters.

That is further exacerbated by the global pandemic, which has engulfed all countries and impacted negatively all economies, and particularly the economies of underdeveloped countries  and underdeveloped communities in developed countries, as we are witnessing here in the US, with regard to people of color, women, LGBTQ — particularly in the service industry, and then the healthcare industry, which has had a racialized and class impact.

And then the third factor is Cuba’s own “errors and failures.” I’m using terms that President [Miguel] Díaz-Canel Bermúdez, present president of Cuba, has used. I’ve met with him on two occasions over the last four years. And I read on Cuba daily. And the Cubans are going back, notably, to the presidency of Raúl Castro, who was nominated and elected by the national assembly of Cuba — not simply because he was Fidel Castro’s brother—who has pointed out the issues of inefficiency in their own economic plan, of corruption, repeated chorus on the part of the past Cuban president and the current Cuban president, and the need to make their economic adjustments — which they adopted in the last few years — work, because they had not worked.

And so those three factors, including that historical backdrop, bring us to this present crisis moment in Cuba.

That context, then, is juxtaposed against the community of nations, 184 voting at the United Nations in the last few months, against two in opposition, the United States and Israel, to dismantle the economic blockade and sanctions. And these are majority capitalist countries, but who uphold the international protocols accumulated over the course of — what, 1947 and so on at the United Nations — of how nations should handle their mutual interests, as well as their sharp ideological and political and economic conflicts, in respect and peace. Not in becoming a rogue nation, as the United States is now, in the face of the global community.

And, recently, reemphasize, with President Lopez Obrador of Mexico — really confronting this blockade and sending tons of food into Cuba, as is the case with Bolivia and Uruguay and, of course, Russia and China have also done the same. So this is the context, I think, for looking inside Cuba, and listening to the voices—the range of critical, reflective voices, of how they’re debating their nation, and how they’re handling and attempting to resolve, within their nation, their own concerns in the context of what they’re advanced since 1959.

JJ: Yeah, US media coverage of Cuba is so cartoonish and so binary, that to say that the US should not be imposing punitive sanctions, a blockade which — as you say, folks can look up — the purpose of which is to immiserate Cuba’s people in order to bring about — this is the language of a memo — “to bring about hunger, desperation and overthrow of government.” So, sometimes “the cruelty is the point” sounds poetic, but this is really what we’re talking about here.

But the coverage is so binary that, if you want to say that the US shouldn’t be imposing a punitive blockade, that the US has no right, certainly, to militarily intervene, that’s somehow painted as a blanket apology or endorsement of the Cuban government. I guess you think they’re perfect, then. And there’s sort of no place to stand, because the story has been made so simplistic.

And I guess I would just add that media present the Cuban people—you know, if they aren’t the freedom fighters who love the USA, well, then they’re mindless and miserable sheep. Which seems to sort of set the ground to say, Things are so terrible and benighted there that anything the US does should be welcomed. It’s a kind of a dehumanization, really, of the Cuban people.

JE: The US media—particularly the liberal media — is to be called to task for its fake news, its readiness to adopt the propaganda from the Cold War, and to assume that the US democracy, US virtues, should be imposed on the entire world. It is a failure to do basic 101 journalism, to repeat the propaganda standards that the US has been repeating over 60-some years. It is a failure to do serious investigative journalism about the range of patriotic voices, most of whom are not socialist or Communist in Cuba, but who are patriots, who don’t want outside interests there, and who acknowledge the errors and inefficiencies of their own government, but who also want this blockade down.

It is amazing that MSNBC, National Public Radio, Washington Post and so on—who profess to be liberal and to have high ideals — are so shoddy in their own profession, so biased in their own profession, and would repeat what the Trump administration has been doing, as has been in the case of the Biden/Harris administration, who has betrayed their campaign commitments to return to the accord between then-President Barack Obama and President Raúl Castro.

This was not Barack Obama “opening up” Cuba. This came out of negotiations of a bilateral agreement, which is the standard protocol of nations — even those who have vehement disagreements with one another. And for the so-called mainstream liberal media to fall into such shoddiness in their profession, we must hold them accountable. Of course, we can see that with the case of apartheid Israel, or with the failure to look at the seven, eight military bases in Colombia, and the daily killing of trade unionists and Afro-descendents, and the taking of land, and the billions of dollars that both Democrats and Republicans have put into that.

So we have a crisis of morality, a crisis of professionalism, inside the US. And we should ask ourselves, Who are we to be the moral barometer of the world, given our own internal contradictions?

That is not to say that one should not have a critical approach to what is going on in Cuba. We are a globally connected world, and therein we have rights and responsibilities, both as citizens of this nation, but also of our extension and engagement with citizens around the world.

So we have every right to make evaluations. But we have no right to break the protocols of nations, and to interfere into the sovereignty and self-determination of other nations. This is a context that seems to escape millions of both Democrats and Republicans, who so quickly buy into a US chauvinism, a US imperial kind of might.

And we’re saying, again, that this is being confronted. We see recently, now, the president of Mexico has called for the dissolution of the Organization of American States as a “lackey” of US interference in this hemisphere. And so even allies of the United States, in a certain manner, here in the Americas are calling into question the moral and legal grounding of the policies of the US.

And we as citizens, whatever our ideological and political perspective is in the United States, should stand forth and try to reintegrate ourselves into the community of nations, and then carry on our disagreements and our agreements within that context.

JJ: What, finally, to your mind, would real solidarity with Cuba’s people look like right now?

JE: Real solidarity with the Cuban people first comes from recognition that the Cuban government are the daughters and sons of everyday households in Cuba, starting No. 1, so that we don’t have this false division between the abstract “people” and the abstract “government.”

Specifically, we should dismantle the US government legislation called “the embargo” on this side, and called “the blockade” from the Cuban side. It violates international law. It violates any principles of humanity.

We should also abandon sanctions. We should call for the freedom of US citizens to free travel, to go and see Cuba for themselves, and to have their own interactions. We are denied that opportunity.

We should recognize the potential contributions to Cuba to our own development. They have two existing and three pending vaccines which are effective to this pandemic. And even developed countries around the world are calling on them for assistance, even as they disagreed with the Cubans ideologically and politically. And the US could benefit from that.

In fact, the US is benefiting from that. Your audience, perhaps, does not know. Now, for several years, there’s been an agreement with a Boston company—this is a legal agreement—on one of the three or so preventative cancer drugs. It has an outstanding biotechnology development.

Now, there are other issues in Cuba that we also need to look at and listen to the voices about expanded democracy. There is a big debate in Cuba about democracy in the context of socialism. Democracy in capitalism and democracy in socialism do not equate to the same thing. It is people-centered, the demos,  as the Greeks pointed out, the kratia, the power of ordinary people.

So citizens’ voices are critical to the development of these governments’ outlooks. But those are the specific things that we should take on, is this embargo, the sanctions.

And we should return Guantánamo to the full authority of the Cuban people and their government. Guantánamo has been a site of horrendous human rights violations of the highest order, that we should not forget has been an admission by both Democrats and Republicans in this country.

So that’s the context of not just solidarity, but of basic citizenship in an international community.

JJ: We’ve been speaking with James Early, board member at the Institute for Policy Studies. James Early, thank you so much for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

JE: And thanks to you and your listening audience.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Janine Jackson is FAIR’s program director and producer/host of FAIR’s syndicated weekly radio show CounterSpin. She contributes frequently to FAIR’s newsletter Extra!, and co-edited The FAIR Reader: An Extra! Review of Press and Politics in the ’90s (Westview Press). She has appeared on ABC‘s Nightline and CNN Headline News, among other outlets, and has testified to the Senate Communications Subcommittee on budget reauthorization for the Corporation for Public Broadcasting. Her articles have appeared in various publications, including In These Times and the UAW’s Solidarity, and in books including Civil Rights Since 1787 (New York University Press) and Stop the Next War Now: Effective Responses to Violence and Terrorism (New World Library). Jackson is a graduate of Sarah Lawrence College and has an M.A. in sociology from the New School for Social Research.

Featured image: Cubans take part in a mass rally in defence of the Cuban Revolution and calling for an end to US sanctions, July 2021. Photo: Helen Yaffe

T Is for Tyranny: How Freedom Dies from A to Z

August 11th, 2021 by John W. Whitehead

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


“Plays, farces, spectacles, gladiators, strange beasts, medals, pictures, and other such opiates, these were for ancient peoples the bait toward slavery, the price of their liberty, the instruments of tyranny. By these practices and enticements the ancient dictators so successfully lulled their subjects under the yoke, that the stupefied peoples, fascinated by the pastimes and vain pleasures flashed before their eyes, learned subservience as naively, but not so creditably, as little children learn to read by looking at bright picture books.”— French philosopher Etienne de La Boétie

The COVID-19 pandemic continues to be a convenient, traumatic, devastating distraction.

The American people, the permanent underclass in America, have allowed themselves to be so distracted and divided that they have failed to notice the building blocks of tyranny being laid down right under their noses by the architects of the Deep State.

Biden, Trump, Obama, Bush, Clinton: they have all been complicit in carrying out the Deep State’s agenda.

Frankly, it really doesn’t matter who occupies the White House, because it is a profit-driven, unelected bureaucracy—call it whatever you will: the Deep State, the Controllers, the masterminds, the shadow government, the corporate elite, the police state, the surveillance state, the military industrial complex—that is actually calling the shots

Our losses are mounting with every passing day, part of a calculated siege intended to ensure our defeat at the hands of a totalitarian regime.

Free speech, the right to protest, the right to challenge government wrongdoing, due process, a presumption of innocence, the right to self-defense, accountability and transparency in government, privacy, media, sovereignty, assembly, bodily integrity, representative government: all of these and more are casualties in the government’s war on the American people.

Set against a backdrop of government surveillance, militarized federal police, SWAT team raids, asset forfeiture, overcriminalization, armed surveillance drones, whole body scanners, stop and frisk searches, and the like—all of which have been sanctioned by Congress, the White House and the courts—our constitutional freedoms are being steadily chipped away at, undermined, eroded, whittled down, and generally discarded.

As a result, the American people continue to be treated like enemy combatants, to be spied on, tracked, scanned, frisked, searched, subjected to all manner of intrusions, intimidated, invaded, raided, manhandled, censored, silenced, shot at, locked up, and denied due process.

None of these dangers have dissipated in any way.

They have merely disappeared from our televised news streams.

Thus, in the interest of liberty and truth, here’s an A-to-Z primer that spells out the grim realities of life in the American Police State that no one seems to be talking about anymore.

A is for the AMERICAN POLICE STATE. A police state “is characterized by bureaucracy, secrecy, perpetual wars, a nation of suspects, militarization, surveillance, widespread police presence, and a citizenry with little recourse against police actions.”

B is for our battered BILL OF RIGHTS. In the militarized police culture that is America today, where you can be kicked, punched, tasered, shot, intimidated, harassed, stripped, searched, brutalized, terrorized, wrongfully arrested, and even killed by a police officer, and that officer is rarely held accountable for violating your rights, the Bill of Rights doesn’t amount to much.

C is for CIVIL ASSET FORFEITURE. This governmental scheme to deprive Americans of their liberties—namely, the right to property—is being carried out under the guise of civil asset forfeiture, a government practice wherein government agents (usually the police and now TSA agents) seize private property they “suspect” may be connected to criminal activity. Then, whether or not any crime is actually proven to have taken place, the government keeps the citizen’s property and it’s virtually impossible to get it back.

D is for DRONES. It was estimated that at least 30,000 drones are  now airborne in American airspace, part of an $80 billion industry. Although some drones may be used for benevolent purposes, many are also being equipped with lasers, tasers and scanning devices, among other weapons—all aimed at “we the people.”

E is for EMERGENCY STATE. From 9/11 to COVID-19, we have been the subjected to an “emergency state” that justifies all manner of government tyranny and power grabs in the so-called name of national security. The government’s ongoing attempts to declare so-called national emergencies in order to circumvent the Constitution’s system of checks and balances constitutes yet another expansion of presidential power that exposes the nation to further constitutional peril.

F is for FASCISM. A study conducted by Princeton and Northwestern University concluded that the U.S. government does not represent the majority of American citizens. Instead, the study found that the government is ruled by the rich and powerful, or the so-called “economic elite.” Moreover, the researchers concluded that policies enacted by this governmental elite nearly always favor special interests and lobbying groups. In other words, we are being ruled by an oligarchy disguised as a democracy, and arguably on our way towards fascism—a form of government where private corporate interests rule, money calls the shots, and the people are seen as mere economic units or databits.

G is for GRENADE LAUNCHERS and GLOBAL POLICE. The federal government has distributed more than $18 billion worth of battlefield-appropriate military weapons, vehicles and equipment such as drones, tanks, and grenade launchers to domestic police departments across the country. As a result, most small-town police forces now have enough firepower to render any citizen resistance futile. Now take those small-town police forces, train them to look and act like the military, and then enlist them to be part of the United Nations’ Strong Cities Network program, and you not only have a standing army that operates beyond the reach of the Constitution but one that is part of a global police force.

H is for HOLLOW-POINT BULLETS. The government’s efforts to militarize and weaponize its agencies and employees is reaching epic proportions, with federal agencies as varied as the Department of Homeland Security and the Social Security Administration stockpiling millions of lethal hollow-point bullets, which violate international law. Ironically, while the government continues to push for stricter gun laws for the general populace, the U.S. military’s arsenal of weapons makes the average American’s handgun look like a Tinker Toy.

I is for the INTERNET OF THINGS, in which internet-connected “things” monitor your home, your health and your habits in order to keep your pantry stocked, your utilities regulated and your life under control and relatively worry-free. The key word here, however, is control. This “connected” industry propels us closer to a future where police agencies apprehend virtually anyone if the government “thinks” they may commit a crime, driverless cars populate the highways, and a person’s biometrics are constantly scanned and used to track their movements, target them for advertising, and keep them under perpetual surveillance.

J is for JAILING FOR PROFIT. Having outsourced their inmate population to private prisons run by private corporations, this profit-driven form of mass punishment has given rise to a $70 billion private prison industry that relies on the complicity of state governments to keep their privately run prisons full by jailing large numbers of Americans for petty crimes.

K is for KENTUCKY V. KING. In an 8-1 ruling, the Supreme Court ruled that police officers can break into homes, without a warrant, even if it’s the wrong home as long as they think they may have a reason to do so. Despite the fact that the police in question ended up pursuing the wrong suspect, invaded the wrong apartment and violated just about every tenet that stands between the citizenry and a police state, the Court sanctioned the warrantless raid, leaving Americans with little real protection in the face of all manner of abuses by law enforcement officials.

L is for LICENSE PLATE READERS, which enable law enforcement and private agencies to track the whereabouts of vehicles, and their occupants, all across the country. This data collected on tens of thousands of innocent people is also being shared between police agencies, as well as with government fusion centers and private companies. This puts Big Brother in the driver’s seat.

M is for MAIN CORE. Since the 1980s, the U.S. government has acquired and maintained, without warrant or court order, a database of names and information on Americans considered to be threats to the nation. As Salon reports, this database, reportedly dubbed “Main Core,” is to be used by the Army and FEMA in times of national emergency or under martial law to locate and round up Americans seen as threats to national security. There are at least 8 million Americans in the Main Core database.

N is for NO-KNOCK RAIDS. Owing to the militarization of the nation’s police forces, SWAT teams are now increasingly being deployed for routine police matters. In fact, more than 80,000 of these paramilitary raids are carried out every year. That translates to more than 200 SWAT team raids every day in which police crash through doors, damage private property, terrorize adults and children alike, kill family pets, assault or shoot anyone that is perceived as threatening—and all in the pursuit of someone merely suspected of a crime, usually possession of some small amount of drugs.

O is for OVERCRIMINALIZATION and OVERREGULATION. Thanks to an overabundance of 4500-plus federal crimes and 400,000 plus rules and regulations, it’s estimated that the average American actually commits three felonies a day without knowing it. As a result of this overcriminalization, we’re seeing an uptick in Americans being arrested and jailed for such absurd “violations” as letting their kids play at a park unsupervised, collecting rainwater and snow runoff on their own property, growing vegetables in their yard, and holding Bible studies in their living room.

P is for PATHOCRACY and PRECRIME. When our own government treats us as things to be manipulated, maneuvered, mined for data, manhandled by police and other government agents, mistreated, and then jailed in profit-driven private prisons if we dare step out of line, we are no longer operating under a constitutional republic. Instead, what we are experiencing is a pathocracy: tyranny at the hands of a psychopathic government, which “operates against the interests of its own people except for favoring certain groups.” Couple that with the government’s burgeoning precrime programs, which will use fusion centers, data collection agencies, behavioral scientists, corporations, social media, and community organizers and by relying on cutting-edge technology for surveillance, facial recognition, predictive policing, biometrics, and behavioral epigenetics in order to identify and deter so-called potential “extremists,” dissidents or rabble-rousers. Bear in mind that anyone seen as opposing the government—whether they’re Left, Right or somewhere in between—is now viewed as an extremist.

Q is for QUALIFIED IMMUNITY. Qualified immunity allows police officers to walk away without paying a dime for their wrongdoing. Conveniently, those deciding whether a cop should be immune from having to personally pay for misbehavior on the job all belong to the same system, all cronies with a vested interest in protecting the police and their infamous code of silence: city and county attorneys, police commissioners, city councils and judges.

R is for ROADSIDE STRIP SEARCHES and BLOOD DRAWS. The courts have increasingly erred on the side of giving government officials—especially the police—vast discretion in carrying out strip searches, blood draws and even anal and vaginal probes for a broad range of violations, no matter how minor the offense. In the past, strip searches were resorted to only in exceptional circumstances where police were confident that a serious crime was in progress. In recent years, however, strip searches have become routine operating procedures in which everyone is rendered a suspect and, as such, is subjected to treatment once reserved for only the most serious of criminals.

S is for the SURVEILLANCE STATE. On any given day, the average American going about his daily business will be monitored, surveilled, spied on and tracked in more than 20 different ways, by both government and corporate eyes and ears. A byproduct of the electronic concentration camp in which we live, whether you’re walking through a store, driving your car, checking email, or talking to friends and family on the phone, you can be sure that some government agency, whether the NSA or some other entity, is listening in and tracking your behavior. This doesn’t even begin to touch on the corporate trackers that monitor your purchases, web browsing, Facebook posts and other activities taking place in the cyber sphere.

T is for TASERS. Nonlethal weapons such as tasers, stun guns, rubber pellets and the like have been used by police as weapons of compliance more often and with less restraint—even against women and children—and in some instances, even causing death. These “nonlethal” weapons also enable police to aggress with the push of a button, making the potential for overblown confrontations over minor incidents that much more likely. A Taser Shockwave, for instance, can electrocute a crowd of people at the touch of a button.

U is for UNARMED CITIZENS SHOT BY POLICE. No longer is it unusual to hear about incidents in which police shoot unarmed individuals first and ask questions later, often attributed to a fear for their safety. Yet the fatality rate of on-duty patrol officers is reportedly far lower than many other professions, including construction, logging, fishing, truck driving, and even trash collection.

V is for VIRUSES and VACCINE PASSPORTS. What started out as an apparent effort to prevent a novel coronavirus from sickening the nation (and the world) has become yet another means by which world governments (including the U.S.) can expand their powers, abuse their authority, and further oppress their constituents. The road we are traveling is paved with lockdowns, SWAT team raids, mass surveillance, forced vaccinations, contact tracing, vaccine passports, and heavy fines and jail time for those who dare to venture out without a mask, congregate in worship without the government’s blessing, or re-open their businesses without the government’s say-so.

W is for WHOLE-BODY SCANNERS. Using either x-ray radiation or radio waves, scanning devices and government mobile units are being used not only to “see” through your clothes but to spy on you within the privacy of your home. While these mobile scanners are being sold to the American public as necessary security and safety measures, we can ill afford to forget that such systems are rife with the potential for abuse, not only by government bureaucrats but by the technicians employed to operate them.

X is for X-KEYSCORE, one of the many spying programs carried out by the National Security Agency that targets every person in the United States who uses a computer or phone. This top-secret program “allows analysts to search with no prior authorization through vast databases containing emails, online chats and the browsing histories of millions of individuals.”

Y is for YOU-NESS. Using your face, mannerisms, social media and “you-ness” against you, you are now be tracked based on what you buy, where you go, what you do in public, and how you do what you do. Facial recognition software promises to create a society in which every individual who steps out into public is tracked and recorded as they go about their daily business. The goal is for government agents to be able to scan a crowd of people and instantaneously identify all of the individuals present. Facial recognition programs are being rolled out in states all across the country.

Z is for ZERO TOLERANCE. We have moved into a new paradigm in which young people are increasingly viewed as suspects and treated as criminals by school officials and law enforcement alike, often for engaging in little more than childish behavior or for saying the “wrong” word. In some jurisdictions, students have also been penalized under school zero tolerance policies for such inane “crimes” as carrying cough drops, wearing black lipstick, bringing nail clippers to school, using Listerine or Scope, and carrying fold-out combs that resemble switchblades. The lesson being taught to our youngest—and most impressionable—citizens is this: in the American police state, you’re either a prisoner (shackled, controlled, monitored, ordered about, limited in what you can do and say, your life not your own) or a prison bureaucrat (politician, police officer, judge, jailer, spy, profiteer, etc.).

As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, the reality we must come to terms with is that in the post-9/11 America we live in today, the government does whatever it wants, freedom be damned.

We have moved beyond the era of representative government and entered a new age.

You can call it the age of authoritarianism. Or fascism. Or oligarchy. Or the American police state.

Whatever label you want to put on it, the end result is the same: tyranny.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

This article was originally published on The Rutherford Institute.

Constitutional attorney and author John W. Whitehead is founder and president The Rutherford Institute. His books Battlefield America: The War on the American People and A Government of Wolves: The Emerging American Police State are available at He can be contacted at [email protected]. Nisha Whitehead is the Executive Director of The Rutherford Institute. Information about The Rutherford Institute is available at

Featured image is from The Freedom Articles

All Roads Lead to the Battle for Kabul

August 11th, 2021 by Pepe Escobar

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


The ever-elusive Afghan “peace” process negotiations re-start this Wednesday in Doha via the extended troika – the US, Russia, China and Pakistan. The contrast with the accumulated facts on the ground could not be starker. 

In a coordinated blitzkrieg, the Taliban have subdued no less than six Afghan provincial capitals in only four days. The central administration in Kabul will have a hard time defending its stability in Doha.

It gets worse. Ominously, Afghan President Ashraf Ghani has all but buried the Doha process. He’s already betting on civil war – from the weaponization of civilians in the main cities to widespread bribing of regional warlords, with the intent of building a “coalition of the willing” to fight the Taliban.

The capture of Zaranj, the capital of Nimruz province, was a major Taliban coup. Zaranj is the gateway for India’s access to Afghanistan and further on to Central Asia via the International North-South Transportation Corridor (INSTC).

India paid for the construction of the highway linking the port of Chabahar in Iran – the key hub of India’s faltering version of the New Silk Roads – to Zaranj.

At stake here is a vital Iran-Afghanistan border crossing cum Southwest/Central Asia transportation corridor. Yet now the Taliban control trade on the Afghan side. And Tehran has just closed the Iranian side. No one knows what happens next.

The Taliban are meticulously implementing a strategic master plan. There’s no smoking gun, yet – but highly informed outside help – Pakistani ISI intel? – is plausible.

First, they conquer the countryside – a virtually done deal in at least 85% of the territory. Then they control the key border checkpoints, as with Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, Iran and Spin Boldak with Balochistan in Pakistan. Finally, it’s all about encircling and methodically taking provincial capitals – that’s where we are now.

The final act will be the Battle for Kabul. This may plausibly happen as early as September, in a warped “celebration” of the 20 years of 9/11 and the American bombing of 1996-2001 Talibanistan.

That strategic blitzkrieg 

What’s going on across the north is even more astonishing than in the southwest.

The Taliban have conquered Sheberghan, a heavily Uzbek-influenced area, and took no time to spread images of fighters in stolen garb posing in front of the now-occupied Dostum Palace. Notoriously vicious warlord Abdul Rashid Dostum happens to be the current Afghan vice-president.

Taliban posing with military garb stolen from Dostum’s palace in Sheberghan. Photo: Supplied

The Taliban’s big splash was to enter Kunduz, which is still not completely subdued. Kunduz is very important strategically. With 370,000 people and quite close to the Tajik border, it’s the main hub of northeast Afghanistan.

Kabul government forces have simply fled. All prisoners were released from local jails. Roads are blocked. That’s significant because Kunduz is at the crossroads of two important corridors – to Kabul and Mazar-i-Sharif. And crucially, it’s also a crossroads of corridors used to export opium and heroin.

The Bundeswehr used to occupy a military base near Kunduz airport, now housing the 217th Afghan Army corps. That’s where the few remaining Afghan government forces have retreated.

The Taliban are now bent on besieging the historically legendary Mazar-i-Sharif, the big northern city, even more important than Kunduz. Mazar-i-Sharif is the capital of Balkh province. The top local warlord, for decades, has been Atta Mohammad Noor, who I met 20 years ago.

He’s now vowing to defend “his” city “until the last drop of my blood.” That, in itself, spells out a major civil war scenario.

The Taliban endgame here is to establish a west-east axis from Sheberghan to Kunduz and the also captured Taloqan, the capital of Takhar province, via Mazar-i-Sharif in Balkh province, and parallel to the northern borders with Turkmenistan, Uzbekistan and Tajikistan.

If that happens, we’re talking about an irreversible, logistical game-changer, with virtually the whole north escaping from the control of Kabul. No way the Taliban will “negotiate” this win – in Doha or anywhere else.

An extra astonishing fact is that all these areas do not feature a Pashtun majority, unlike Kandahar in the south and Lashkar Gah in the southwest, where the Taliban are still fighting to establish complete control.

The Taliban’s control over almost all international border crossings yielding customs revenue leads to serious questions about what happens next to the drug business.

Will the Taliban again interdict opium production – like the late Mullah Omar did in the early 2000s? A strong possibility is that distribution will not be allowed inside Afghanistan.

After all, export profits can only benefit Taliban weaponization – against future American and NATO “interference.” And Afghan farmers may earn much more with opium poppy cultivation than with other crops.

NATO’s abject failure in Afghanistan is visible in every aspect. In the past, Americans used military bases in Uzbekistan and Kyrgyzstan. The Bundeswehr used the base in Termez, Uzbekistan, for years.

Termez is now used for Russian and Uzbek joint maneuvers. And the Russians left their base in Kyrgzstan to conduct joint maneuvers in Tajikistan. The whole security apparatus in the neighboring Central Asian “stans” is being coordinated by Russia.

China’s main security priority, meanwhile, is to prevent future jihadi incursions in Xinjiang, which involve extremely hard mountain crossings from Afghanistan to Tajikistan and then to a no man’s land in the Wakhan corridor. Beijing’s electronic surveillance is tracking anything that moves in this part of the roof of the world.

This Chinese think tank analysis shows how the moving chessboard is being tracked. The Chinese are perfectly aware of the “military pressure on Kabul” running in parallel to the Taliban diplomatic offensive, but prefer to stress their “posing as an aggressive force ready to take over the regime.”

Chinese realpolitik also recognizes that “the United States and other countries will not easily give up the operation in Afghanistan for many years, and will not be willing to let Afghanistan become the sphere of influence of other countries.”

This leads to characteristic Chinese foreign policy caution, with practically an advice for the Taliban not to “be too big,” and try “to replace the Ghani government in one fell swoop.”

How to prevent a civil war 

So is Doha DOA? Extended troika players are doing what they can to salvage it. There are rumors of feverish “consultations” with the members of the Taliban political office based in Qatar and with the Kabul negotiators.

The starter will be a meeting this Tuesday of the US, Russia, Afghanistan’s neighbors and the UN. Yet even before that, the Taliban political office spokesman, Naeem Wardak, has accused Washington of interfering in internal Afghan affairs.

Pakistan is part of the extended troika. Pakistani media is all-out involved in stressing how Islamabad’s leverage over the Taliban “is now limited.” An example is made of how the Taliban shut the key border crossing in Spin Boldak – actually a smuggling haven – demanding Pakistan ease visa restrictions for Afghans.

Now that is a real nest of vipers issue. Most old school Taliban leaders are based in Pakistan’s Balochistan and supervise what goes in and out of the border from a safe distance, in Quetta.

Extra trouble for the extended troika is the absence of Iran and India at the negotiating table. Both have key interests in Afghanistan, especially when it comes to its hopefully new peaceful role as a transit hub for Central-South Asia connectivity.

Moscow from the start wanted Tehran and New Delhi to be part of the extended troika. Impossible. Iran never sits on the same table with the US, and vice-versa. That’s the case now in Vienna, during the JCPOA negotiations, where they “communicate” via the Europeans.

New Delhi for its part refuses to sit on the same table with the Taliban, which it sees as a terrorist Pakistani proxy.

There’s a possibility that Iran and India may be getting their act together, and that would include even a closely connected position on the Afghan drama.

When Indian External Affairs Minister Subrahmanyam Jaishankar attended President Ebrahim Raisi’s inauguration last week in Tehran, they insisted on “close cooperation and coordination” also on Afghanistan.

What this would imply in the near future is increased Indian investment in the INSTC and the India-Iran-Afghanistan New Silk Road corridor. Yet that’s not going to happen with the Taliban controlling Zaranj.

Beijing for its part is focused on increasing its connectivity with Iran via what could be described as a Persian-colored corridor incorporating Tajikistan and Afghanistan. That will depend, once again, on the degree of Taliban control.

But Beijing can count on an embarrassment of riches: Plan A, after all, is an extended China-Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC), with Afghanistan annexed, whoever is in power in Kabul.

What’s clear is that the extended troika will not be shaping the most intricate details of the future of Eurasia integration. That will be up to the Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO), which includes Russia, China, Pakistan, India, the Central Asian “stans” and Iran and Afghanistan as current observers and future full-members.

So the time has come for the SCO’s ultimate test: how to pull off a near-impossible power-sharing deal in Kabul and prevent a devastating civil war, complete with imperial B-52 bombing.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

This article was originally published on Asia Times.

Pepe Escobar, born in Brazil, is a correspondent and editor-at-large at Asia Times and columnist for Consortium News and Strategic Culture in Moscow. Since the mid-1980s he’s lived and worked as a foreign correspondent in London, Paris, Milan, Los Angeles, Singapore, Bangkok. He has extensively covered Pakistan, Afghanistan and Central Asia to China, Iran, Iraq and the wider Middle East. Pepe is the author of Globalistan – How the Globalized World is Dissolving into Liquid War; Red Zone Blues: A Snapshot of Baghdad during the Surge. He was contributing editor to The Empire and The Crescent and Tutto in Vendita in Italy. His last two books are Empire of Chaos and 2030. Pepe is also associated with the Paris-based European Academy of Geopolitics. When not on the road he lives between Paris and Bangkok.

He is a frequent contributor to Global Research.

Featured image is from Adeyinka Makinde

Afghanistan: a Tale of never ending Tragedy

August 11th, 2021 by Prof. John Ryan

This incisive and carefully research article was first published by Global Research on July 19, 2006

It’s now approaching five years since the Taliban government in Afghanistan was deposed by American bombing and the reoccupation of the country with the former mujahedeen and so-called regional warlords, together with invading US troops. So what has happened in this almost five-year period?

Actually, there’s little evidence of any fundamental change, and in a number of respects, conditions have gotten worse. Other than some improvements in Kabul, little has been done to rebuild the country’s infrastructure, which was almost totally destroyed over a 20-year war period. About half the population is unemployed. Most farmers struggle to make a living and some have resorted to the growing of poppies for opium and heroin, which are processed and shipped out of the country by the warlords or their agents – with little interference by US forces or the Afghan army or police. Instead they harass the farmers now and then. Afghanistan now produces about 90 percent of the world’s opium, some of which is later distributed by the Kosovo Albanians – another “liberated” state by the Americans. More than half the GDP in both areas comes from opium and heroin. So the Americans have produced two full-blown narco-states, both under their protection.

When the Taliban regime was first removed, many Afghan women celebrated by removing their burqas – now only a few brave souls in Kabul dare to be seen without the burqa. The Sharia law, with only minor modifications, is still in effect. Under the dreaded Taliban, at least the roads and villages were safe for both Afghans and foreigners alike, whereas now the lawlessness, fear and chaos of the mid 1990s has returned. What’s going on here?

Actually the present conditions are hardly a surprise since the new government, albeit supposedly elected, as well as many of its officials and staff includes a massive preponderance of the old mujahedeen – many of whom are accused of orchestrating massacres, torture, mass rape and other war crimes. A 220-page UN report, a copy of which was recently obtained by the Guardian,1 details the atrocities and the names of many of the people currently in office who were involved. The report, still not released, has been mysteriously shelved since January of 2005. So is this a case of the UN, perhaps under pressure from the USA, trying to shield the disreputable nature of the Karzai government? Most Afghan people however must be fully aware of the situation so it is little wonder that the government survives merely because of its American Praetorian Guard. If the government is to gain the respect of the Afghan people, it is crucial that this report be made public and that action be taken. The individuals charged with crimes should be prosecuted, if possible, and at the very least, they should be thrown out of office.

It must be recalled that the mujahedeen had been initially created by the CIA to fight the USSR. They were later defeated by the Taliban and were confined to about 10 percent of the country in the north. But in 2001 they were recruited by the USA as allies, and were renamed “the Northern Alliance,” and so they came back in the wake of US bombing to take over the country. But these people are basically the same as the Taliban, just a different variety.

These new found “allies” who helped to rout the Taliban are the same forces that had routed the Soviet army in the 1980s. And they are also the forces who, upon defeating the Afghan Marxist government in 1992, launched a campaign of rape and pillage, and the torture and execution of government supporters, then turned their guns on one another.  In the ensuing four-year fratricidal war more than 50,000 people were killed and Kabul was reduced to the ruins of a Stalingrad – and it’s still largely in that condition.

It was in opposition to these ongoing mujahedeen wars and lawlessness that the Taliban appeared in 1994 – they were a creation of madrasa religious schools in Pakistan, and their creation had the support of the USA. In desperation, Afghan people supported them, hoping for some form of stability, but once in power the Taliban brought in a reign of Islamist terror, especially on women. They imposed an ultra-sectarian version of Islam, closely related to Wahhabism, the ruling creed in Saudi Arabia. And now by a twist of fate, the old mujahedeen are back — it’s one tragedy after another — and for most Afghans it’s just a change of devils.

Through a series of events, including an election, Hamid Karzai, allegedly a former consultant to Unocal Oil,2 is president, but if the Americans left, he and his government wouldn’t last a day. Zalmay Khalilzad, also a former consultant to Unocal Oil and initially the US envoy to Afghanistan (now the US ambassador to Iraq), managed as one of his first actions to have Afghanistan, Pakistan, and Turkmenistan sign a detailed agreement on May 30, 2002 for the construction of a multi-billion dollar pipeline for the shipment of natural gas.3  This had always been a major priority for the US government and it probably was a significant factor in the takeover of the country. However, because of the continuing anarchy, work on the pipeline has not started.

What I find astounding is that the Western media never mention that for a brief period of time Afghanistan once had a progressive secular government, with broad popular support. It had enacted progressive reforms and gave equal rights to women. It was in the process of dragging the country into the 20th century, and as British political scientist Fred Halliday stated in May 1979, “probably more has changed in the countryside over the last year than in the two centuries since the state was established.”4 It would now be the type of government that most people in Afghanistan and the West would probably welcome.  What happened to this government?  Long before the Soviet Union entered the scene, this government was undermined by the CIA and the mujahedeen, which triggered a series of tragic events that destroyed the country — and ironically led to the disaster of September 11 in the USA, and to the present chaos and tragedy in Afghanistan.

I was fortunate enough to be in Afghanistan in November of 1978, six months after this progressive government came to power. I travelled from Peshawar through the Khyber pass to Kabul and spent a couple of weeks in the city and the surrounding rural area.  While on a sabbatical leave as a professor from the University of Winnipeg, I had been in Asia for almost a year on an agricultural research project, conducting documentary case studies of farms — 70 studies in 12 countries, starting in Japan and ending with 4 farms in Afghanistan.

Although this government had come to power by means of revolution, surprisingly, it was a peaceful time, and I received full cooperation from government authorities and the Faculty of Agriculture at Kabul University. While at the University, the Dean and a number of professors briefed me on Afghanistan’s history, its economic conditions, and the causes of the revolution.

According to the Dean and the professors, the bulk of Afghanistan’s people in the 1970s were farmers, but the landholding system hadn’t changed much since the feudal period.  More than three-quarters of the land was owned by landlords who composed only 3 percent of the rural population. Most landless peasants worked the land as sharecroppers. The landlord took two-thirds of the crop in the less fertile areas, and in the fertile plains four-fifths. In either case, the sharecropper was left with just barely enough grain to feed his family.5 Partly because of these terrible rural conditions, the king was deposed in 1973, but no land reform came about, and the new government was autocratic, corrupt, and unpopular.  On April 27, 1978, in the wake a huge demonstration in front of the presidential palace, the army came to the support of the people and after a brief battle with the presidential guard, the government was deposed. The military officers then released jailed Marxist leaders and invited their party to form the government, under the leadership of Noor Mohammad Taraki, a university professor, writer, and poet.  The military supported the Marxists because they were the only ones who had a program for land reform and progressive social and economic reforms.

This is how a Marxist government came into office — it was a totally indigenous happening —  not even the CIA blamed the USSR for this.  In fact, the Soviets were much surprised at what happened. The government began to bring in much needed reforms; some were controversial but most had popular support.  It affirmed the separation of church and state, labour unions were legalized, health care and education became priorities, women were given equal rights, and girls were to go to school. Child marriages and feudal dowry payments were banned.  On September 1, 1978 there was an abolition of all debts owed by farmers — landlords and moneylenders had charged up to 24 percent interest.  A program was being developed for major land reform, and it was expected that all farm families (including landlords) would be given the equivalent of equal amounts of land.6

Through Kabul University I conducted my research project with the assistance of an agriculture professor.  I spent more than a week in the countryside and talked with many farmers. The farmers produced a variety of food crops and livestock and Afghanistan was basically self-sufficient in food production. Unlike the opium poppy fields I witnessed in northwestern Pakistan, none were to be seen in Afghanistan – in fact, raisins were an important export crop. Opium poppy production was introduced to Afghanistan by the CIA-led mujahedeen for the purpose of helping to finance their offensive on the government, and poppies have continued to be grown.7

Because the farmers had much to gain from the reforms, most were extremely pleased with the new government. I heard tearful tales of how the farmers had lost their land because of inability to repay loans. In this manner almost half of the country’s farmers wound up with their houses on land that became the property of landlords. Also many of these people had debts that were inherited from their fathers and grandfathers, and they had never expected to repay them. Several of them told me that the law abolishing these debts was like a gift from heaven. Later, in talks with shopkeepers in Kabul, I discovered that they too were pleased. One of them told me that he wasn’t quite sure how the government leaders could be Marxist and Muslim, but they hadn’t interfered with their religion,8 and because the farmers now had money, business was increasing and they had no complaints.  From what I could see, life was peaceful and there were few police and soldiers on the scene — and women were free to dress as they wished. I have a slide of a scene at a bus stop showing a woman in a burqa, another in a western style dress carrying a brief case, a man in a business suit, another in casual clothes, and one in traditional robes and the distinctive Afghan turban. Such cosmopolitan scenes were quite typical.

Without question, this appeared to be a genuinely popular government and people seemed to look forward to the future.  Admittedly, the issue of women’s rights and education for girls was controversial, and fundamentalist mullahs (clerics) conducted campaigns against this. Moreover, many of the 250,000 mullahs were landlords and they vehemently opposed the proposed land reforms. In the mosques they exhorted the farmers to oppose the government’s plans because according to them it was only Allah who could grant land to them.9 It was largely these people and their converts, along with other landlords and moneylenders, who migrated to Pakistan, as so-called refugees.  These were the people who not only opposed land reform but all the other social and economic reforms as well. But there was a much more powerful opponent to the government — it was the USA that objected to it because it was a so-called Marxist government.  At first unofficially, but officially after July 3, 1979 with President Carter’s authorization, the CIA, along with Pakistan and Saudi Arabia, began to provide military aid and training to the Muslim extremists, who became known as the mujahedeen and “freedom fighters.”  In fact, Ronald Reagan stated that they were “the moral equivalent of the Founding Fathers of America.”10

The second phase of the US counter-revolution strategy involves a man named Hafizullah Amin. During the 1960’s while studying at Stanford University or during later visits to the USA, he appears to have been recruited by the CIA, and came back to Afghanistan, pretending he was a hard-line Marxist. Through him the CIA infiltrated the Taraki government.  This has never been officially acknowledged, but there is substantial evidence to support this view.11  Regardless of the documentation on this matter, his actions while in office reflect exactly what a CIA agent would have been expected to do. He cleverly worked his way to the top – first becoming defence minister and later the prime minister. In September of 1979 he carried out a coup, took over the government, had Taraki killed, and all of Taraki’s loyal supporters were killed, jailed, or exiled.

Amin then proceeded to undermine and discredit the Marxist government.  He enacted draconian laws against the Muslim clergy, to purposefully further alienate them. The progressive reforms were halted and thousands of people were jailed. Senior army officers were demoted, jailed or killed, and in that way he weakened the Afghan army. In the meantime, the CIA’s trained and armed mujahedeen came in by the thousands to attack parts of the country, especially to destroy health clinics and schools and to kill teachers. Teachers found with girls in a classroom would be killed and sometimes disembowelled in the presence of the children. In a matter of three months, with the combined actions of the mujahedeen and the counterproductive policies of Amin, the Marxist government was almost destroyed. It’s a matter of record that during this time Amin held numerous meetings with the American charge d’affaires and other US officials.12 He also sent emissaries to hold secret meetings with the top mujahedeen leader in Pakistan, Gulbuddin Hekmatyar.13 Apparently Amin had laid plans for a further coup d’etat to eliminate all progressive elements in the government and then join forces with the mujahedeen – to form a fundamentalist Islamic state, with himself as president and Hekmatyar as prime minister.14

But at the end of December in 1979, Amin was overthrown and killed either by a regiment of the Afghan army that still had Taraki supporters or by Soviet soldiers – the truth still being difficult to establish. The usually accepted version is that it was done by the Soviets, but the USSR had always denied it. The fact is that some Soviet troops had been in Afghanistan since December 8, at the Afghan government’s invitation.15 This whole phase has been clouded by cold war politics and remains a murky issue. With the overthrow of Amin, there was great jubilation and about 10,000 political prisoners were released, and when Babrak Karmal became president (after being in exile in Czechoslovakia), he would have been hailed as a hero, if he had come in on his own. What soured the situation is the immediate entry of Soviet troops — either on their own initiative or after an official invitation on the basis of a 1978 Afghan-Soviet treaty. Their purpose was to ward off the thousands of well-armed mujahedeen invaders, many being foreign mercenaries. What’s not widely known is that the USA through the CIA had been actively involved in Afghan affairs for at least a year, and it was in response to this that the Soviets arrived on the scene.

The advent of Soviet troops on Afghan soil tragically set the stage for the eventual destruction of the country. Zbigniew Brzezinski, president Carter’s National Security Advisor, afterwards bragged that he had convinced Carter to authorize the CIA to set a trap for the Russian bear and to give the USSR the taste of a Vietnam war.16 Brzezinski saw this as a golden opportunity to fire up the zeal of the most reactionary Muslim fanatics — to have them declare a jihad (holy war) on the atheist infidels who defiled Afghan soil — and to not only expel them but to pursue them and “liberate” the Muslim-majority areas of the USSR.  And for the next 10 years, with an expenditure of billions of dollars from the USA and Saudi Arabia, and with the recruitment of thousands of non-Afghan Muslims into the jihad (including Osama bin Laden), this army of religious zealots laid waste to the land and people of Afghanistan.

Central Asia specialist Ahmed Rashid wrote: “With the active encouragement [a classic understatement!] of the CIA and Pakistan’s ISI [Inter Services Intelligence] who wanted to turn the Afghan jihad into a global war, waged by all Muslim states against the Soviet Union, some 35,000 Muslim radicals, from 40 Islamic countries joined Afghanistan’s fight between 1982-1992. Tens of thousands more came to study in Pakistani madrasahs. Eventually more than 100,000 foreign Muslim radicals were directly influenced by the Afghan jihad.”17 The CIA covertly trained and sponsored these warriors. It should be understood that Afghan people don’t have a history of being religious zealots. To create the CIA-desired jihad required the recruitment of Arab, Egyptian, and Pakistani extremists – so the fundamentalism that emerged in Afghanistan is a CIA construct. Although Reagan referred to the mujahedeen as “freedom fighters,” they committed horrific atrocities and were terrorists of the first order.18

The Soviets succumbed to their Vietnam and withdrew their troops in February of 1989, but the war raged on.  Somehow it is generally thought that the Afghan Marxist government collapsed as soon as the Soviets left, but that’s not true.  Seeing the viciousness of the mujahedeen, a large portion of the Afghan population, especially the women, supported the quite moderate Najibullah government, and without a single Soviet soldier on their territory, they fought on for another three years.  In fact, their government outlasted the USSR itself, which collapsed in December of 1991. In reality, at this critical time, the crucial factor that undermined the Afghan government was treachery primarily by the Americans but also by the Soviets. When the Soviets agreed to pull out their troops, it was on the understanding that both the USSR and the USA would stop all military and economic aid to Afghanistan. The Soviets honoured the agreement, while being aware that the USA, Pakistan, and Saudi Arabia continued to support the mujahedeen. It is reasonably certain that if after 1988 the Soviets, out of some sense of fairness and justice, had provided the Afghan government with a minimum amount of economic and military aid, they could have withstood the mujahedeen attacks.19 As it was, because of the unending supply of superior American weapons and no economic assistance, the Marxist government was finally defeated in April of 1992. The victorious mujahedeen, who now form a major part of the current Afghan government, first of all slaughtered the members of the previous secular government and thousands of progressive-minded people. Then for the next four years they fought amongst themselves and conducted looting and rape campaigns until the Taliban routed them and captured Kabul in September of 1996.

During the years of war, Kabul was totally destroyed, as were most other cities — with the greatest damage occurring after the Marxist defeat during the internecine fratricidal conflict.  The Taliban, who “liberated” the country from the mujahedeen, established an atrocious reactionary regime.  The landlords had came back immediately after the mujahedeen victory, and when the Taliban took over, a virtual war was declared on women, which had no basis in Islamic law. Thousands of women were dismissed from their jobs as teachers, doctors, professors and work of all kinds. They were then not allowed to participate in the work force or even have doctors treat them (without a male relative present), and girls were forbidden to go to school. Terror, in all its forms, became the basis of the regime — a regime of fascist Muslims, but it was a regime that was kept in power largely by Pakistan. Despite the atrocities of the regime, they initially had support in the Clinton administration because it was thought that the Taliban would bring in “stability” which would enable the construction of oil and natural gas pipelines through the country.  Moreover, the current Bush administration provided $124 million in aid to Afghanistan and continued pipeline talks almost until the fateful September 11.20

So who is to blame for this Afghan tragedy?  Obviously, it’s both the USA and the USSR.  What stupidity for the Soviets to send in troops to try to salvage a Marxist regime that was under attack by hordes of religious fanatics.  Their mere presence on Afghan soil intensified American resolve and mujahedeen fanaticism.  If the Soviets had simply provided weapons for the Afghan Marxist government, they may have survived the “barbarians at the gates” — because ordinary Afghan people were not fanatics and they had supported the government’s progressive reforms. And even if they lost to the mujahedeen, in time they may have prevailed and restored a progressive secular government. After all, they had put in the initial Marxist government in 1978 — totally on their own. The protracted war and the complete destruction of the country enabled the Taliban to impose a Nazi-type regime on the population, leaving ordinary Afghan people feeling defeated . . . and without hope.

But if the Soviets are to blame, how about the USA, Saudi Arabia, and Pakistan?  The progressive economic and social reforms that the Taraki government brought in — which also brought women and girls into the 20th century — were opposed and reviled by the USA, because this had been a so-called Marxist government.  The US “communist paranoia” and their policy to undermine the USSR was such that they supported and recruited the most reactionary fanatic religious zealots on the earth — and used them as a proxy army to fight communism and the USSR — in the course of which Afghanistan and its people were destroyed.

As for the mujahedeen that this conflict created, they took on a life of their own, and have now spread throughout the Muslim world and are apparently in cells everywhere. About 5,000 of them were brought into Bosnia to fight the Serbs – even Osama bin Laden may have visited Bosnian president Izetbegovic in 1992.21 The mujahedeen later went on to help the Kosovo Albanians. But most significantly, having defeated what they called Soviet imperialism, they have now turned their sights on what they perceive to be American imperialism, particularly its support for Israel at the expense of the Palestinians and its attacks on Muslim lands.

For decades the US has interfered in the affairs of countless countries in the world — Afghanistan is only a case in point.  And all the while, US foreign policy makers felt that they could act without any adverse consequences to the US land and its people.  They were a superpower, and they felt invulnerable.

But now, ironically, a creation of their own making has turned on them — and despite America’s overwhelming technological, economic, and military power, this force has shown that America is vulnerable.  So foreign policy decisions do have consequences, but despite what has happened, this truism still hasn’t sunk in.

If we are to learn anything from the Afghanistan tragedy, it is important to understand that if the USA had left the Marxist Taraki government alone, there would have been no army of mujahedeen, no Soviet intervention, no war that destroyed Afghanistan, no Osama bin Laden, and no September 11 tragedy in the USA.

But what about the events after September 11, 2001? After the trauma of the 9/11 assault, what should have been the rational response? Clearly, this was a criminal act, but it was not an act of war by some foreign government. If the US had any evidence linking Osama bin Laden or anyone else to this, they should have taken the necessary steps to have these people brought to the International Criminal Court to be tried as criminals. In fact, the US immediately demanded that the Taliban government surrender Osama bin Laden to them. In response, the Taliban offered to turn him over to an international tribunal, but only after seeing evidence of his guilt in 9/11.22 The US refused to do this, and the actual reason surfaced only recently in an article that cites Rex Tomb, Chief of Investigative Publicity for the FBI, making the astounding statement that “. . . the FBI has no hard evidence connecting bin Laden to 9/11.”23 So what was the war on Afghanistan all about if, five years later, the USA still doesn’t have hard proof connecting bin Laden to 9/11? This is an astonishing revelation, but the mainstream media still haven’t picked up on it.

As became known later, the 9/11 plot was hatched in Germany and the Taliban government couldn’t have possibly known anything of it. Moreover, on September 17 bin Laden issued a statement to al Jazeera emphatically denying any involvement in the attack.24 Lacking the evidence to indict bin Laden for 9/11 and thereby properly confront the Taliban, it appears that the US relied on brazen sheer bluster to invade Afghanistan to “smoke him out of his cave.” Then on December 13, 2001 the Pentagon released a videotape, fuzzy and dark with muffled sound, supposedly of Osama bin Laden in which he gleefully admits his involvement in 9/11.25 Almost miraculously and without any explanation, this highly sensitive incriminating tape was reported to have been “discovered” in a private home in Jalalabad. The authenticity of the tape was challenged immediately, but its fakery was confirmed when an undeniably genuine bin Laden tape appeared on December 27, showing the familiar thin, tall, gaunt man – with readily identifiable facial features.26 Commenting on the American invasion and on other matters, bin Laden totally disavowed having anything to do with 9/11. It’s obvious that the FBI rejected the authenticity of the December 13 “confession” as well as other tapes and materials, since they admit, even at this late date, there is no hard evidence to proceed with an indictment on 9/11 charges against bin Laden.

Not having any evidence against bin Laden, the US did not present the case to the United Nations, and so they did not ask for a UN Security Council resolution authorizing them to launch a war on Afghanistan — no such resolution would have been approved. However, not having Security Council approval didn’t stop the US from bombing Yugoslavia in 1999 and it surely didn’t stop them from attacking Iraq in 2003. After 9/11, what the US government wanted was vengeance, and although a war on Afghanistan was illegal, they went ahead with the war. Since the war was illegal, surely the current occupation is illegal.

Once the war started, intellectual opinion, across the political spectrum in both the US and the UK, assured the public that only radical extremists could doubt that “this is basically a just war.”27 Those who disagreed were dismissed, including anti-Taliban Afghans in Europe and in the USA as well as in Afghanistan. In rare unanimity, all these Afghan groups pleaded with the US government not to bomb or invade the country. After the bombing started, a large gathering of anti-Taliban Afghans, exiles and from within Afghanistan, gathered in Peshawar. Noam Chomsky cites the New York Times as reporting that this was “a rare display of unity among tribal elders, Islamic scholars, fractious politicians, and former guerrilla commanders”28 They unanimously “urged the US to stop the air raids . . . and the bombing of innocent people” and pleaded with the US to adopt other means to overthrow the Taliban.29 They pointed out that the Taliban who ran the country consisted of a small and closed group and without constant assistance from Pakistan and Saudi Arabia the central leadership could be undermined – and once they’d lose the support of their gun-toting rank and file, the regime could be easily overthrown. So if the Americans wanted a regime change, the Afghan people themselves were fully prepared to do it. All the US had to do was to put pressure on Pakistan and Saudi Arabia to stop their support of the Taliban. This alternative proposal would have avoided bloodshed and the further destruction of the country, but it was totally ignored – by both the US government and the compliant Western mainstream media. Essentially, what the Americans wanted was an excuse for a war — and never mind the interests of the Afghan people.

Thousands of Afghan people were killed in the American assault on the country – all being just as innocent as the people in New York – the difference being that five years later Afghans continue being killed. After the Taliban government collapsed, the UN got involved in somehow trying to pick up the pieces. The US then strong-armed NATO to get involved, but seeing no end to the mess they created, the Americans are now letting NATO take care of this section of their Empire. The Americans don’t give a damn about the Afghan people – what they want is control over the area to some day build oil and natural gas pipelines through this region – that’s what’s of importance to them.

But the tragedy doesn’t end here. Through their actions, the Americans have created a cultural disaster for the Afghanis. The bulk of the Afghan people adhered to a conservative Muslim religion within the context of an almost feudal, tribal society, but they were not extremists. Their governments had always been basically secular, especially the Taraki government. It was Taraki’s attempt to bring in social and economic changes as well as land reform that riled up the mullahs, who were major landlords and who objected to all change. The CIA then brought in the extremist zealots from the Middle East and together with Pakistani extremists, the mujahedeen were created. The Pakistanis, with US support, taught thousands of young Afghan boys in their madrasa religious schools to become the devout Taliban. Once in power, the Taliban established these schools in Afghanistan. Equally important, while the mujahedeen and the Taliban were in power, they systematically killed off or forced into exile all progressive-minded people, especially anyone suspected of being a socialist or a Marxist. So the effect of the CIA involvement has been to incubate in Afghanistan two religious-based factions, with a philosophy of foreign origin – the mujahedeen and the Taliban — and at the same time to eliminate almost all progressive-minded people. In effect, over a period of years, the Americans systematically undermined the prospects of any progressive secular form of government in Afghanistan — for the foreseeable future.

So this is what we now have in Afghanistan, two factions in what is turning out to be a civil war. Moreover, the majority of the people, seeing no improvement in their daily lives, want all the foreigners out. In fact, for many people, the Soviets have simply been replaced by the Americans – and they make no distinction between Americans and any of their NATO allies.

The UN and the various aid agencies and NGOs, while trying to help, create major problems in the course of their operations. A good deal of their aid has been wasted, and they’ve contributed to the people’s poverty by creating inflation (16% in 2005) and increasing the cost of living – prices of mutton have quadrupled.30 In a recent report for the Overseas Development Institute, Ashraf Ghani, the chancellor of Kabul University and former Karzai finance minister, has stated that in 2002 about 90 percent of the $1 billion spent on 400 aid projects was wasted.31 The report cites a series of problems. The country’s 280,000 civil servants earn an average of $50 a month, while about 50,000 Afghans work for aid organizations where the support staff earn up to $1000 a month. With more than 2,400 aid agencies and NGOs registered in the country, the government is having difficulty trying to hold on to its staff. The report is filled with examples of waste and inefficiency. Where the Afghan government could build a school for about $40,000, an international aid agency undertook the task of building 500 schools, at a cost of $250,000 each. The Afghan government would hire local contractors, but the aid agencies spend 80 percent of the funds on foreign technical assistance and imported staff and supplies. Another example is the highway that was built between Kabul and Kandahar which the Afghan government estimated would cost $35 million if they built it – it was eventually built by the US Agency for International Development (USAID) at a cost of more than $190 million. Also the best and sometimes the only decent housing goes to foreign staff (3 – 4,000 foreign civilians), and this raises rents to levels that ordinary people can’t afford – in some areas up to 1000 percent.32 Hence thousands of Afghanis continue to live in the bombed out rubble of much of Kabul, which somehow has not been a priority for reconstruction with low-cost housing. Expensive foreign contractors and consultants often duplicate or replace work that could be done by the Afghan government. Some of the foreign experts refuse to teach their skills to Afghan counterparts, because in time it would do away with their own jobs.

Another recent report on Afghanistan’s “reconstruction” written by Fariba Nawa, an Afghan-American journalist, is devastating and “confirms that Afghanistan has been ‘Enron-ized’ by the Bush administration.”33 The report states that foreign contractors “make as much as US$1,000 a day, while the Afghans they employ make $5 per day.” It reveals that the USAID “gives contracts to American companies (and the World Bank and IMF give contracts to companies from their donor countries) who take huge chunks off the top and hire layers and layers of subcontractors who take their cuts, leaving only enough for sub-par construction.” The result is collapsing hospitals, clinics and schools, rutted and dangerous new highways, and “help” for farmers that leaves many of them worse off than before. Overall, countless millions have been wasted through misdirection, inefficiency, and corruption – leaving in its wake an alienated Afghan population. The reality is that the bulk of the people continue to languish in grinding poverty, with less clean water and electricity than before the war. The aid agencies have helped, but at great cost, and they have not endeared themselves to the local people.

After almost five years of occupation and “$8 billion of poorly managed development aid, a significant number of Afghans have grown tired of the ‘international community’ and its military occupation.”34 As for that military presence, despite the 32,000 American and NATO troops, there has been a steady deterioration of security for civilians – and a growing fury at American air strikes that have killed hundreds of innocent civilians and the occurrence of “coalition-led house searches, random detentions and last year’s revelations of torture at Bagram air base.”35

In his position as the Director General of Pakistan’s Inter-Services Intelligence, Hamid Gul, has followed developments in Afghanistan for years. In a recent interview this was his grim assessment:

When this sort of mass resistance starts, it means it is a collective decision of the Afghans. So, you can see that though the Taliban resistance is centered in a very specific area, sporadic incidents have erupted all over . . . This is the tip of the iceberg you are watching; the situation will further escalate as the whole environment is now conducive to resistance . . . . The jirgas are unanimous: there will be all-out war in Afghanistan.36

Given this situation, there is no easy solution to the Afghan problem. Historically, the British were defeated with the loss of thousands of lives, and so were the Soviets. Somewhat surprisingly, even President Karzai has recently become sharply critical of the American-led occupation and the “anti-terror strategy,” saying, “I strongly believe . . . that we must engage strategically in disarming terrorism by stopping their sources of supply of money, training, equipment and motivation. It is not acceptable for us that in all this fighting, Afghans are dying. In the past three to four weeks, 500 to 600 Afghans were killed. [Even] if they are Taliban, they are sons of this land.”37 Karzai’s sensible offer of an amnesty to the Taliban in 2003 had been rejected, but this may be the only solution.

Much of Afghanistan is now in a state of chaos and civil war. There is no such thing as peace-keeping in the country. The war will rage on indefinitely and in time the entire Afghan population will rise up to throw out the foreigners. Rather than wait for that, the Americans and all their supporters should get out, totally – in the way that they should get out of Iraq. Although it’s the Americans that created the disaster to begin with – in both countries — it seems it will have to be the indigenous people to somehow resolve the problems.

And when it comes to Canada, what are the Canadians doing pulling American chestnuts out of the Afghan fire?

John Ryan, Ph.D., is a retired professor of geography and senior scholar at the University of Winnipeg in Canada. He can be reached at
[email protected]


Notes and References

1 Declan Walsh, “UN Report Accuses MPs of Terror and Massacres,” The Guardian, June 12, 2006.,,1795546,00.html

2 Although a number of sources have maintained the Hamid Karzai had once acted as a consultant or an adviser to the American oil company Unocal, both the company and Karzai have denied this. The denial may be true, but it may be that his work was laundered through sub-contractors so it would be difficult to prove. Le Monde in a December 5, 2002 profile of Karzai stated: “After studying law in Kabul and India, he completed his training in the United States where he was for a time a consultant for the American oil company Unocal, when it was studying the construction of a pipeline in Afghanistan.” Le Monde has refused to retract the story. The claim had also been made in January 2002 in Le Monde diplomatique by senior writer Pierre Abramovici in a major article, “The US and the Taliban: A Done Deal,” which concludes with: “It then emerged that during the negotiations over the Afghan oil pipeline, Karzai had been a consultant for Unocal.” The article is available at Other equally significant articles abound: Wayne Madsen, “Afghanistan, the Taliban, and the Bush Oil Team,” Centre for Research on Globalization, January 23, 2002. Madsen claims that Karzai not only worked as a senior adviser to Unocal but for years had close relations with CIA Director William Casey; Iiene R. Prusher, Scott Baldauf, and Edward Girardet, “Afghan Power Brokers,” Christian Science Monitor, June 10, 2002; Umberine Syed, “Oil Power Shines Bright: The Wealth of Central Asia,”

3 A short account and the text of the agreement appears in: “Turkmen-Afghan-Pakistani gas pipeline accord published,” Alexander’s Gas & Oil Connections, Volume 7, Issue # 13, June 27, 2002. ; Faraz Hashmi,

“Trilateral gas pipeline agreement signed: Musharraf, Niyazov & Karzai vow to boost trade,” Dawn Internet Edition, May 31, 2002. ; Rory McCarthy, “Pipe Dream,” The Guardian, May 31, 2002.,,725433,00.html

4 Fred Halliday, “Revolution in Afghanistan,” New Left Review, No. 112, pp. 3-44, 1978; Also cited in William Blum, Killing Hope: US Military and CIA Interventions Since World War II, Monroe, Maine: Common Courage Press, 1995, p. 340.

5 Jonathan Neale, “The Afghan Tragedy,” International Socialism, 2:12, Spring 1981, from the section “Afghan Society”

6 All these reforms and government measures were explained to me at considerable length by the Dean of Agriculture and some of the professors during a lengthy session at Kabul University.

7 Blum, op. cit., p. 351.

8 The Economist (London), September 11, 1979, p. 44. The article notes that during the first year and a half of the new government “no restrictions had been imposed on religious practice.”

9 Newsweek, April 16, 1979, p.64 acknowledges that the mullahs were rich landowners; New York Times, April 13, 1979, p. 8 includes the comment that the religious issue “is being used by some Afghans who actually object more to President Taraki’s plans for land reforms and other changes in this feudal society.”

10 Eqbal Ahmad, “Terrorism: Theirs and Ours,” (A Presentation at the University of Colorado, Boulder, October 12, 1993); Cullen Murphy, “The Gold Standard: The quest for the Holy Grail of equivalence,” Atlantic Monthly, January 2002

11 Blum, op. cit., p. 343; “How the CIA turns foreign students into traitors,” Ramparts (San Francisco), April 1967, pp. 23-24; Phillip Bonosky, Washington’s Secret War Against Afghanistan, New York: International Publishers, 1985, pp.33-34; The Truth About Afghanistan: Documents, Facts, Eyewitness Reports, Moscow: Novosti Press Agency Publishing House, 1980, pp. 83-96; Washington Post, December 23, 1979, p. A8.

12 Blum, p. 343; Bonosky, p. 52.

13 The Truth About Afghanistan, op. cit., pp. 91-92.

14 Ibid.

15 Washington Post, December 23, 1979, p.A8. Soviet troops had started arriving in Afghanistan on December 8, to which the article states: “There was no charge [by the State Department] that the Soviets had invaded Afghanistan, since the troops apparently were invited.”

16 “How Jimmy Carter and I Started the Mujahideen”: Interview of Zbigniew Brzezinski Le Nouvel Observateur (France), Jan 15-21, 1998, p. 76

17 Ahmed Rashid, “The Taliban: Exporting Extremism,” Foreign Affairs, November-December 1999. — currently the full text of the article is in:

18 Washington Post, May 11, 1979, p.12. The story reports that a “favourite tactic” of the mujahedeen was “to torture victims [often Russians] by first cutting off their noses, ears, and genitals, then removing one slice of skin after another,” leading to “a slow, very painful death”; Washington Post, January 13, 1985. The article describes Russian prisoners caged like animals and “living lives of indescribable horror”; John Fullerton, The Soviet Occupation of Afghanistan, (London), 1984 cites a journalist from the Far Eastern Economic Review reporting that “one [Soviet] group was killed, skinned and hung up in a butcher’s shop” – cited in Blum, op. cit., p. 348.

19 D. Zayar, “Afghanistan, Bin Laden and the hypocrisy of American imperialism,” In Defence of Marxism, September 26, 2001.

20 “When the U.S. committed $43 million in aid to Afghanistan in May 2001, it brought the total of U.S. aid to the country that year alone to $124 million,” cited in article by Joseph Farah, “Murray pushed for aid to Taliban before to 9/11,”, December 26, 2002 ; “This year, the U.S. allocated $120 million in aid to Afghanistan, including $43 million in food aid during the month of May,” cited in report by James Ridgeway, “Taliban Twists Shrub With Poppy Politics: Bush’s Opium Blender,” Village Voice, June 20-26, 2001,ridgeway,25704,6.html; For pipeline negotiations see Le Monde diplomatique article by Pierre Abramovici, “The US and the Taliban: A Done Deal,” which states: “The task of negotiating [a pipeline deal] with the Taliban was given to Christina Rocca, the new assistant secretary of state for South Asian affairs . . . . on 29 July [2001], Christina Rocca held unsuccessful discussions with the Taliban ambassador in Pakistan”

21 Diana Johnstone, Fools’ Crusade: Yugoslavia, NATO and Western Delusions, New York: Monthly Review Press, 2002, pp. 61-62; personal communication with Canada’s former ambassador to Yugoslavia, James Bissett.

22 “Taliban repeats call for negotiations,”, October 2, 2001, includes comment: “Afghanistan’s ruling Taiban repeated its demand for evidence before it would hand over suspected terrorist leader Osama bin Ladin.”; Noam Chomsky, “The War on Afghanistan,” Znet, December 30, 2001

23 Ed Haas, “FBI says, it has ‘No hard evidence connecting Bin Laden to 9/11’,” Muckraker Report, June 6, 2006.

24 “Bin Laden says he wasn’t behind attacks,”, September 17, 2001.

25 “Pentagon Releases Bin Laden Videotape: US officials say tape links him to September 11 attacks,”, December 13, 2001.

26 A Google search identifies dozens of articles questioning the authenticity of the December 13, 2001 tape. The following has good photos comparing the real bin Laden with the fake in the tape: “The fake bin Laden video tape,” ; Other more recent articles discuss the December 13, 2001 tape as well as another fake tape that came out on January 17, 2006 in which bin Laden implicitly confesses his responsibility for orchestrating the 9/11 attacks: Scholars for 9/11 Truth, “Osama Tape Appears Fake, Experts Conclude,”, June 1, 2006 “Osama’s tape: Latest of US fabrications?” Alt.Peace, June 2, 2006.

27 Robert Kuttner, editor, American Prospect, November 5, 2001, as cited by Noam Chomsky, op. cit.

28 Chomsky, ibid.

29 Barry Bearak, “Leaders of the Old Afghanistan Prepare for the New,” NYT, October 25, 2001; John Thornhill and Farhan Bokhari, “Traditional leaders call for peace jihad,” FT, October 25, 2001; “Afghan peace assembly call,” FT, October 26, 2001; John Burns, “Afghan Gathering in Pakistan Backs Future Role for King,” NYT, October 26, 2001; Indira Laskhmanan, “1,000 Afghan leaders discuss a new regime, BG, October 25, 26, 2001; Noam Chomsky, op. cit.

30 Edward Harris, “Many Afghans resent foreigners’ presence,” Yahoo! News, May 30, 2006.

31 Toby Poston, “Millions of dollars worth of aid money is being wasted,” BBC News, February 26, 2006

32 Harris, op. cit.

33 William Fisher, “The fall and fall of Afghanistan,” Inter Press Service, May 8, 2006

34 Christian Parenti, “Fury Over Foreigners,” The Nation, February 7, 2006

35 Ibid.

36 Syed Saleem Shahzad, “The battle spreads in Afghanistan,” Asia Times Online, May 26, 2006

37 Tini Tran, Associate Press Writer, “Karzai decries anti-terror strategy,” [AP-CP] Winnipeg Free Press, June 23, 2006, p. A20.

Dear Readers,

We are currently facing an unprecedented threat to the independent media and freedom on the internet. The ultimate goal is the silencing of any voice of opposition to the mainstream narrative.

We are  living one of the most serious crises in modern history in an increasingly polarized and crazy world. In the words of William Shakespeare “Hell is Empty and the Devils are All Here” (The Tempest, 1610). 

To ensure the longevity of Global Research, we need your help! Our content will always be free, but your donations and membership subscriptions are essential to the functioning of our website. Free content involves some very real costs. We cannot meet these costs without your support. Please click below to make a donation or become a member now:

Click to view our membership plans

Click to become a member (receive free books!):

 Click to donate:

Click to make a one-time or a recurring donation

We thank you for your support!

-The Global Research Team

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on In the Words of William Shakespeare: “Hell Is Empty and the Devils Are All Here”. Global Research Needs Your Support

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Vaccine purchasers must “indemnify, defend and hold harmless Pfizer … from and against any and all suits, claims, actions, demands, losses, damages, liabilities, settlements, penalties, fines, costs and expenses … arising out of, relating to, or resulting from the vaccine.”

  • A leaked document broken down by Twitter user Ehden reveals the shocking terms of Pfizer’s international COVID-19 vaccine agreements.
  • Countries that purchase Pfizer’s COVID-19 shot must acknowledge that “Pfizer’s efforts to develop and manufacture the product” are “subject to significant risks and uncertainties.”
  • In the event that a drug or other treatment comes out that can prevent, treat or cure COVID-19, the agreement stands, and the country must follow through with their vaccine order.
  • While COVID-19 vaccines are “free” to receive in the U.S., they’re being paid for by taxpayer dollars at a rate of $19.50 per dose — Albania, the leaked contract revealed, paid $12 per dose.
  • The purchaser of Pfizer’s COVID-19 vaccine must also acknowledge two facts that have largely been brushed under the rug: both their efficacy and risks are unknown.
  • Purchasers must also “indemnify, defend and hold harmless Pfizer … from and against any and all suits, claims, actions, demands, losses, damages, liabilities, settlements, penalties, fines, costs and expenses … arising out of, relating to, or resulting from the Vaccine.”

Vaccine makers have nothing to lose by marketing their experimental COVID-19 shots, even if they cause serious injury and death, as they enjoy full indemnity against injuries occurring from COVID-19 vaccines or any other pandemic vaccine under the Public Readiness and Emergency Preparedness (PREP) Act, passed in the U.S. in 2005.

The full extent of their COVID-19 vaccine indemnification agreements with countries, however, is a closely guarded secret, one that has remained highly confidential — until now. A leaked document broken down by Twitter user Ehden reveals the shocking terms of Pfizer’s international COVID-19 vaccine agreements.

“These agreements are confidential, but luckily one country did not protect the contract document well enough, so I managed to get a hold of a copy,” he wrote. “As you are about to see, there is a good reason why Pfizer was fighting to hide the details of these contracts.”

An ironclad agreement, all on Pfizer’s terms

The alleged indemnification agreement, reportedly between Pfizer and Albania, was originally posted in snippets on Twitter, but Twitter now has them marked as “unavailable.” Copies of the tweets are available on Treadreader, however.

The Albania agreement appears very similar to another contract, published online, between Pfizer and the Dominican Republic. It covers not only COVID-19 vaccines, but any product that enhances the use or effects of such vaccines.

Countries that purchase Pfizer’s COVID-19 shot must acknowledge that “Pfizer’s efforts to develop and manufacture the Product” are “subject to significant risks and uncertainties.”

And in the event that a drug or other treatment comes out that can prevent, treat or cure COVID-19, the agreement stands, and the country must follow through with their order. Ivermectin, for instance, is not only safe, inexpensive and widely available but has been found to reduce COVID-19 mortality by 81%. Yet, it continues to be ignored in favor of more expensive, and less effective, treatments and mass experimental vaccination.

“If you were wondering why #Ivermectin was suppressed,” Ehden wrote, “well, it is because the agreement that countries had with Pfizer does not allow them to escape their contract, which states that even if a drug will be found to treat COVID19 the contract cannot be voided.”

Even if Pfizer fails to deliver vaccine doses within their estimated delivery period, the purchaser may not cancel the order. Further, Pfizer can make adjustments to the number of contracted doses and their delivery schedule, “based on principles to be determined by Pfizer,” and the country buying the vaccines must “agree to any revision.”

It doesn’t matter if the vaccines are delivered severely late, even at a point when they’re no longer needed, as it’s made clear that “Under no circumstances will Pfizer be subject to or liable for any late delivery penalties.” As you might suspect, the contract also forbids returns “under any circumstances.”

The big secret: Pfizer charged U.S. More Than Other Countries

While COVID-19 vaccines are “free” to receive in the U.S., they’re being paid for by taxpayer dollars at a rate of $19.5011 per dose. Albania, the leaked contract revealed, paid $12 per dose, while the EU paid $14.70 per shot. While charging different prices to different purchases is common in the drug industry, it’s often frowned upon.

In the case of the price disparity between the U.S. and the EU, Pfizer is said to have given a price break to the EU because it financially supported the development of their COVID-19 vaccine. Still, Ehden noted, “U.S. taxpayers got screwed by Pfizer, probably also Israel.” Also, Pfizer makes a point to note that countries have no right to withhold payment to the company for any reason.

Apparently, this includes in the case of receiving damaged goods. Purchasers of Pfizer’s COVID-19 vaccines are not entitled to reject them “based on service complaints,” unless they do not conform to specifications or the FDA’s Current Good Manufacturing Practice regulations. And, Ehden adds, “This agreement is above any local law of the state.”

While the purchaser has virtually no way of canceling the contract, Pfizer can terminate the agreement in the event of a “material breach” of any term in their contract.

Safety and efficacy ‘not currently known’

The purchaser of Pfizer’s COVID-19 vaccine must also acknowledge two facts that have largely been brushed under the rug: Both their efficacy and risks are unknown. According to section 5.5 of the contract:

“Purchaser acknowledges that the Vaccine and materials related to the Vaccine, and their components and constituent materials are being rapidly developed due to the emergency circumstances of the COVID-19 pandemic and will continue to be studied after provision of the Vaccine to Purchaser under this Agreement.

“Purchaser further acknowledges that the long-term effects and efficacy of the Vaccine are not currently known and that there may be adverse effects of the Vaccine that are not currently known.”

Indemnification by the purchaser is also explicitly required by the contract, which states, under section 8.1:

“Purchaser hereby agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless Pfizer, BioNTech, each of their Affiliates, contractors, sub-contractors, licensors, licensees, sub-licensees, distributors, contract manufacturers, services providers, clinical trial researchers, third parties to whom Pfizer or BioNTech or any of their respective Affiliates may directly or indirectly owe an indemnity based on the research …

“from and against any and all suits, claims, actions, demands, losses, damages, liabilities, settlements, penalties, fines, costs and expenses (including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees and other expenses of an investigation or litigation … arising out of, relating to, or resulting from the Vaccine …”

Meanwhile, the purchaser must also keep the terms of the contract confidential for a period of 10 years.

Purchasers must protect and defend Pfizer

Not only does Pfizer have total indemnification, but there’s also a section in the contract titled, “Assumption of Defense by Purchaser,” which states that in the event Pfizer suffers losses for which it is seeking indemnification, the purchaser “shall promptly assume conduct and control of the defense of such Indemnified Claims on behalf of the Indemnitee with counsel acceptable to Indemnitee(s), whether or not the Indemnified Claim is rightfully brought.” Ehden notes:

“Pfizer is making sure the country will pay for everything: ‘Costs and expenses, including … fees and disbursements of counsel, incurred by the Indemnitee(s) in connection with any Indemnified Claim shall be reimbursed on a quarterly basis by Purchaser.’”

Buried in the March 17, 2020, Federal Register — the daily journal of the U.S. government — in a document titled, “Declaration Under the Public Readiness and Emergency Preparedness Act for Medical Countermeasures Against COVID-19,” is language that establishes a new COVID-19 vaccine court — similar to the federal vaccine court that already exists.

In the U.S., vaccine makers already enjoy full indemnity against injuries occurring from this or any other pandemic vaccine under the PREP Act. If you’re injured by a COVID vaccine (or a select group of other vaccines designated under the act), you’d have to file a compensation claim with the Countermeasures Injury Compensation Program (CICP), which is funded by U.S. taxpayers via Congressional appropriation to the Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS).

While similar to the National Vaccine Injury Compensation Program (NVICP), which applies to nonpandemic vaccines, the CICP is even less generous when it comes to compensation. As reported by Dr. Meryl Nass,25 the maximum payout you can receive — even in cases of permanent disability or death — is $250,000 per person; however, you’d have to exhaust your private insurance policy before the CICP gives you a dime.

The CICP also has a one-year statute of limitations, so you have to act quickly, which is also difficult since it’s unknown if long-term effects could occur more than a year later.

Pfizer accused of abuse of power

As is apparent in Pfizer’s confidential contract with Albania, the drug giant wants governments to guarantee the company will be compensated for any expenses resulting from injury lawsuits against it. Pfizer has also demanded that countries put up sovereign assets, including bank reserves, military bases and embassy buildings, as collateral for expected vaccine injury lawsuits resulting from its COVID-19 inoculation.

New Delhi-based World Is One News (WION) reported in February 2021 that Brazil rejected Pfizer’s demands, calling them “abusive.” The demands included that Brazil:

  1. “Waives sovereignty of its assets abroad in favor of Pfizer.”
  2. Not apply its domestic laws to the company.
  3. Not penalize Pfizer for vaccine delivery delays.
  4. Exempt Pfizer from all civil liability for side effects.

STAT News also referred to concerns by legal experts, who also suggested Pfizer’s demands were an abuse of power. Mark Eccleston-Turner, a lecturer in global health law at Keele University in England, told STAT:

“[Pfizer] is trying to eke out as much profit and minimize its risk at every juncture with this vaccine development then this vaccine rollout. Now, the vaccine development has been heavily subsidized already. So there’s very minimal risk for the manufacturer involved there.”

Signs of COVID vaccine failure, adverse effects rise

Pfizer continues to sign lucrative secret vaccine deals across the globe. In June 2021, they signed one of their biggest contracts to date — with the Philippine government for 40 million doses.

Meanwhile, COVID-19 “breakthrough cases,” which used to be called vaccine failures, are on the rise. According to the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), as of July 19, 5,914 people who had been fully vaccinated for COVID-19 were hospitalized or died from COVID-19.

In the U.K., as of July 15, 87.5% of the adult population had received one dose of COVID-19 vaccine and 67.1% had received two. Yet, symptomatic cases among partially and fully vaccinated are on the rise, with an average of 15,537 new infections a day being detected, a 40% increase from the week before.

In a July 19 report from the CDC, the agency also reported that the Vaccine Adverse Event Reporting System (VAERS) had received 12,313 reports of death among people who received a COVID-19 vaccine — more than doubling from the 6,079 reports of death from the week before.

Soon after the report, however, they reverted the number to the 6,079 from the week before, indicating by default that no deaths from the vaccine had occurred that week,34 raising serious questions about transparency and vaccine safety.

Many other adverse events are also appearing, ranging from risks from the biologically active SARS-CoV-2 spike protein used in the vaccine to blood clots, reproductive toxicity and myocarditis(heart inflammation). As you can see in the confidential indemnification agreements, however, even if the vaccine turns out to be a dismal failure — and a risk to short- and long-term health — countries have no recourse, nor does anyone who received the experimental shots.

One question that we should all be asking is this: If the COVID-19 vaccines are, in fact, as safe and effective as the manufacturers claim, why do they require this level of indemnification?


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


LifeSite hosted a townhall conference with The Truth For Health Foundation, “Stop the Shot… The Rest of the Story.” This online meeting will feature Dr. Peter McCullough, Attorney Thomas Renz, Dr. Michael Yeadon, Sister Deidre Byrne, Dr. Elizabeth Lee Vliet, Dr. Jose Trasancos, and other prominent physicians, scientists, attorneys, and religious leaders who will be discussing vital information related to the COVID jab, clinical trials, and more.

Here’s a brief look at what was shared at this online meeting:

  • Breaking information will be shared by the lead attorney in U.S. suit against the Biden regime’s HHS regarding VAERS, adverse events, under-reporting deaths, and injuries. This presentation will also include an update on the CDC Whistleblower affidavit, which indicates more than 45,000 actual deaths have taken place following the COVID shot, versus the VAERS reports of only 11,000.
  • Previously undisclosed data from both Pharma-clinical trials and subsequent additional studies on the COVID jab related to specific, serious, immediate, and long-term impacts on fertility in both men and women.
  • Updates on international medical studies regarding actual vaccine immunity versus what has been reported to the public by the media.
  • Breaking information regarding international lawsuits and theological implications related to the latest COVID news around the world.

In order to have the opportunity to ask questions after the conference, please email [email protected] to receive the conference call link. We ask that only serious individuals RSVP as space is limited on the post presentation Q&A conference call.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Featured image is a screenshot from the video

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Americans who have taken COVID vaccine shots and those who have refused to capitulate to the coercion and propaganda are ill-informed about blood clots.  This article provides summaries of key recently published research on two types of observed blood clots – microscopic and relatively large size – that merit serious attention and concern.

One inevitable conclusion is that the FDA with support from big media is not doing its job to ensure truly informed consent by those taking vaccine shots.

Canadian physician reports high levels of clots

Dr Charles Hoffe has been practicing medicine for 28 years in a small, rural town in British Columbia, Canada, and recently gave a long interview.  He has given about 900 doses of the Moderna experimental mRNA vaccine to his patients.  So, contrary to some critics, he is no anti-vaccine doctor.

The core problem he has seen are microscopic clots in his patients’ tiniest capillaries.  He said

“Blood clots occurring at a capillary level.  This has never before been seen. This is not a rare disease.  This is an absolutely new phenomenon.”

Most importantly, he has emphasized these micro-clots are too small to show up on CT scans, MRI, and other conventional tests, such as angiograms, and can only be detected using the D-dimer blood test.  Using the latter, he found that 62% of his patients injected with an mRNA shot are positive for clotting.  He has explained what is happening in bodies.

The spike proteins in the vaccine become “part of the cell wall of your vascular endothelium.  This means that these cells which line your blood vessels, which are supposed to be smooth so that your blood flows smoothly now have these little spikey bits sticking out.  … when the platelet comes through the capillary it suddenly hits all these COVID spikes and it becomes absolutely inevitable that blood clots will form to block that vessel.”

He made an important distinction:

“The blood clots we hear about which the media claim are very rare are the big blood clots which are the ones that cause strokes and show up on CT scans, MRI, etc.  The clots I’m talking about are microscopic and too small to find on any scan.  They can thus only be detected using the D-dimer test…The most alarming part of this is that there are some parts of the body like the brain, spinal cord, heart and lungs which cannot re-generate. When those tissues are damaged by blood clots they are permanently damaged.”

This is his pessimistic, scientific view:

“blood vessels in their lungs are now blocked up.  In turn, this causes the heart to need to work harder to try to keep up against a much greater resistance trying to get the blood through your lungs.This is called pulmonary artery hypertension – high blood pressure in the lungs because the blood simply cannot get through effectively.  People with this condition usually die of heart failure within a few short years.”

All these medical views have been suppressed by big media., but it was covered well in another alternative news site.  And the doctor got some attention by submitting an open letter to the provincial Ministry of Health.  A key point in that is this:

“It must be emphasised, that these people were not sick people, being treated for some devastating disease.

These were previously healthy people, who were offered an experimental therapy, with unknown long-term side-effects, to protect them against an illness that has the same mortality rate as the flu. Sadly, their lives have now been ruined.”

The concept of micro blood clots has also been invoked for the serious impacts of COVID itself.  The eminent Dr. Peter McCullough noted

“So, this is a very different type of blood clotting that we would see with major blood clots in the arteries and veins.  For instance, blood clots involved in stroke and heart attack.

Blood clots involved in major blood vessels in the legs.  This was a different type of clotting and in fact the Italians courageously did some autopsies and found micro blood clots in the lungs.  And so, we understood in the end, the reason why the lungs fail is not because the virus is there.  It is because micro blood clots are there.  … When People can’t breathe, the problem is micro-blood clotting in the lungs.  …The spicule on the ball of the of the virus itself which damages blood vessels that causes blood clotting.”  He has also openly stated that none of the COVID vaccines are safe for most people at little risk from COVID.

If spike protein is the cause of micro blood clots in COVID it is also reasonable to see the same phenomenon in vaccinated people impregnated with spike proteins, as Dr. Hoffe as explained.

As to the Canadian situation, The Public Health Agency of Canada (PHAC) in July estimated the rate of vaccine-related blood clotting in Canadians who have received the AstraZeneca vaccine and said there have been 27 confirmed cases to date in Canada, with five deaths among those cases, a rather high death rate.

But this is consistent with 6 out of 28 blood clot cases reported by Yale University for the J&J vaccine in the US. Also noted was that these were a particularly rare and dangerous blood clot in the brain, known as cerebral venous sinus thrombosis (CVST), because it appears in the brain’s venous sinuses.  Also noted that there were abnormally low platelet levels in their blood, an unusual situation also found for those impacted by the AstraZeneca vaccine.

Wall Street Journal and Nature Journal

To its credit, the Wall Street Journal published a long article in July on the COVID vaccine blood clot issue.  Here are highlights from it.

“Canadian researchers say they have pinpointed a handful of amino acids targeted by key antibodies in the blood of some people who received the AstraZeneca Covid-19 vaccine, offering fresh clues to what causes rare blood clots associated with the shot.”

“The peer-reviewed findings, by a team of researchers from McMaster University in Ontario, were published …by the science journal Nature.  They could help doctors rapidly test for and treat the unusual clotting, arising from an immune-driven mix of coagulation and loss of platelets that stop bleeding.”

“The blood clotting, which some scientists have named vaccine-induced immune thrombotic thrombocytopenia, or VITT, has also been linked to Johnson & Johnson’s Covid-19 shot, though incidents have occurred less frequently with that shot than with AstraZeneca.”

“Though rare, the condition has proven deadly in more than 170 adults post-vaccination in the U.K., Europe and U.S., according to government tallies.  Many were younger adults who appeared healthy before vaccination, researchers and drug regulators say.”

“The total number of cases after first or second doses in the U.K. was 395 through June 23…Of the 395, 70 people have died.  European officials said this month that they have seen 479 potential cases of VITT out of 51.4 million AstraZeneca vaccinations…Far fewer potential cases—21 …followed J&J vaccinations in Europe.  Of those cases, 100 deaths occurred after AstraZeneca vaccination and four after Johnson & Johnson, European regulators said.”

“U.S. health officials said in late June that they have identified 38 confirmed cases of the blood-clotting syndrome out of more than 12.3 million people who received the J&J vaccine…The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention said in May that three cases had been fatal and evidence ‘suggests a plausible causal association’ between the combination of low platelets and clotting and the vaccine.”

As to what is going on inside the body:

“[In] rare cases, vaccinated people have experienced an autoimmune reaction in which antibodies bind with unusual strength to a blood component called platelet factor 4, or PF4, forming distinct clusters resembling a bunch of grapes.  This so-called immune complex, a molecular formation in the blood, activates more platelets, ‘like putting a match to gasoline,’ said John Kelton, an author of the Nature paper and researcher at McMaster University.

The process accelerates, he and other researchers say, triggering simultaneous bleeding and clotting, sometimes in the brain, stomach and other areas that can in rare cases be deadly. ‘We think these antibodies are incredible amplifiers, in a bad way, of the normal coagulation system,’ says Dr. Kelton”

Interestingly, this article did not mention at all the previously discussed case of the Canadian doctor and his findings about microscopic blood clotting.

New York Times

In April, there was limited coverage of stoppages of some vaccines: “First it was AstraZeneca. Now Johnson & Johnson. Last week, British regulators and the European Union’s medical agency said they had established a possible link between AstraZeneca’s Covid-19 vaccine and very rare, though sometimes fatal, blood clots.

The pause in the use of Johnson & Johnson’s vaccine in Europe over similar concerns threatens to hurt a sluggish rollout that was just starting to gain momentum.”  Also noted was that states paused use of the J&J vaccine after a US advisory.

“Regulators have asked vaccine recipients and doctors to look out for certain symptoms, including severe and persistent headaches and tiny blood spots under the skin.”

New England Journal of Medicine

In April this journal published three research articles on blood clotting related to COVID vaccines and a long editorial by two physicians reviewing all the work.  Here are highlights from the latter.

“The Journal has now highlighted three independent descriptions of 39 persons with a newly described syndrome characterized by thrombosis and thrombocytopenia that developed 5 to 24 days after initial vaccination with [the AstraZeneca vaccine].  … These persons were healthy or in medically stable condition, and very few were known to have had previous thrombosis or a preexisting prothrombotic condition.

Most of the patients included in these reports were women younger than 50 years of age, some of whom were receiving estrogen-replacement therapy or oral contraceptives.  A remarkably high percentage of the patients had thromboses at unusual sites — specifically, cerebral venous sinus thrombosis or thrombosis in the portal, splanchnic, or hepatic veins.  Other patients presented with deep venous thrombi, pulmonary emboli, or acute arterial thromboses.  … High levels of d-dimers and low levels of fibrinogen were common and suggest systemic activation of coagulation.  Approximately 40% of the patients died, some from ischemic brain injury, superimposed hemorrhage, or both conditions, often after anticoagulation.”

“Better understanding of how the vaccine induces these platelet-activating antibodies might also provide insight into the duration of antigen exposure and the risk of reoccurrence of thrombosis, which will inform the need for extended anticoagulation and might lead to improvements in vaccine design.”

“Additional cases have now been reported to the European Medicines Agency, including at least 169 possible cases of cerebral venous sinus thrombosis and 53 possible cases of splanchnic vein thrombosis among 34 million recipients of the [AstraZeneca] vaccine, 35 possible cases of central nervous system thrombosis among 54 million recipients of the Pfizer–BioNTech mRNA vaccine, and 5 possible (but unvetted) cases of cerebral venous sinus thrombosis among 4 million recipients of the Moderna mRNA vaccine.  Six possible cases of cerebral venous sinus thrombosis (with or without splanchnic vein thrombosis) have been reported among the more than 7 million recipients of the Johnson & Johnson/Janssen vaccine.”

Here is the final conclusion:

“The questions of whether certain populations can be identified as more suitable candidates for one or another vaccine and who and how to monitor for this rare potential complication will require additional study.”

Salk Institute

In April, the Salk Institute promoted coverage of research conducted by a number of people associated with it.  The chief finding was that the spike protein associated with the SARS-2 virus and with vaccines was connected to strokes, heart attacks and blood clots.

“The paper, published in Circulation Research, also shows conclusively that COVID-19 is a vascular disease, demonstrating exactly how the SARS-CoV-2 virus damages and attacks the vascular system on a cellular level.  … the paper provides clear confirmation and a detailed explanation of the mechanism through which the [spike] protein damages vascular cells.”

subsequent article in May examined this work and made several important observations.  Here is its perspective, as relevant to the COVID vaccines.

“The prestigious Salk Institute…has authored and published the bombshell scientific study revealing that the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein used in the Covid jabs is what’s actually causing vascular damage.  Critically, all three of the experimental Covid vaccines currently under emergency use authorisation in the UK either inject patients with the spike protein or, via mRNA technology, instruct the patient’s own body to manufacture the spike protein and release them into the blood system.”

“The Salk Institute study proves the assumption made by the vaccine industry, that the spike protein is inert and harmless, to be false and dangerously inaccurate.”

“The research proves that the Covid vaccines are capable of inducing vascular disease and directly causing injuries and deaths stemming to blood clots and other vascular reactions.  This is all caused by the spike protein that’s engineered into the vaccines.”

Report by 57 Medical Experts

This May report was prepared by nearly five dozen highly respected doctors, scientists, and public policy experts from across the globe.  It went public and was urgently sent to world leaders as well as all who are associated with the production and distribution of the various Covid-19 vaccines in circulation today.  The report demanded an immediate stop to COVID vaccinations.  Dr. McCullough was one of the signatories.

“Despite calls for caution, the risks of SARS-CoV-2 vaccination have been minimized or ignored by health organizations and government authorities,” said the experts.

On the issue of blood clotting in vaccinated people the report said this:

“Some adverse reactions, including blood-clotting disorders, have already been reported in healthy and young vaccinated people. These cases led to the suspension or cancellation of the use of adenoviral vectorized [AstraZeneca] and [J&J] vaccines in some countries.  It has now been proposed that vaccination with ChAdOx1-nCov-19 can result in immune thrombotic thrombocytopenia (VITT) mediated by platelet-activating antibodies against Platelet factor-4, which clinically mimics autoimmune heparin-induced thrombocytopenia.

Unfortunately, the risk was overlooked when authorizing these vaccines, although adenovirus-induced thrombocytopenia has been known for more than a decade, and has been a consistent event with adenoviral vectors.  The risk of VITT would presumably be higher in those already at risk of blood clots, including women who use oral contraceptives, making it imperative for clinicians to advise their patients accordingly.”


Supporters of the COVID vaccines are quick to emphasize that relatively few recipients have experienced post-vaccination blood clotting.  True, except for the findings of the Canadian physician about microscopic blood clots in most of his patients that major news media have ignored.  Also ignored are the findings from the Salk Institute which provide a rationale for seeing spike proteins as causing clots.  Even vaccines not directly including spike proteins – the AstraZeneca and J&J adenovirus vector vaccines – pose a problem because they send genetic instructions into cells to produce the spike protein of the coronavirus.

Even a June case study of one patient who died from clotting after taking the second dose of the Moderna vaccine and not related to anything else stressed the use of “safe” COVID vaccines.  This was also stressed in an accompanying editorial that mentioned: “The highest reported incidence is 5 cases among about 130,000 Norwegian recipients of the [AstraZeneca] vaccine.”

This statistical view of the medical establishment was expressed as: “any potential risks of vaccination must be interpreted in the context of the overall morbidity and mortality of COVID-19 itself.”  It also stressed blood clots in hospitalized COVID patients.  It cannot be emphasized enough that the vast majority of COVID victims could have been saved through early home/outpatient treatment as detailed in Pandemic Blunder.  The proven treatments can stop COVID infection in its early virus replication phase and, therefore, prevent blood clots.

The public also needs strong information about the many advantages of natural immunity, from prior COVID infection or life exposure to various coronaviruses.  This is far better than vaccine induced artificial immunity that does less to protect against COVID variants and makes people susceptible to breakthrough infections.  For most people the benefits of COVID vaccination do not outweigh the risks.

On the issue of whether all COVID vaccines pose a blood clot threat consider an April study by Oxford University that found the number of people who receive blood clots after getting vaccinated with a coronavirus vaccine are about the same for those who get Pfizer and Moderna vaccines as they are for the AstraZeneca vaccine.  And as already cited the J&J vaccine has also been implicated for clots.

What needs attention by FDA, CDC and NIH is the need to do more testing of vaccine victims to discover through blood testing or autopsies the nature and extent of blood clotting.

For those wanting to see many examples of COVID vaccine negative health impacts this website is recommended.  The mission is:

“This website is dedicated to sharing the truth about these people and their testimonials.  Watch for yourself and make up your own mind.  Is it worth it to risk life-changing and even fatal side effects from a vaccine for a disease that is survived by 99.98% of people under 70?”

Of course, the risk of getting serious blood clots is much higher for those who get a serious case COVID-19 then it is for those who get vaccinated.  They tend to be acute, near-term impacts amenable to various treatments, though sadly not lifesaving in all cases.

More insidious, in the longer run, however, perhaps years after the shots, are the microscopic blood clots noted by Dr. Hoffe and Dr. McCollough that may impact the lives of many people, perhaps millions.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

This article was originally published on NOQ Report.

Dr. Joel S. Hirschhorn, author of Pandemic Blunder and many articles on the pandemic, worked on health issues for decades. As a full professor at the University of Wisconsin, Madison, he directed a medical research program between the colleges of engineering and medicine.  As a senior official at the Congressional Office of Technology Assessment and the National Governors Association, he directed major studies on health-related subjects; he testified at over 50 US Senate and House hearings and authored hundreds of articles and op-ed articles in major newspapers.  He has served as an executive volunteer at a major hospital for more than 10 years.  He is a member of the Association of American Physicians and Surgeons, and America’s Frontline Doctors.

Featured image is from NOQ Report

Truman’s War Crimes at Hiroshima and Nagasaki

August 10th, 2021 by Jacob G. Hornberger

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


This article was published in August 2020 for the 75th anniversary of the bombing of Hiroshima and Nagasaki.

This month marks the 75h anniversary of the U.S. atomic bombings of Hiroshima and Nagasaki. While proponents of the bombings have long justified them on the basis that they shortened World War II, the fact is that they were war crimes. The only reason why President Truman and the pilots who dropped the bombs were not prosecuted as war criminals is because the United States ended up winning the war.

It has long been pointed out that Japan had expressed a willingness to surrender. The only condition was that the Japanese emperor not be abused or executed.

President Truman refused to agree to that condition. Like his predecessor Franklin Roosevelt, Truman demanded “unconditional surrender.”

That was why Japan continued fighting. Japanese officials naturally assumed that U.S. officials were going to do some very bad things to their emperor, including torture and execution. In the minds of Japanese officials, why else would the United States not be willing to agree to that one condition, especially given that it would have meant the end of the war?

The dark irony is that Truman ended up accepting the condition anyway, only after he pulverized the people in Hiroshima and Nagasaki with nuclear bombs.

In an excellent op-ed in the Los Angeles Times today entitled “U.S. Leaders Knew We Didn’t Have to Drop Atomic Bombs on Japan to Win the War. We Did It Anyway” the authors point out:

Seven of the United States’ eight five-star Army and Navy officers in 1945 agreed with the Navy’s vitriolic assessment. Generals Dwight Eisenhower, Douglas MacArthur and Henry “Hap” Arnold and Admirals William Leahy, Chester Nimitz, Ernest King, and William Halsey are on record stating that the atomic bombs were either militarily unnecessary, morally reprehensible, or both.

Keep in mind that there is nothing in the principles of warfare that required Truman and Roosevelt to demand the unconditional surrender of Japan (or Germany). Wars can be — and often are — ended with terms of surrender. Both presidents were willing to sacrifice countless people on both sides of the conflict to attain their demand for unconditional surrender.

But Truman’s unconditional surrender demand is not why his action constituted a war crime. This bombings constituted war crimes because they targeted non-combatants, including children, women, and seniors with death as a way to bring about an unconditional surrender of the Japanese government.

It has long been considered a rule of warfare that armies fight armies in war. They don’t target non-combatants. The intentional killing of non-combatants is considered a war crime.

A good example of this principle involved the case of Lt. William Calley in the Vietnam War. Calley and his men shot and killed numerous non-combatants in a South Vietnamese village. The victims included women and children.

The U.S military prosecuted Calley as a war criminal — and rightly so. While the deaths of non-combatants oftentimes occurs incidentally to wartime operations, it is a war crime to specifically target them for death.

Truman justified his action by arguing that the bombings shortened the war and, therefore, saved the lives of thousands of American soldiers and Japanese people if an invasion had become necessary. It is a justification that has been repeated ever since by proponents of the bombings.

There are two big problems with that justification, however.

First, an invasion would not have been necessary. All that Truman had to do was to accept Japan’s only condition for surrender, and that would have meant the end of the war, without the deaths that would have come with an invasion and that did come with the bombings of Hiroshima and Nagasaki.

More important, the fact that lives of American soldiers would have been saved is not a moral or legal justification for targeting non-combatants. If Calley had maintained at his trial that his actions were intended to shorten the Vietnam War, his defense would have been rejected. He would have still be convicted for war crimes.

Soldiers die in war. That is the nature of war. To kill women, children, and seniors in the hopes of saving the lives of soldiers by shortening the war is not only a war crime, it is also an act of extreme cowardice. If an invasion of Japan would have become necessary to win the war, thereby resulting in the deaths of thousands of U.S. soldiers, then that’s just the way that war works.

It’s also worth pointing out that Japan never had any intention of invading and conquering the United States. The only reason that Japan bombed Pearl Harbor was in the hope of knocking out the U.S. Pacific fleet, not as a prelude to invading Hawaii or the continental United States but simply to prevent the U.S. from interfering with Japan’s efforts to secure oil in the Dutch East Indies.

And why was Japan so desperate for oil as to initiate war against the United States? Because President Franklin Roosevelt had imposed a highly effective oil embargo on Japan as a way to maneuver the Japanese into attacking the United States.

FDR’s plan, of course, succeeded, which ended up costing the lives of hundreds of thousands of American soldiers and millions of Japanese citizens, including those at Hiroshima and Nagasaki.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Jacob G. Hornberger is founder and president of The Future of Freedom Foundation. He was born and raised in Laredo, Texas, and received his B.A. in economics from Virginia Military Institute and his law degree from the University of Texas. He was a trial attorney for twelve years in Texas. He also was an adjunct professor at the University of Dallas, where he taught law and economics. In 1987, Mr. Hornberger left the practice of law to become director of programs at the Foundation for Economic Education. He has advanced freedom and free markets on talk-radio stations all across the country as well as on Fox News’ Neil Cavuto and Greta van Susteren shows and he appeared as a regular commentator on Judge Andrew Napolitano’s show Freedom Watch. View these interviews at and from Full Context. Send him email.

Spectre of Syria Haunts Afghanistan

August 10th, 2021 by M. K. Bhadrakumar

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


The Moscow daily Vedomosti with links to the establishment has reported that Russia will give “limited military support” to Uzbekistan and Tajikistan in the event of attacks from Afghanistan, including weapons supplies, air support and deployment of special forces, but there are “no plans to deploy major ground forces” to the region. 

The daily quoted sources close to the Russian defence ministry to the effect that special operations units may “play a key role if tensions do rise”. The daily report concluded with an expert opinion that if the security scenario worsens critcally, a Russian operation “similar to the Syrian one may take place, which will involve airstrikes and missions of special operations forces. And like in Syria, this kind of operation will include the limited use of unguided munitions that may prove effective given the nature of possible hostilities.”  

Indeed, the Russian military preparedness has shifted gear lately. Around 2500 troops from Russia, Tajikistan and Uzbekistan kicked off large-scale joint drills at the Kharb-Maidon practice range in Tajikistan, located 20 km from the Afghan border, on August 5 that will run through August 10. The drills involve 2500 troops, including 1800 Russian personnel drawn mostly from units of Russia’s 201st military base in Tajikistan. 

The deputy commander of Russia’s Central Military District Lieutenant-General Yevgeny Poplavsky told the media that “military threats are mounting and the situation is becoming increasingly tense and unpredictable. The joint drills will enable us to check the accumulated combat experience, test optimal forms of troop employment and work out common approaches to warfare.” 

Meanwhile, a parallel Russian-Uzbek “tactical exercise” has also been held last week against the backdrop of the Afghan situation, which ended near the Uzbek border city of Termez on the Amu Darya on Friday.  

This exercise simulated special operations by a joint Russian-Uzbek contingent countering illegal armed groups from Afghanistan crossing the Amu Darya border. 

Interestingly, the commander of Russia’s Central Military Region, Mikhail Teplinsky, told the media,

“The scenario of the exercise was based on the Russian military’s experience obtained in operations against illegal armed groups in Syria.” 

Participating in the exercise were about 1500 men from the two countries, equipped with special vehicles and planes, who conducted air reconnaissance and prevented large armed groups from crossing over. Significantly, the Chief of Russia’s General Staff Army General Valery Gerasimov visited Termez to observe the exercise. 

Uzbekistan has a 144 km border with Afghanistan which runs from the tripoint with Turkmenistan to the tripoint with Tajikistan along the Amu Darya. In comparison, the Tajikistan-Afghanistan border is 1,357 km in length and runs from the tripoint with Uzbekistan in the west to the tripoint with China in the east, almost entirely along the Amu Darya, Pyanj and Pamir rivers all the way up to the Wakhan Corridor. 

The Tajik-Afghan border is very difficult mountainous terrain to guard. The Russian-Uzbek-Tajik exercise envisaged the creation of special groups that can operate on their own or with the combat forces of mechanised infantry and reconnaissance, armour, artillery and other units, incorporating radio-electronic warfare crews and air defence, UAV, communication and guard units, etc. 

The exercise simulated operations on enemy territory with the field units getting radio-electronic protection and guidance from mobile command centres regarding the enemy’s reconnaissance and on the use of smart weapons, attack drones, etc. read more

In the Russian assessment, the Biden Administration is manoeuvring to create an open-ended military presence in Afghanistan and to launch a hybrid war as in Syria. There is deep suspicion in Moscow as regards the US’ geopolitical intentions. 

Defence Minister Sergey Shoigu hit out at the US recently:

“I can say one thing here, and it’s simply logical: why are you withdrawing if you basically stand there behind the fence, trying to look through the gaps to see what is going on over there? Why leave then? To literally remain on the border? The answer is absolutely clear: this is an attempt to take root in the Central Asian region…” read more  

What is the “big picture”? A civil war in Afghanistan will sooner rather later lead to the creation of spheres of influence. Of course, the churning will be marked by much bloodshed and large scale internal displacement of hapless civilians. 

The Saudi establishment daily Asharq Al-Awsat recently analysed the Syrian conflict:

“The Russian military view currently believes that Syrian forces are unable to control all parts of the country, citing a lack of human resources, the economic crises and intervention of foreign armies. Therefore, the “temporary solution” lies in the zones of influence: Reaching an agreement with Turkey over the northwest, an agreement with the US over the northeast, one with former fighters in the Free Syrian Army over the southwest and one with the government forces, Russia and Iran over the central-western regions.” read more 

Shuffle the protagonists in Syria and the kaleidoscope will show how the Afghan mosaic may look like in a near future: Afghan government in control shrinking to the capital and surrounding regions. Alas, countries such as Afghanistan or Syria, although ancient cultures, are of recent origin. 

Unsurprisingly, Pakistan is resisting the US pressure to open its border and let in Afghan refugees. To my mind, Taliban is in reality doing Pakistan a great favour by initiating the closure of the southeast Chaman-Spin Boldak border crossing, which it captured from the Afghan government forces last month. read more

Pakistan has completed 90 percent of fencing along the 2,611-km long Durand Line. According to reports, the border barrier consists of two sets of chain-link fences separated by a 2-meter space that has been filled with concertina wire coils. The double fence is about 4 meters high. The military has installed surveillance cameras to check any movement along the border. 

Equally, Russia and the Central Asian states are relatively safe so long as Kunduz and Takhar remain under Taliban control. Again, with the capture of Nimrod in the west by the Taliban, Iran also would have border security. The Taliban has given assurances to Afghanistan’s neighbours. 

The only exception is India. Afghanistan is a large country and it’s about time that Indian analysts who root for the ‘forever’ war reflect over its possible break-up. Russia has warned that the risk of hostilities growing into a full-scale and prolonged civil war “has become harsh reality.” If the civil war conditions aggravate, a Balkanisation of Afghanistan is in the cards. 


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Featured image is from Indian Punchline

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


In August 2021, an alliance of African faith leaders delivered a powerful message to the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation: Stop promoting failing and harmful high-input Green Revolution programs, such as the Alliance for a Green Revolution in Africa (AGRA).

At a virtual press conference, the Southern African Faith Communities’ Environment Institute (SAFCEI) released its public letter to the Gates Foundation, which it sent two months ago with 500 signatures from African faith and farming communities. They have received neither an acknowledgment nor a response from the Foundation.

“Faith leaders are witnessing the negative impact of industrialized farming to the land and in their communities and have come together in this letter to say to the Gates Foundation: please re-think your approach to farming in Africa,” says SAFCEI Executive Director Francesca de Gasparis. Farmers and faith leaders speaking at the press conference urged donors to shift their funding to more effective and sustainable approaches such as agroecology.

Crucial challenge at a critical time

Their call comes at a critical time. In Sub-Saharan Africa, 66 percent of people (724 million) now suffer moderate to severe food insecurity, up from 51 percent in 2014, according to the State of Food Insecurity report recently released by the United Nations Food and Agriculture Organization. As food insecurity increases — intensified by the ongoing crises of climate change and the COVID-19 pandemic — the United Nations is convening a Food Systems Summit in September to address global failures to reduce hunger in line with commitments made in the Sustainable Development goals. The summit, which is led by AGRA President Agnes Kalibata, is mired in controversy, accused by farmer groups of promoting the same kinds of industrialized agricultural development that have failed to address the hunger crisis.

The letter to the Gates Foundation detailed the negative impacts that industrialized agriculture has had on the land and in the communities of faith leaders from around the continent. At the press conference, presenters emphasized the need for the Gates Foundation and other donors to break with the current agriculture agenda and instead invest in more regenerative, agroecological approaches.

“Farmers have become wary of programs that promote monoculture and chemical-intensive farming. They have lost control of their seeds. Now, they say they are being held hostage on their own farms,” says Celestine Otieno, a permaculture farmer from Kenya. “Is this food security or food slavery?”

South African agroecology farmer Busisiwe Mgangxelareiterated that farmers practicing agroecology “do not feed the soil with chemicals, we feed it with organic matter and fertility from other companion plants.” As the letter details, input-intensive monoculture agriculture damages ecosystems, threatens local livelihoods, increases climate vulnerabilities and undermines smallholder farmers engaged in more sustainable methods of production.

Fletcher Harper, director of GreenFaith, an international network, was direct:

 “The plan of displacing millions of small holding farmers, using an industrial monoculture approach to farming, lacing the soil and water supplies with toxic chemicals and concentrating ownership of the means of production and land ownership in a small elite is an immoral and dangerous vision that must be stopped.”

AGRA in the crosshairs

Anne Maina, national coordinator of the Biodiversity and Biosafety Association of Kenya (BIBA), highlights the negative impacts and lack of accountability of AGRA. Launched in 2006 by the Gates Foundation in partnership the Rockefeller Foundation, AGRA set goals of doubling crop productivity and incomes for 30 million small-scale farming households while halving food insecurity in 20 focus countries by 2020. As IATP’s Timothy A. Wise documented in a report last year, the deadline has passed, and productivity has improved only marginally, poverty remains high and the number of “undernourished” people in AGRA’s 13 focus countries had increased 30 percent by 2018.

BIBA and other groups engaged with AGRA demanding evidence to counter these findings, but Maina says they received no substantive answers. Even AGRA’s own 2020 Annual Report offers little convincing evidence of success.

According to SAFCEI, another insidious aspect of the Gates Foundation’s efforts in Africa is the foundation’s attempt to influence and restructure seed laws. “80% of non-certified seeds come from millions of smallholder farmers who recycle and exchange seeds each year,” SAFCEI reports in its press statement at the event, “building an ‘open-source knowledge bank’ of seeds that cost little to nothing but have all the nutritional value needed to sustain these communities. In contrast, the approach supported by the Gates Foundation threatens to replace seed systems diversity and the agro-biodiversity system that is critical for human and ecosystem health and replace it with a privatized, corporate approach that will reduce food systems resilience.”

SAFCEI director de Gasparis is clear on the social and environmental stakes: “What African farmers need is support to find communal solutions that increase climate resilience, rather than top-down profit-driven industrial-scale farming systems. When it comes to the climate, African faith communities are urging the world to think twice before pushing a technical and corporate farming approach,” she says.

Summarizing the demands of African faith communities, Rev.Wellington Sibanda, intern resident minister in South Africa, says, “We can’t keep quiet as faith leaders. We call on the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation to shift its funding into agroecological farming.”


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Featured image is from Food Tank

First posted by Global Research on December 11, 2020. Of relevance to the issue pertaining to the validity of the PCR test as well as to the “identity of the virus”.

The widely-praised German model of the Angela Merkel regime to deal with the COVID-19 pandemic is now engulfed in a series of potentially devastating scandals going to the very heart of the testing and medical advice being used to declare draconian economic shutdowns and next, de facto mandatory vaccinations. The scandals involve a professor at the heart of Merkel’s corona advisory group. The implications go far beyond German borders to the very WHO itself and their global recommendations.

The entire case for WHO-mandated emergency lockdown of businesses, schools, churches and other social arenas worldwide is based on a test introduced, amazingly early on, in the Wuhan, China coronavirus saga.

On January 23, 2020, in the scientific journal Eurosurveillance, of the EU Center for Disease Prevention and Control, Dr. Christian Drosten, along with several colleagues from the Berlin Virology Institute at Charite Hospital, along with the head of a small Berlin biotech company, TIB Molbiol Syntheselabor GmbH, published a study claiming to have developed the first effective test for detecting whether someone is infected with the novel coronavirus identified first only days before in Wuhan. The Drosten article was titled, “Detection of 2019 novel coronavirus (2019-nCoV) by real-time RT-PCR” (Eurosurveillance 25(8) 2020).

The news was greeted with immediate endorsement by the corrupt Director General of WHO, Tedros Adhanom, the first non-medical doctor to head WHO. Since then the Drosten-backed test for the virus, called a real-time or RT-PCR test, has spread via WHO worldwide, as the most used test protocol to determine if a person might have COVID-19, the illness.

On November 27 a highly-respected group of 23 international virologists, microbiologists and related scientists published a call for Eurosurveillance to retract the January 23, 2020 Drosten article. Their careful analysis of the original piece is damningTheirs is a genuine “peer review.”

They accuse Drosten and cohorts of “fatal” scientific incompetence and flaws in promoting their test.

To begin with, as the critical scientists reveal, the paper that established the Drosten PCR test for the Wuhan strain of coronavirus that has subsequently been adopted with indecent haste by the Merkel government along with WHO for worldwide use–resulting in severe lockdowns globally and an economic and social catastrophe–was never peer-reviewed before its publication by Eurosurveillance journal. The critics point out that,

“the Corman-Drosten paper was submitted to Eurosurveillance on January 21st 2020 and accepted for publication on January 22nd 2020. On January 23rd 2020 the paper was online.”

Incredibly, the Drosten test protocol, which he had already sent to WHO in Geneva on 17 January, was officially recommended by WHO as the worldwide test to determine presence of Wuhan coronavirus, even before the paper had been published.

As the critical authors point out, for a subject so complex and important to world health and security, a serious 24-hour “peer review” from at least two experts in the field is not possible. The critics point out that Drosten and his co-author Dr. Chantal Reusken, did not disclose a glaring conflict of interest. Both were also members of the editorial board of Eurosurveillance. Further, as reported by BBC and Google Statistics, on January 21 there were a world total of 6 deaths being attributed to the Wuhan virus. They ask, “Why did the authors assume a challenge for public health laboratories while there was no substantial evidence at that time to indicate that the outbreak was more widespread than initially thought?” Another co-author of the Drosten paper that gave a cover of apparent scientific credibility to the Drosten PCR procedure was head of the company who developed the test being marketed today, with the blessing of WHO, in the hundreds of millions, Olfert Landt, of Tib-Molbiol in Berlin, but Landt did not disclose that pertinent fact in the Drosten paper either.

Certainly nothing suspicious or improper here, or? It would be relevant to know if Drosten, the Merkel chief scientific advisor for COVID-19, Germany’s de facto “Tony Fauci,” gets a percentage for each test sold by Tib-Molbiol in their global marketing agreement with Roche.

False Positives?

Since late January 2020, world mainstream media has inundated us all with frightening hourly updates on “the total number of coronavirus infected.” Usually they simply add each daily increase to a global total of “confirmed cases,” presently over 66 million. Alarming, but for the fact that, as Pieter Borger and his fellow scientific collaborators point out, “confirmed cases” is a nonsense number. Why?

The Borger report identifies what they call “ten fatal problems” in the Drosten paper of last January. Here we take up the most glaring that can easily be grasped by most laypeople.

Drosten & co. gave confusing unspecified primer and probe sequences. The critics note, “This high number of variants not only is unusual, but it also is highly confusing for laboratories. These six unspecified positions could easily result in the design of several different alternative primer sequences which do not relate to SARS-CoV-2… the confusing unspecific description in the Corman-Drosten paper is not suitable as a Standard Operational Protocol. These unspecified positions should have been designed unequivocally.” They add that

“RT-PCR is not recommended for primary diagnostics of infection. This is why the RT-PCR Test used in clinical routine for detection of COVID-19 is not indicated for COVID-19 diagnosis on a regulatory basis.”

Amplification Cycles

But even more damning for Drosten is the fact that he mentioned nowhere of a test being positive or negative, or indeed what defines a positive or negative result! The Borger report notes, “These types of virological diagnostic tests must be based on a SOP (Standard Operational Protocol), including a validated and fixed number of PCR cycles (Ct value) after which a sample is deemed positive or negative. The maximum reasonably reliable Ct value is 30 cycles. Above a Ct of 35 cycles, rapidly increasing numbers of false positives must be expected… scientific studies show that only non-infectious (dead) viruses are detected with Ct values of 35.” (emphasis added).

The WHO and Drosten recommend a Ct of 45 cycles and, reportedly, presently the German health officials do as well. Little wonder that as the number of tests is ramped up in the onset of winter flu season, PCR “positives” in Germany and elsewhere explode. As the critical authors point out, were the health authorities to specify 35 cycles maximum, the number of corona positive would be only less than 3% the present number! They note, “an analytical result with a Ct value of 45 is scientifically and diagnostically absolutely meaningless (a reasonable Ct-value should not exceed 30). All this should be communicated very clearly.

It is a significant mistake that the Corman-Drosten paper does not mention the maximum Ct value at which a sample can be unambiguously considered as a positive or a negative test-result. This important cycle threshold limit is also not specified in any follow-up submissions to date.” The authors add,

“The fact that these PCR products have not been validated at molecular level is another striking error of the protocol, making any test based upon it useless as a specific diagnostic tool to identify the SARS-CoV-2 virus.” (emphasis added).

In simple English, the entire edifice of the Gates foundation, the Merkel government, the WHO and WEF as well as the case for de facto forced untested vaccines, rests on results of a PCR test for coronavirus that is not worth a hill of beans. The test of Drosten and WHO is more or less, scientific crap.

Missing Doctor proof too?

This devastating critique from twenty three world leading scientists, including scientists who have patents related to PCR, DNA Isolation and Sequencing, and a former Pfizer Chief Scientist, is damning, but not the only problem Professor Dr. Christian Drosten faces today. He and the officials at Frankfurt’s Goethe University, where he claims to have received his medical doctorate in 2003, are being accused of degree fraud.

According to Dr. Markus Kühbacher, a specialist investigating scientific fraud such as dissertation plagiarism, Dr. Drosten’s doctor thesis, by law must be deposited on a certain date with academic authorities at his University, who then sign a legal form, Revisionsschein, verified with signature, stamp of the University and date, with thesis title and author, to be sent to the University archive. With it, three original copies of the thesis are filed.

Kühbacher charges that the Goethe University is guilty of cover-up by claiming, falsely, Drosten’s Revisionsschein, was on file. The University spokesman later was forced to admit it was not filed, at least not locatable by them. Moreover, of the three mandatory file copies of his doctor thesis, highly relevant given the global importance of Drosten’s coronavirus role, two copies have “disappeared,” and the remaining single copy is water-damaged. Kühbacher says Drosten will now likely face court charges for holding a fraudulent doctoral title.

Whether that is to pass, it is a fact that a separate legal process has been filed in Berlin against two people responsible for a German media site,, for slander and defamation, brought by a well-known and critical German medical doctor, Dr. Wolfgang Wodarg. The court case demands of the defendants €250,000 in damages for defamation of character and material damages to Wodarg by the accused in their online site, as well as in other German media, claiming they viciously and without proof, defamed Wodarg, calling him a “covid-denier,” falsely calling him a right-extremist (he is a life-long former parliament member of the Social Democratic Party) and numerous other false and damaging charges.

The attorney for Dr Wodarg is a well-known German-American attorney, Dr. Reiner Fuellmich. In his charges against the defendants, Fuellmich cites in full the charges against the Drosten test for coronavirus of Dr. Pieter Borger et al noted above. This is in effect forcing the defendants to refute the Borger paper. It is a major step on the way to refute the entire WHO COVID-19 PCR testing fraud. Already an appeals court in Lisbon, Portugal ruled on 11 November that the PCR test of Drosten and WHO was not valid to detect coronavirus infection and that it was no basis to order nationwide or partial lockdowns.

If the stakes were not so deadly for mankind it would all be material for a comedy of the absurd. The world health Czar, WHO chief Tedros is no medical doctor whose WHO is financed massively by a college dropout billionaire computer manager, Gates, who also advises the Merkel government on COVID-19 measures.

The Merkel government uses the Drosten PCR test and Drosten as an “all-wise” expert to impose the most draconian economic consequences outside wartime. Her Health Minister, Jens Spahn, is a former banker who has no medical degree, only a stint as a lobbyist for Big Pharma. The head of the German CDC, called the Robert Koch Institute, Lothar Wieler, is not a virologist but an animal doctor, Tierarzt. With this crew, Germans are seeing their lives destroyed by lockdowns and social measures never before imagined. There is science and then there is science. Not all “science” is valid however.


Note to readers: please click the share buttons above or below. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

F. William Engdahl is strategic risk consultant and lecturer, he holds a degree in politics from Princeton University and is a best-selling author on oil and geopolitics, exclusively for the online magazine “New Eastern Outlook” where this article was originally published. He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization.

Featured image: Germany’s leading microbiologist, Professor Christian Drosten, director of the bacteriological and epidemiological research center at Charité Hospital, Berlin. (Photo via New Eastern Outlook)


Seeds of Destruction: Hidden Agenda of Genetic Manipulation

Author Name: F. William Engdahl
ISBN Number: 978-0-937147-2-2
Year: 2007
Pages: 341 pages with complete index

List Price: $25.95

Special Price: $18.00


This skilfully researched book focuses on how a small socio-political American elite seeks to establish control over the very basis of human survival: the provision of our daily bread. “Control the food and you control the people.”

This is no ordinary book about the perils of GMO. Engdahl takes the reader inside the corridors of power, into the backrooms of the science labs, behind closed doors in the corporate boardrooms.

The author cogently reveals a diabolical world of profit-driven political intrigue, government corruption and coercion, where genetic manipulation and the patenting of life forms are used to gain worldwide control over food production. If the book often reads as a crime story, that should come as no surprise. For that is what it is.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


For years, employers have used surveillance to keep tabs on their employees on the job. Cameras have watched as workers moved cash in and out of registers, GPS has reported on the movements of employees driving company vehicles, and software has been monitoring people’s work email.

Now, with more work being done remotely, many of those same surveillance tools are entering people’s homes. A marketing company in Minnesota forced employees to install software that would record videos of employee’s screens and even cut their hours if they took a bathroom break that was too long. A New York e-commerce company told employees that they would have to install monitoring software on their personal computers that would log keystrokes and mouse movements—and they’d have to install an app on their phones that would track their movements throughout the workday.

The situation isn’t limited to the US, either. One multinational company appears to be testing the boundaries of what’s an acceptable level of surveillance for remote workers. Teleperformance, one of the world’s largest call center companies, is reportedly requiring some employees to consent to video monitoring in their homes. Employees in Colombia told NBC News that their new contract granted the company the right to use AI-powered cameras to observe and record their workspaces. The contract also requires employees to share biometric data like fingerprints and photos of themselves, and workers have to agree to share data and images that may include children under 18.

Teleperformance employs over 380,000 people in 83 countries to provide call center services for a range of companies, including Amazon, Apple, and Uber. A company spokesperson told NBC  that it is “constantly looking for ways to enhance the Teleperformance Colombia experience for both our employees and our customers, with privacy and respect as key factors in everything we do.”

Amazon and Apple said that they did not ask Teleperformance for this extra monitoring, and an Apple spokesperson said the company forbids video monitoring of employees by suppliers. A recent Apple audit reportedly found Teleperformance in compliance with this requirement.

But Uber apparently requested the ability to monitor some workers. Uber said it wouldn’t observe the entire workforce, but the company did not specify which employees would be subject to the new policies. The ride sharing company asked for the monitoring of Teleperformance’s remote employees because call center staff have access to customers credit cards and trip details, an Uber spokesperson told NBC News.

Like many remote workers in the US, Colombians have had to make do with the space they have available to them. In many cases, that’s meant putting their work equipment in otherwise private spaces like their bedrooms. “The contract allows constant monitoring of what we are doing, but also our family,” one worker told NBC. “I think it’s really bad. We don’t work in an office. I work in my bedroom. I don’t want to have a camera in my bedroom.”

Another Teleperformance worker said the only room quiet enough to take customer calls is her bedroom, and at night, during her shifts, it’s also where her husband sleeps. “It’s a violation of my privacy rights, and the rights of my husband and mother-in-law who live with me,” she said.

Boom time for surveillance

Many companies (though not all) were forced to implement remote work a year and a half ago when the pandemic began, and since then, interest in employee monitoring software has boomed. There’s concern that, when the pandemic ends, digital surveillance will follow employees back to the office.

The tools and policies vary in their degrees of invasiveness. Some monitor which apps or websites are open and active, while others log keystrokes or take screenshots to allow managers to snoop on their employees’ desktops. Some will keep tabs on general activity, posting a pop-up window if the person appears to be inactive for too long. If the user doesn’t dismiss it in time, it’ll pause their time clock, effectively docking their pay if their bathroom break stretches too long. Other employers skip specialized apps entirely and ask their employees to stay on video chat all day long.

Employees don’t have many options. They can organize to push back against snooping employers—which many of Teleperformance’s Colombian employees appear to be doing—but many countries, including the US, don’t have laws to prevent companies from surveilling their workers. While the Fourth Amendment in the US may protect against unreasonable search and seizure by the government, it doesn’t apply to private companies in these cases.

“There’s not a constitutional issue here,” Paul Stephens, director of policy and advocacy withPrivacy Rights Clearinghouse, told NPR last year. “There aren’t a whole lot of legal protections for employees who are being monitored.”


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Tim De Chant covers technology, policy, and energy at Ars. He has written for Wired, The Wire China, and NOVA Next, and he teaches science writing at MIT. De Chant received his PhD in environmental science from the UC-Berkeley.

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on Uber Asked Contractor to Allow Video Surveillance in Employee Homes, Bedrooms
  • Tags: ,

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


US Deputy Secretary of State Wendy Sherman‘s recent trip to Tianjin to meet with Chinese officials didn’t lead to a breakthrough in bilateral relations, though few seriously expected that it would. Any dialogue is better than no dialogue of course, but the talks didn’t result in anything tangible because the US lacks the will to respect China’s interests. Regrettably, CNN misportrayed their latest interaction in an article published on 30 July that was headlined “The US and China say they want to avoid military conflict, but no one can agree on how”.

Vice Foreign Minister Xie Feng said that his country presented its American counterparts with a List of U.S. Wrongdoings that Must Stop and a List of Key Individual Cases that China Has Concerns With. Some of the requests that were made include unilaterally lifting visa restrictions on members of the Communist Party of China (CPC) and their families as well as stopping the harassment of Chinese diplomatic and consular missions in the US, according to Xinhua. The US thus far hasn’t taken any steps to respect China’s interests.

Although CNN reported on those lists and the similar statements by both sides’ representatives about how their countries want peace, it misleadingly made it seem as though both sides are to blame for the terrible state of bilateral relations. The reality is that China shares no blame for what’s happening. The former Trump Administration declared an unprovoked trade war against China that rapidly escalated into what some observers nowadays describe as a New Cold War that continues under the Biden Administration.

Examples of the US’ acts of aggression against China include unilateral sanctions, meddling in its internal affairs (particularly in Hong Kong and Xinjiang), an intensified information warfare campaign, blaming China for the COVID-19 pandemic, provocative so-called “freedom of navigation” operations (FONOPs) through Beijing’s portion of the South China Sea, and encouraging the self-declared “authorities” of the rogue Chinese island of Taiwan to behave more antagonistically towards the mainland.

By contrast, China has simply responded to American sanctions, abstains from meddling in its counterpart’s internal affairs, strictly reports facts about the US instead of spewing propaganda, asks legitimate questions about the US’ irresponsibility in failing to contain the COVID-19 pandemic within its borders, doesn’t infringe on the US’ maritime sovereignty in areas under its legal control, and has no contact with anti-government groups like Black Lives Matter or Puerto Rican separatists for instance.

Any objective observer would therefore conclude that a Chinese-US military conflict could be avoided if only America has the will to respect China’s interests. The first obvious step entails ending its FONOPs in the South China Sea, encouragement of the self-declared Taiwanese “authorities’” antagonism towards Beijing, and other meddling operations in the mainland including information warfare. Upon that happening, substantive negotiations on resolving their economic disputes could then proceed amid an atmosphere of goodwill.

The reason why this has yet to happen is because some American elites profit from perpetuating the narrative of a New Cold War against China. These include its influential military-industrial-tech complex as well as political ideologues who hate China for its socialist system and resent the country’s rise that’s responsible for the emergence of a multipolar world order. Instead of learning to cooperate and coexist with China, they’d prefer to compete with it and provoke a dangerously divisive New Cold War from which they stand to profit.

CNN should have drawn attention to this but obviously chose not to because it plays a key role in carrying out the US’ information warfare campaign against China. In this context, it’s the misleading narrative that China shares some responsibility for the deterioration of relations with the US. It doesn’t, at all. CNN is just applying the psychological DARVO strategy of “Deny, Attack, and Reverse Victim & Offender” whereby it blames the blameless (China) in order to absolve the guilty (the US).

It’s about time that someone of influence in the US talks truth to power and calls CNN out for its manipulation. A military conflict between China and the US can still be avoided but only if the latter finally takes responsibility for pushing those two Great Powers towards that unthinkable scenario. China has been doing everything that it can to pragmatically cooperate and peacefully coexist with the US but the American side refuses to respond in kind. By clinging to its grand strategic goal of attempting to “contain” China, the US is destabilizing the world.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

This article was originally published on OneWorld.

Andrew Korybko is an American Moscow-based political analyst specializing in the relationship between the US strategy in Afro-Eurasia, China’s One Belt One Road global vision of New Silk Road connectivity, and Hybrid Warfare. He is a frequent contributor to Global Research.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Dr. Ryan Cole is the CEO and Medical Director of Cole Diagnostics, one of the largest independent labs in the State of Idaho. Dr. Cole is a Mayo Clinic trained Board Certified Pathologist.

He is Board Certified in anatomic and clinical pathology. He has expertise in immunology and virology and also has subspecialty expertise in skin pathology.

He has seen over 350,000 patients in his career. We featured a lecture he gave earlier this year back in April, where he discussed cures for COVID-19 symptoms, and warned about the dangers of the COVID “vaccines.” See: Medical Doctor and Director of Diagnostics Laboratory Presents Cures for COVID and Exposes Dangers of COVID “Vaccines”

Dr. Cole gave another presentation this past weekend in Texas, as part of a seminar with America’s Frontline Doctors.

Being a pathologist who runs his own private diagnostic laboratory, Dr. Cole is perhaps one of the most qualified physicians in America today to give an independent, honest evaluation of the current roll-out of the COVID-19 “vaccines,” and he didn’t pull any punches in his presentation, saying:

“We need to stop the insanity immediately. This is over. Game over. This is no longer good science. This is a poisonous attack on our population. And it needs to stop now!”

He lamented the fact that we are spending billions on advertising to get people to take these experimental shots, but nothing on the science to study their effects on the population.

Where’s the funding for science? We’re spending billions on advertising the “clot shots” to children.

When a new unapproved drug hits the market, we need to use the French legal system: guilty until proven innocent, and we are doing just the opposite right now.

He discussed how the “spike protein” is the toxin that is being injected into everyone, and that it crosses the blood-brain barrier.

Why in the world would we put a toxin into the human body that is going to disrupt the blood vessels in your brain, allow the spike in there, and cause inflammation?

This isn’t a vaccine. They keep lying to the public by calling this a vaccine. It’s an experiment on humanity.

These spike proteins cause damage in multiple organs, including the heart, which is what we are now seeing in children who are injured by the shots.

Once you have heart damage the heart does not heal itself. The heart is damaged forever.

We’re ruining kids’ hearts for life with these shots.

And what about long-term studies on issues such as fertility, cancer, etc.?

There are none. “We don’t know.”

He stated that he has seen a 10 to 20 fold increase in uterine cancer in the last 6 months since the shots came out.

Watch the entire presentation. This is from our Rumble channel, and it is on our Bitchute channel as well.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Featured image is a screenshot from the video

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on Dr. Cole on COVID Shots: “This Is a Poisonous Attack on Our Population and It Needs to Stop Now!”
  • Tags: ,

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


A 43-page landmark report entitled WORSE THAN THE DISEASE? REVIEWING SOME POSSIBLE UNINTENDED CONSEQUENCES OF THE mRNA VACCINES AGAINST COVID-19 has been published in the International Journal of Vaccine Theory, Practice & Research.  Its chief author, an MIT scientist, is Stephanie Seneff.

Using contrived infection and mortality data and a complicit fear-mongering news media, an emergency use permit was issued to immunize human populations worldwide on a life-and-death basis, waive the requirement for informed consent, and embarked on the world’s first genetically modified RNA (nucleotide) immunization of the general population.  An estimated 40 trillion RNA particles, stabilized and protected by polyethylene glycol (PEG) which also serves as an immune stimulant, are injected.

Health authorities are acting like the RNA vaccines are already proven safe and effective when we don’t have legitimate short-term or long-term data.  The virus itself was not properly isolated, so tests to confirm the virus are specious.  The virus has produced unique morbid symptoms apart from any other coronavirus, namely nerve and cardiovascular damage, which strongly suggests it is a lab-created pathogen.

The Seneff report gets ahead of the mass vaccination program now underway and theorizes what kind of problems may lie ahead.

Some of the problems that Dr. Seneff noted in the report were spike protein shedding, transmission of the spike protein from a vaccinated to an unvaccinated person, and finally the debate over whether or not RNA vaccines could reverse into DNA to be transmitted to future generations. The latter problem would be of great concern because it means there would be trans generational transmission.

Rush To Success

The report noted that it takes about 12.5 years to develop and bring a vaccine to market. Most vaccines only have a 5% chance of making it through Phase II trials and in the end a vaccine has a 2% probability of success.  The conjured-up pandemic caused health authorities to throw away the safeguards.  The world is now creating safety data as it attempts to vaccinate the entire human population on earth.  It has a far worse safety profile than any prior vaccine.  But health agencies and pharma companies have too much invested to let it fail.

Were placebo vaccines used to persuade they are safe?

There has been discussion that some of the RNA vaccines have been duds, placebos that wouldn’t cause side effects, to make it falsely appear they are safe. It is interesting to learn from the Seneff report that these RNA vaccines require storage as low as -94º Degrees Fahrenheit (-70º Celsius). It could be that many of the RNA vaccines have not been stored properly and the RNA in the vaccine degraded. It is not inconceivable that these vaccines were degraded during transport around the globe, which would skew the side effect ratio.

More to come

This Covid-19 RNA vaccine is only the first of many that vaccine companies intend to introduce. The idea of permanently immunizing billions of people via genetics, to create immunity with a vaccine that is so cheap and easy to produce, is a vaccine manufacturer’s dream.

The startling incongruity is that this is not the current experience. New boosters are being needed for each and every strain of Coronavirus, suggesting these RNA vaccines only provide a very narrow window of protection. This would be a bonanza for drug companies. Boosters on top of boosters.

There is no integrity left in the vaccine business, if it existed at all prior to this unprecedented mother of all pandemics.  Just explain how the flu vanished while COVID-19 allegedly filled all the hospital beds?  Weren’t cases of the flu just re-categorized as Covid-19 in a massive sleight of hand?

Read the full article here.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Bill Sardi, writing from La Verne, California.

Featured image is from Health Impact News

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Several new technologies that appear separate and unrelated will soon converge, creating a giant digital trap that will easily entice the uninformed masses.

The digital trap has already been set and globalist elites are using COVID to speed up the process of convergence. Most people will sleep-walk right into the trap, which will ultimately reduce them to a human QR code – trackable, traceable, and 100 percent dependent on Big Tech and big government for their existence.

I’m going to unpack each of these seemingly separate threads that will be gradually merged into a single overarching socio-financial control grid.

The most imminent agenda item needed to jumpstart this system is a successful launch of digital health passports.

France, Italy, Ireland, Germany, Greece and many other nations have started mandating these passports on their citizens, many of whom are flooding into the streets to protest.

The movement toward digital health passports in the U.S. is happening more gradually but it’s picking up steam.

In a briefing Monday, Aug. 2, Biden’s Coronavirus Response Coordinator Jeffrey Zients announced “it’s time to impose some requirements” where COVID vaccines are concerned.

When asked for clarification on exactly what COVID rules might be implemented, White House Press Secretary Jen Psaki said nothing is off the table.

Remember that phrase: Nothing is off the table.

This could involve rounding up the unvaccinated and placing them in isolation and quarantine camps.

An academic consortium consisting of six universities already has a contract with the U.S. Department of Homeland Security to provide training for government, law enforcement, healthcare and private-sector stakeholders on how to quarantine “large portions” of rural communities.

But the drive to digitize the lives of Americans will start in the cities and move outward.

New York Mayor Bill de Blasio became the first politician to jump at the opportunity to demand vaccine passports.

Despite what anyone tries to tell you, separating Americans by vaccine status is a historic first. It has never before been tried, not through the polio or smallpox outbreaks of the 1920s, 30s and 40s, not during the Spanish Flu. Not ever.

De Blasio ordered businesses to deny service to the unvaccinated, which accounts for 30 percent of the city’s population. It remains to be seen how de Blasio will enforce this edict. Will he call out the police to shut down businesses not demanding a show of papers from their customers?

New York Gov. Andrew Cuomo is also shooting for vaccine passport mandates statewide but knows he has to be a little more diplomatic in his approach.

“Private businesses, I am asking them and suggesting to them, go to vaccine-only admission. Go to vaccine-only admission,” Cuomo said in an Aug. 2 press conference.

“I believe it’s in your own business interest,” he said, “to run a vaccine-only establishment…. We have apps, just say, ‘you have to show that you were vaccinated when you walk in the door.’”

In other words, “Show your papers.”


Think about what Cuomo is saying here.

He is very forcefully “asking” business owners to eliminate 30 percent the state’s population from their field of potential customers and treat them as non-persons.

This is pure fascism and reminds one of the Nazi propaganda that coerced Germans to refuse to do business with Jews.

If New York’s business owners listened to Cuomo, they would make it impossible for non-vaxxed people to feed their children.

Learn your medical rights as an employee, student, etc., and how to ‘say no to the needle’ at Peggy Hall’s

The digital passports require people to download a scannable QR code on their cellphone that will allow businesses to know they’ve been vaxxed before they are allowed to enter and receive service [buy or sell].

That leads us to the second leg of the digital trap that is baking in the technological oven – a new global digital ID system that is capable of working in conjunction with the digital health passports and the new medical-vaccination complex.

The leader in this stream of tech is the ID2020 Alliance, a collaborative of more than 35 members including Accenture, Microsoft, the Rockefeller Foundation, MasterCard, IBM, the International Chamber of Commerce, MIT SafePaths and Bill Gates’ GAVI Global Vaccines Alliance.

In February 2021, ID2020 launched the Good Health Pass Collaborative to encourage a seamless convergence of all the COVID-19 vaccine credentialing apps being developed by many different organizations.

“Paper vaccine certificates can be easily forged,” the ID2020 Alliance warns in a press release. “The purpose of health credentials is to securely prove that a person has received a vaccine or PCR test. The new alliance is particularly targeting travel to ensure credentials work cross-border, cross-industry and are frictionless.”

The alliance has published a white paper on the topic for those seeking more details.

Yet another piece to the evolving techno-fascist puzzle is the new digital currency.

The world’s central banks are working on a programmable digital currency based on block chain technology. This means they will be able to track your spending and shut you off for any reason.

The International Monetary Fund posted an article on its website in July lauding India as a global leader in the drive to eliminate cash. And of course COVID was mentioned as expediting the move away from paper money. The IMF noted:

“COVID-19 has accelerated the use of contactless digital payments for small transactions as people try to protect themselves from the virus. These advances build on the India Stack—a comprehensive digital identity, payment, and data-management system that we write about in a new paper (Carrière-Swallow, Haksar, and Patnam 2021).”

As you can see in the above statement, the goal is a comprehensive digital identity, combining one’s health data and vaccine status with banking and other personally identifiable data.

Klaus Schwab warned us ahead of time about the trap he and his elitist buddies were setting for us.

“The Fourth Industrial Revolution will lead to a fusion of our physical, biological and digital identities,” Schwab told the Chicago Council on Global Affairs in November 2020.

Even before that, in his 2018 book, Shaping the Future of The Fourth Industrial Revolution, Schwab wrote:

“Fourth Industrial Revolution technologies will not stop at becoming part of the physical world around us—they will become part of us.

“Indeed, some of us already feel that our smartphones have become an extension of ourselves. Today’s external devices—from wearable computers to virtual reality headsets—will almost certainly become implantable in our bodies and brains.”

When he penned these grandiose ideas in 2018, it seemed like the pie in the sky musings of an out of touch futurist and few paid attention. Post COVID, it’s in our faces and ready to be implemented.

The final leg of the technological program to control humanity is the Big Tech giants working together to scrub all dissident voices from the Internet. Their ultimate goal is to create a system where all users have an Internet passport, subject to periodic review of your online activity.

The Big Tech giants have already said they actively share information in an effort to crack down on “white supremacists” under the Global Internet Forum to Counter Terrorism, a body previously reserved for targeting the Taliban and al-Qaeda.

PayPal announced it will be working with the notoriously Marxist Anti-Defamation League to scour the Internet, looking for “extremists” and “anti-government” voices in order to shut off their PayPal donation buttons.

Under this Chinese-style social scoring system, those guilty of online infractions get publicly shamed and silenced. Information collectors are paid to snitch on their neighbors and family members. Once your social credit score dips below a certain level, you become so discredited that it gets tougher and tougher to find a job, travel by plane, train, bus or car, get loans or put your kids in the better schools.

Those providing counter-narrative information will be flagged, given a warning, and eventually blocked as disseminators of “disinformation.”

You lose your freedom of speech, but that’s not all.

In today’s society, being removed from the Internet means you won’t be able to buy or sell online or work a job that requires an internet connection.

So the health passports, currently being rolled out worldwide, will block you from in-person shopping for food and necessities while the coming Internet passport will block you from ordering your necessities online. You will essentially be left with the black market, assuming one will spring up for those deemed “unclean” and “unfit” for the modern world because of their dissident views.

All of these technologies will merge at the intersection of Big Data, big banks, Big Tech and big government. Your social credit score will now be tied in not only to your Internet activity but to your bank account and your vaccine status. Welcome to the Great Reset, a/k/a New World Order.

Add in advances in AI and facial recognition and millions of surveillance cameras and you are talking about a lockdown slave state that makes George Orwell’s 1984 look like a picnic in the park.

But don’t complain. It’s all “for our safety.”

People cannot be trusted to do the right thing, to believe the true facts, to lead the kind of life that results in a peaceful, happy society. All must conform to the new masters.

Now is the time to fight this system. But in order to fight it, you must recognize its existence and stay one step ahead of the cabal’s evil game plan.

At some point the trap door will shut. It will be too late to opt out. You either comply or become a non-person. An enemy of the state.

These separate avenues of evolving technology will eventually be merged to create a society in which everything, and every person, is digitally tracked. Not just the movement of their physical bodies, but their actions, behaviors, even their thoughts.

The elites are counting on us accepting this system in its early, fragmented stages. Most people think compartmentally. They don’t connect dots. They will be deceived.

The elites are not going to tell you upfront what all is involved in the Fourth Industrial Revolution. They’re just going to tell you the parts that sound good – convenience, inclusion, safety, security.

Watch the creepy 42-second video put out by the government of Australia urging people to create a digital identity.

Once this trap door is shut, it will be very difficult to get out of its clutches. Don’t download apps, pay with cash whenever possible, and stop sleep walking into the New World Order.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Featured image is from

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Many individuals worldwide have completed their Wuhan coronavirus (COVID-19) vaccination schedule. They have touted their “fully vaccinated” status after getting two doses of COVID-19 vaccines, with some joining the category after getting single-dose vaccines.

However, a professor said that COVID-19 vaccines may not be enough to provide immunity – and recommended as many as five vaccine doses.

Biomedical analyst Matti Sallberg of the Swedish Karolinska Institute (KI) said individuals inoculated with just two COVID-19 vaccine doses may not have enough protection. He suggested that “recurring shots” will be necessary to maintain immunity against SARS-CoV-2.

“We don’t know how long the vaccine protects against serious illness and death. This means that you pick the safe before the unsafe,” Sallberg said.

Sallberg continued:

“After receiving the second dose, the immune response slowly subsides. Within a year, many may have lost their protection. We do not know yet, but if you get a third dose, it will be activated again.”

He added:

“Biology says that a fading immune response is not unlikely. Then it’s time to for a third, fourth [or] maybe fifth dose.”

Sallberg’s comments came as numerous European countries announced a third round of COVID-19 booster shots in September 2021. The U.S. Food and Drug Administration also indicated that vaccinated Americans will receive booster shots in the fall.

However, the professor’s comments in support of booster shots appeared to have an ulterior motive. Alongside his stint at KI, Sallberg also held executive positions at vaccine manufacturer Svenska Vaccin Fabriken (SVF). The company’s website named him as SVF founder, chairman of the board and chief scientific officer.

An Israeli doctor seemingly echoed Sallberg’s comments regarding vaccine effectiveness. Speaking to Channel 13 News, Dr. Kobi Haviv warned that the effectiveness of the vaccines are waning. He added that 95 percent of hospitalized Israelis with the most severe symptoms are vaccinated.

Haviv also pointed out that 85 to 90 percent of Israelis hospitalized due to COVID-19 were vaccinated.

“I understand that most of the patients are vaccinated, even ‘severe’ patients,” he told the news channel.

According to Haviv, the breakthrough infections set up a scenario where booster shots would become necessary.

No Evidence To Require Booster Shots At This Time

Despite Sallberg’s insistence on booster doses, many scientists have questioned their need as there is still not enough data calling to justify them. Back in June 2021, scientists from the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention said the general population may not need COVID-19 booster doses for the time being.

The scientists however noted that booster doses may be needed when vaccine-induced immunity dwindles or a new variant negatively affects vaccine effectiveness. They also recommended booster shots for more vulnerable groups such as the elderly and organ transplant recipients.

CDC medical epidemiologist Dr. Sarah Oliver said the agency should monitor residents of long-term care facilities, the elderly, health care workers and people with a weakened immune system. She pointed out these groups as the ones who may need booster shots.

Dr. Sharon Frey, a member of the CDC’s Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP), also remarked that booster shots may not be needed as of this time. However, she agreed that a third booster dose should be given to organ transplant patients.

Frey continued:

“[If] we start to see an uptick in reinfection in people, or new infections in people who have been vaccinated – that’s our clue that we need to move quickly.”

Dr. Grace Lee, the chairwoman of the ACIP’s safety group, mentioned that more evidence of breakthrough cases is needed before COVID-19 booster shots are recommended for the general population.

“I would want greater clarity on the safety data if we’re talking about boosting before it’s clear what the risk data will look like. If we’re seeing severe breakthrough cases, then I think the decision-making moves forward even if there’s uncertainty with the safety data,” she said.

Back in May 2021, Former CDC Director Dr. Tom Frieden insisted that annual inoculations with COVID-19 vaccine booster doses were unnecessary.

“There is zero – and I mean zero – evidence to suggest that that is the case,” he said.

Frieden continued:

“It’s completely inappropriate to say that we’re likely to need an annual booster, because we have no idea what the likelihood of that is.”


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Featured image: Biomedical analyst Matti Sallberg / Image: Carolina Byrmo

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on Never-Ending Tyranny: Unless You Take Five Vaccine Doses You’ll No Longer Qualify as ‘Fully Vaccinated’, According to Swedish Professor
  • Tags: , ,

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


This report in the respected Israeli daily Haaretz is astonishing. It turns out that Israel’s 90-member delegation to the Tokyo Olympics did not include a single Palestinian citizen of Israel — even though they constitute one-fifth of the country’s population within the 1967 borders. 

Let’s pause for a moment, and let this sink in. Black Americans make up about 12 percent of the U.S. population. But even in the terrible days of U.S. segregation, African-American athletes had at least been stars on our national teams. Runner Jesse Owens won 4 gold medals at the 1936 Berlin Olympics, angering Adolf Hitler. (Another black medal winner that year, Ralph Metcalfe, went on to a distinguished political career in Chicago.) In the 1960 Rome Olympiad, Wilma Rudolph won the 100-meter, the 200-meter, and anchored the gold medal-winning 4×100 meter relay. A brash young boxer named Cassius Clay won gold in the light heavyweight division that same year, before turning pro and becoming better known as Muhammad Ali.

In the Haaretz article, reporter Jack Khoury, himself a Palestinian citizen of Israel, said he is not arguing “for the inclusion of Arabs just because they are Arabs.” But he goes on to explain:

No Arab community has the infrastructure for any sport that could provide local athletes the basis they need to progress to an international level. If an Arab athlete wishes to reach this standard, he or she must move to a Jewish community and depend on their family’s financial support, since there is no sponsor or organization that would support them. Many talented athletes in Arab communities have given up their dreams due to the costs involved.

Khoury says there is another problem: Palestinian citizens of Israel “are not migrants, but their loyalty and citizenship are often viewed with suspicion. This is why an Arab athlete can sometimes excel on a soccer team, but the Olympics, the Mount Olympus of sports, is closed to them.”

Khoury raises an even more delicate point:

It is also worth remembering that if an Arab citizen were to join the [Olympic] delegation and win a medal, they would have to decide whether they could receive it against the backdrop of a flag and anthem that represents only the majority of this country, rather than all its citizens.

“Sports Apartheid” is the correct term for preventing 20 percent of your fellow citizens from competing internationally. What’s also amazing is that until now, no one in the U.S. mainstream press has even bothered to report on this injustice. Finally, Roger Cohen at the New York Times did recently start describing the discrimination that Palestinian citizens of Israel experience, but he and his colleagues have plenty more reporting to do.

Jack Khoury ends his article: “Arab citizens are only watching the Games on television, and will apparently continue to do so for many more years.”


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

James North is a Mondoweiss Editor-at-Large, and has reported from Africa, Latin America, and Asia for four decades. He lives in New York City.

Featured image: Israel Rhythmic gymnastics at the 2012 Summer Olympics (CC 2.0)

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on Sports Apartheid: Israel’s Olympic Team Did Not Include a Single Palestinian Citizen of Israel
  • Tags: ,

Biden Admin Offers Hand of Friendship to Bolsonaro

August 10th, 2021 by Nathalia Urban

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


US President Joe Biden’s National Security Advisor Jake Sullivan visited Brazil on Thursday and gave a positive start of an agenda between the United States and Brazil, although in the past many believed in there must exist an animosity between Bolsonaro and Biden, because of the Bolsonaro clan’s explicit support  for Donald Trump.

Regardless, the Americans arrived with good will toward Bolsonaro, and at the same time red flags have being raised due to their plans for several Latin American countries.

Useful idiots

A prominent theme at the lunch hosted by Chancellor Carlos França was the political situation in Latin America and the Caribbean.  The representatives of both countries spoke not only about Cuba, Venezuela and Nicaragua, but about each of the region’s neighbors and defended “the need to preserve and protect democracy in the hemisphere”. The current situation in the region was also discussed in a morning meeting with General Augusto Heleno and Defense Minister Braga Netto. It is the second time in a month that a top US government official has approached the Bolsonaro government to show concern for anti-imperialist popular movements in Latin America, during a visit by CIA Director William J. Burns in July, Bolsonaro himself admitted that this topic had been discussed.

After an increase in US aggression toward Latin America, it is not surprising that the Biden government seeks an alliance with Bolsonaro, who has already been implicated in the 2019 coup in Bolivia, the aggression against demonstrators in Chile and several gratuitous aggressions against the Argentine president Alberto Fernandez and the Venezuelan government.

In addition to regional interference, Biden’s envoy came to Brazil to try to undermine China’s advance in the telecommunications sector.

The US wants China to stay out of the 5G auction, which will take place later this year. The mission headed by Sullivan discussed the matter with Brazilian authorities, including ministers Fábio Faria, from Communications, and General Augusto Heleno, from the Institutional Security Office.

The US has been campaigning worldwide against the use of Chinese equipment. However, the Brazilian telecommunications sector is said to be against the barring of Chinese companies.

Sullivan’s delegation doubled down on a Trump-era pledge to make Brazil a NATO ‘global partner’ member, on condition that it rejects Chinese Huawei and adopts the US model for its 5G network.

Delicate moment

Among the topics discussed, however, despite not having been predominant at the meeting, was the concern of the Americans with the tension between the Executive and the Judiciary powers, as a result of Bolsonaro’s attacks on the electronic ballot box, on the Superior Electoral Court (TSE) and members of the Federal Supreme Court (STF).

The US delegation sees a similarity between Bolsonaro’s campaign and that carried out by former US President Donald Trump, who was defeated in 2020 by Biden and encouraged a campaign to denounce an alleged electoral fraud, leading to the invasion, in January of this year, of the US Capitol.

Despite this, they reiterated the US support for the Brazilian candidacy to the OECD and signalled a partnership on the environment not only with the federal government, but also with state governors.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Featured image: Brazil’s far-right president Jair Bolsonaro greets US National Security Advisor Jake Sullivan (Source: Brasil Wire)

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


The adverse effects, that is, the illnesses and deaths associated with the Covid vaccines, are showing up in large numbers before the Big Pharma medical establishment can vaccinate everyone.  Consequently, the medical establishment and the compliant presstitutes are ramping up the fear and pushing ahead faster to achieve their agendas before the dire consequences of the vaccine escape suppression.

Yesterday the Pentagon announced that Covid vaccination is mandatory for all active-duty military. See this.

The White House Idiot says he fully agrees: “Being vaccinated will enable our service members to stay healthy, to better protect their families, and to ensure that our force is ready to operate anywhere in the world.” As the vaccine presents as most toxic to the young, we will have a force of sick and dying soldiers who can operate nowhere.

Biden’s statement and the Pentagon’s policy make no sense whatsoever. Evidence is pouring in from around the world that the so-called “delta variant” is most prevalent among the fully vaccinated. Public health authorities are saying that the fully vaccinated must protect themselves by wearing masks!  What then is the point of mandatory vaccination of the armed services and anyone else as the vaccine does not protect but does cause death and serious adverse effects?! How can it be that the American “superpower” has a president and Secretary of Defense too stupid to put two and two together?

Everywhere vaccine-indoctrinated medical personnel and politicians are calling for the return of mask-wearing whether you are vaccinated or not. NBC News like the rest of the presstitutes is ramping up the fear. Susan Hassig at Tulane University’s School of Public Health says: “I think it’s critical to be masking indoors no matter where you live.”  The Democrat governor of Louisiana announced an indoor mask mandate through at least Sept. 1 for anyone 5 and older who enter places like schools, businesses and churches, no matter their vaccination status. See this. 

Fear! Fear! The hospitals are said to be full of vaccinated delta variants, and we are urged to get vaccinated in order to be safe!  

As many experts have pointed out, there is no delta variant.  The so-called “breakthrough” cases are illnesses caused by the vaccine itself.

More fear! More fear!  “As the super-transmissible Delta variant marches across the US, more mutant versions are developing.”  In addition to Delta we now also have AY.1 or “Delta-plus.” sets out the propaganda: see this. 

Note the point one.  Soon AY.2, AY.3, AY.4 will be announced.  More vaccines, more booster shots. As vaccine deaths and injuries mount, more invented “variants” will be blamed.  With this game plan in operation you can see why the price of vaccine stocks have shot up. The share prices reflect the expected profits from endless vaccination.

As we are learning, there are more agendas associated with Covid than profit.  The institutionalization of tyranny is another associated agenda.  The CDC has come up with a plan to shield “high-risk” people by moving them into “green zone” camps where “they would have minimal contact with family members.”  Who is designated “high-risk”?  The front people for the internment camp plan are the elderly with co-morbidities.  But the vaccination propaganda defines “high-risk individuals” as the unvaccinated.  The camps will be for the unvaccinated. You will be able to stay out of the camps by getting vaccinated.  No, this is not a “conspiracy theory.”Here is the CDC document on the CDC’s own website. 

Why the desperate push for universal vaccination when the evidence is clear, and the CDC even admits, that vaccination does not protect against the delta variant, and more unprotected “variants” are on the way.  The desperation to jab everyone with a “vaccine” that does not protect but does kill and bring health injuries implies a darker agenda.  The evidence is now clear that the “vaccine” impairs human fertility.  Watch the video below for example.

Covid’s victims are limited to a small number of people with co-morbidities and weak immune systems who are denied treatment by known cures such as HCQ and Ivermectin.  These deaths were needed and desired in order to generate fear that would stampede people into accepting an unapproved, untested experimental technology never before used, the consequences of which were unknown.  We now know that the consequences include death and permanent health impairment; yet the rush to vaccinate marches forward.

Clearly, the agenda operating is not public health.  The Covid virus funded by Fauci in Wuhan has brought tyranny to America, and the “vaccine” is bringing death and impaired health to millions of people.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Dr. Paul Craig Roberts writes on his blog site, PCR Institute for Political Economy, where this article was originally published. He is a frequent contributor to Global Research.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


In recent decades, the World Health Organisation (WHO) has achieved almost sacred status as a bastion of internationalist action and development. However, as we outline in our new report – The WHO and Covid-19: Re-establishing Colonialism in Public Health – this reputation is now dead in the water. Over the past two decades, the WHO has recreated structures of what can only be described as ‘colonial control’. Now the health priorities of populations at highest need are overridden by the interests of those who now control much of WHO’s agenda: wealthy countries, corporations and high net-worth individuals.

The formation of WHO after World War II reflected the aspirations of its time. As the world faced the stark evidence of the products of medical fascism from the concentration camps, colonial empires were dissolving into newly independent nation-states. The WHO would be owned by the people of the world – funded by countries according to their capacity and guided by a World Health Assembly consisting of the member states – one country, one vote. Meanwhile, the Nuremberg Code and Helsinki Declaration cemented the requirement for fully informed consent prior to medical procedures and experimental treatments. This would ensure that the excesses of coerced healthcare from the Nazi era would never be repeated.

WHO’s charter emphasised the importance of individual autonomy as “informed opinion and active co-operation on the part of the public…”, and the broad definition of health as “a state of complete physical, mental and social well-being and not merely the absence of disease or infirmity”.

WHO’s founding charter established that it would be for all, but concentrate especially on the major health burdens of the most disadvantaged, low-income populations and protect them from medical exploitation. To enable the growing populations of newly independent and low-income countries to achieve at least basic health parity with their former colonial masters, a new approach was needed.

The key determinants of health – good nutrition, freedom from poverty and good health service access – required an emphasis on community-level care. The Alma Ata Declaration in 1978 saw this emphasis on primary care become front and centre of global public health, and of WHO’s agenda. This grass-roots health policy – local autonomy, community health workers and ‘horizontal’ programmes – remained the aim of health strategies in low-income countries to the end of 2019.

Meanwhile, however, fundamental changes were taking place within and around WHO. From around the year 2000, large private foundations became major funders of WHO, providing ‘specified’ funding for uses of interest to the donor. Rich countries also moved to determine WHO policy through directed funding. New global health institutions were set up in parallel; one, CEPI (the Coalition for Epidemic Preparedness Innovations) focussed on mass vaccination for epidemics that scare but impart a fraction of the long-term disease burden of endemic diseases, such as malaria, tuberculosis and HIV/AIDS.

How did WHO give up on its own ideals? 

WHO found itself transformed from a country-based and population-based institution to one dependent on the (however well-intentioned) interests of the wealthy and their corporate interests.

When the Swine Flu H1N1 pandemic occurred in 2009, the Council of Europe parliamentary committee already condemned the role of WHO in the panic buying of unnecessary vaccines and pointed to the influence of pharmaceutical funding in shaping this approach. Yet nothing was done to shift away from the influence of this stream of funding. The consequences of this increasing corporatisation of decision-making are stark in the response to Covid-19.

As we outline in our report, in December 2019, WHO published new research into dealing with pandemics (non-pharmaceutical interventions, or NPIs). In that report, specific mention was made of how different socioeconomic conditions needed to be borne in mind when addressing new infectious disease outbreaks. Indeed, the 2019 report authors note strong ethical considerations where there are large populations of migrant workers, such as in India. Local conditions are recognised to vary and to be important in influencing NPI measures.

Just two months later, however, WHO issued a new report following a one-week mission to Wuhan, following the outbreak of SARS-CoV-2. This February 24, 2020 report was co-authored by Dr. Wannang Liang of the People’s Republic of China and Dr. Bruce Aylward of WHO. It recommended the wholesale implementation of China’s completely new and aggressive virus suppression policy of lockdowns, in all countries regardless of circumstance – and regardless of the fact that the December 2019 report had made no mention of lockdowns at all.

The bottom-up approach enshrined in WHO’s charter, and the source of previous pandemic control measures, was abandoned for a one-size-fits-all policy that was certain to destroy the lives and livelihoods of the world’s poorest people. Meanwhile the repurposing of off-patent low-cost drugs – previously a priority for low-income countries – received scant attention, and was even suppressed.

Since then corporate agendas have become central to WHO’s positioning on COVID-19. The WHO has abandoned cheap potential treatments for COVID-19 in favour of much more costly vaccines. In this regard, many readers of The Wire will remember the recent controversy where the WHO’s chief scientist, Soumya Swaminathan, tweeted to advise Indian nationals not to take ivermectin – and circulated advertising material from pharmaceutical giant Merck to back up the advice. The following month Merck received a $1.2 billion contract from the US government to supply its own alternative treatment, molnupiravir, for COVID-19 – showing a clear conflict of interest which led to a legal notice being served against Swaminathan by the Indian Bar Association.

WHO has thus fallen from the high ideals on which it was formed. It has now focussed on imposing the interests of corporations on the people who held it in trust. Abandoning its principles and its own guidelines, during the past 18 months, it has focussed on a single global response to a disease that extracts a very different toll in different countries according to wealth and age profile – countries where socioeconomic variables require a varied response.

To save itself, WHO will have to forgo the easy path of private funding and appeasing the rich. It will have to return to democracy, to advocacy for the mass populations it was designed to serve – and this will require a significant increase from member states in terms of core contributions. For a well-paid group of people concentrated in a comfortable central European country, that is going to take deep thought and a real strength of character.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

David Bell is a clinical and public health physician with a PhD in population health and background in internal medicine, modelling and epidemiology of infectious disease. He was Director of the Global Health Technologies at Intellectual Ventures Global Good Fund in the USA, Program Head for Malaria and Acute Febrile Disease at FIND in Geneva, and coordinated malaria diagnostics strategy with the WHO.

Toby Green is a professor of African History at King’s College, London. His 2019 book A Fistful of Shells won a number of international literary awards. He is the author of The Covid Consensus: The New Politics of Global Inequality (Hurst & Co/OUP).

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Since 1988, I’ve been pointing out that relabeling and repackaging disease is standard operating procedure in the field of “pandemic medicine.”

And now we have this, from FOX News (7/25/21): “But while cases of COVID-19 soared nationwide, hospitalizations and deaths caused by influenza dropped.”

“According to data released by the CDC earlier this month, influenza mortality rates were significantly lower throughout 2020 than previous years.”

“There were 646 deaths relating to the flu among adults reported in 2020, whereas in 2019 the CDC estimated that between 24,000 and 62,000 people died from influenza-related illnesses.”

You might want to read those numbers again. The drop in flu deaths was miraculous. Perhaps the Vatican has a clue.

Rochester Regional Health has issued a flu report covering the same time periods:

“As of the most recent updates from the CDC, the 2021 flu season impacted a much lower number of people than usual in all major regions of the United States.”

“Here are a few numbers to sum up the 2020/2021 flu season, running from October 1, 2020 to April 1, 2021…646 deaths were attributed to the flu.”

“The final data on [the prior] flu season 2019/2020 was released by the CDC in April as COVID-19 continued to spread throughout the United States. Between October 1, 2019 and April 4, 2020, the flu resulted in: 24,000 to 62,000 deaths.”

“Hey Bob, could you do me a favor? I need a whole lot of COVID death numbers. Can you shove some of your flu-death numbers over here?”

“Sure. No problem, Bill. We work for the same agency. We’re all in this together. But if I give you thousands of flu-death numbers, I want something back. A piece of your COVID research funding. Our flu money these days would barely bankroll a junket for a dozen of us to the Bahamas.”

“My poor cousin. Transferring research funds is tricky. Too many eyeballs involved. Tell you what. How about a steak and lobster dinner, two nights at a local hotel, and one of the hookers who sits at the bar?”

“Three nights, all expenses paid.”


Here are two previous articles I’ve written on the disease- relabeling/repackaging shell game:

—The disease switcheroo; they don’t teach this in medical school—

I’ve mentioned this shell game hundreds of times in articles and lectures over the years. Here I want to boil it down to a protocol that has earned the medical cartel trillions of dollars.

We begin the story with an “outbreak.” Somewhere on Earth, we are told there is a cluster of unusual cases of illness.

The key word is “unusual.” Otherwise, who would care? People would instead say, “Forty people in Wuhan have lung congestion.” And that would spark no interest.

In Wuhan, it was “unusual pneumonia.” How so? No convincing answer. Some people have cited a “ground glass” appearance in pictures of patients’ lungs. Meaning gray areas, or opacity. Another claim: patients had extreme shortness of breath.

But opacity and shortness of breath were mentioned and described in medical literature long before COVID.

Something else must be offered, to justify the term “unusual cases.” And we get it almost immediately, while we’re still trying to figure out what makes these patients’ illness new and different:

It’s a virus. A never-before-seen virus.

Already a switcheroo is in progress. There is actually nothing unusual in the Wuhan cluster of cases. And just as we’re about to realize that, we’re hit with “new virus.” And then we forget there was no reason to look for a new virus in the first place.

Deadly air pollution has been hanging over Wuhan for a long time. It explains all sorts of lung infections, including pneumonia, a cardinal COVID symptom. And by the way, roughly 300,000 people in China die every year from pneumonia.

The “new virus” is trumpeted. But of course, as I’ve demonstrated many times, it hasn’t actually been found. No one isolated it. The so-called genetic sequencing of it was a fictional castle in the air based on supposition. How could it be otherwise? No one has an isolated and purified specimen of the virus that can be analyzed.

Accepting “new virus” as fact produces this situation: a list of very familiar clinical symptoms can now be called unique, because the cause is unique.

Suddenly, cough, chills, fever, fatigue, congestion, shortness of breath—which have been called flu, or just infection, or other names—are COVID. That’s the big switcheroo.

Taking it even further—as I’ve reported in several articles—the three major clinical trials of RNA COVID vaccines were designed to prove nothing more than this: the vaccine could protect against cough, chills, and fever. You could call it a mild-flu vaccine.

Next step: provide a diagnostic test for “the virus” that would automatically spit out false-positives like water from a firehouse. That’s the PCR. I’ve taken the PCR apart six ways from Sunday and exposed it as a fraud.

With the PCR in hand, the switcheroo is deepened. That list of familiar illness symptoms—taken together with the test—paints the picture of millions of cases of a “new plague.”

All this fabrication is on the order of—“Hey, Jim, sales of our widget number 6 are in the toilet. What can we do? Unless…let’s call it widget number 7, put it in a new box…”

People say, “But there ARE mysterious COVID cases that can’t explained away as repackaged lung infections…”

Of course there are. When you make the net big enough, it will sweep in groups of cases that seem to defy explanation. But when you move in close enough, you discover, for example, new poisonous vaccination campaigns and toxic pesticides and lagoons of feces in giant pig factory-farms. These and other such causes of illness and death emerge.

I first caught on to the switcheroo in 1987, when I was doing research for my first book, AIDS INC. Scientists in Africa were investigating a “new” outbreak among people who, “incidentally,” were suffering from protein-calorie malnutrition, hunger, and starvation.

The scientists, cheap con artists that they were, called this “wasting syndrome,” then “Slim disease,” and finally “AIDS.” They announced the cause was HIV—a virus no one had isolated.

And lurking in the background, if you needed another cause of illness and death, there was the infamous World Health Organization mass smallpox-vaccination campaign in Africa, one of the most dangerous mass medical experiments ever carried out on a population. That campaign had wrapped up injecting millions of people several years before “the discovery of AIDS.”

The campaign was so dangerous that, at a secret WHO meeting in Geneva, a decision was made never to use that vaccine again, because it had caused smallpox (or something that looked like it).

In 1987, I combed through volumes of medical journals at the UCLA bio-med library, and discovered that the single most prevalent cause of T-cell depletion (“AIDS”) in the world is MALNUTRITION.

Malnutrition, hunger, starvation, toxic vaccines, grinding poverty, war, fertile farm land stolen from the people by major agricultural corporations, toxic medical drugs…all repackaged as a new disease caused by a new virus, HIV.

I then went on to study every so-called high-risk group for AIDS. I found that in each group, all the “AIDS symptoms” could be explained by non-viral causes.

At that point, I realized I was looking at a classic intelligence-agency-type covert operation, applied within the medical universe. The virus was the cover story. It was being use to hide ongoing government and corporate crimes. For example—forced starvation.

A con is a con.

Only the disease-names are changed, to protect the guilty.

Here is the second article on the scam:

—Massive number of flu cases are re-labeled COVID cases—

The number of COVID cases has been faked in various ways.

By far, the most extensive strategy is re-labeling. Flu is called COVID.

We don’t need charts and graphs to see this. It’s right in front of our eyes.

The definition of a COVID case allows flu in the door. There is nothing unique about that definition. For example, a cough, or chills and fever, would constitute “a mild case of COVID.”

A positive PCR test for SARS-CoV-2 would also be required, but as I’ve shown in my recent series on the test, obtaining a false positive is as easy as pie.

All you have to do is run the test at more than 35 cycles. Most labs run the test at 40 cycles. A cycle is a quantum leap in magnification of the swab sample taken from the patient. When you run the test at more than 35 cycles, false-positives come pouring out like water from a fire hose.

So…with ordinary flu symptoms plus a false-positive PCR test…voila, you have a COVID case.

Keep in mind that, overwhelmingly, most “COVID cases” are mild. In other words, they’re indistinguishable from ordinary flu.

But there is a rabbit hole here, and we can go down that hole much farther. The next question is: what is a flu case? What is it really?

Researcher Peter Doshi did much to answer that question. In December of 2005, the British Medical Journal (online) published his shocking report, which created tremors through the halls of the CDC, where “the experts” used to tell the press that 36,000 people in the US die every year from the flu.

Here is a quote from Doshi’s report, “Are US flu death figures more PR than science?” (BMJ 2005; 331:1412):

“[According to CDC statistics], ‘influenza and pneumonia’ took 62,034 lives in 2001—61,777 of which were attributable to pneumonia and 257 to flu, and in only 18 cases was the flu virus positively identified.”


You see, the CDC created one overall category that combined both flu and pneumonia deaths. Why? Because they disingenuously assumed the pneumonia deaths are complications stemming from the flu.

This is an absurd assumption. Pneumonia has a number of causes.

But even worse, in all the flu and pneumonia deaths, only 18 revealed the presence of an influenza virus.

Therefore, the CDC could only say, with assurance, that 18 people died of influenza in 2001. Not 36,000 deaths. 18 deaths.

Doshi continued his assessment of published CDC flu-death statistics: “Between 1979 and 2001, [CDC] data show an average of 1348 [flu] deaths per year (range 257 to 3006).” These figures refer to flu separated out from pneumonia.

This death toll is far lower than the old parroted 36,000 figure.

However, when you add the sensible condition that lab tests have to actually find the flu virus in patients, the numbers of annual flu deaths plummet even further.

In other words, it’s all promotion and hype.

But we’re not finished yet. Because…what test were researchers using to decide there were 18 cases of honest flu, in which a virus was found and identified? Answer: unknown.

It’s quite probable the test didn’t really isolate a flu virus at all. It only identified some marker that was ASSUMED, without proof, to be unique to a flu virus.

If so—ZERO cases of actual flu were found in the population.

Instead, what we had was “flu-like illness.” Chills, cough, congestion, fever, fatigue; the ubiquitous symptoms that describe about a billion cases of illness, every year, worldwide.

The cause of those billion cases? There is no single cause. Instead, there are many factors, ranging from sudden weather changes to air pollution, to malnutrition, to sub-standard sanitation…on and on.

That being the case, we can now say: Many, many cases of FAKE FLU are being relabeled FAKE COVID.

Now we’re getting real.

The medical cartel “discovers” (markets) huge numbers of so-called unique diseases—each disease with a purported specific cause: virus A, virus B, virus C…

For each virus, there must be at least several highly profitable drugs that supposedly kill the germ. And for each germ, there must be a vaccine that prevents the disease.

Billions and trillions in rewards follow.

And so does CONTROL. Control of minds.

Because the population is tuned up by ceaseless propaganda to believe in the rigid one-disease one-germ notion.

And when the time is right, the medical cartel can even claim a new germ is decimating the world, and they must “destroy the village in order to save it.”

Which is the psychotic fiction we are in the middle of, right now.

The Holy Church of Biological Mysticism needs your support. Give them your time, your money, your livelihood, your future, your loyalty, your faith, your health, your life.

If you do, you are their most important product.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

The author of three explosive collections, THE MATRIX REVEALED, EXIT FROM THE MATRIX, and POWER OUTSIDE THE MATRIX, Jon was a candidate for a US Congressional seat in the 29th District of California. He maintains a consulting practice for private clients, the purpose of which is the expansion of personal creative power. Nominated for a Pulitzer Prize, he has worked as an investigative reporter for 30 years, writing articles on politics, medicine, and health for CBS Healthwatch, LA Weekly, Spin Magazine, Stern, and other newspapers and magazines in the US and Europe. Jon has delivered lectures and seminars on global politics, health, logic, and creative power to audiences around the world. You can sign up for his free NoMoreFakeNews emails here or his free OutsideTheRealityMachine emails here.




Featured image is from America’s Frontline Doctors

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


In the United States we now live under a government that largely operates in secret, headed by an executive that ignores the constitutional separation of powers and backed by a legislature that is more interested in social engineering than in benefitting the American people. The US, together with its best friend and faux ally Israel, has become the ultimate rogue nation, asserting its right to attack anyone at any time who refuses to recognize Washington’s leadership. America is a country in decline, its influence having been eroded by a string of foreign policy and military disasters starting with Vietnam and more recently including Iraq, Afghanistan, Libya, Syria, Yemen and the Ukraine. As a result, respect for the United States has plummeted most particularly over the past twenty years since the War on Terror was declared and the country has become a debtor nation as it prints money to sustain a pointless policy of global hegemony which no one else either desires or respects.

It has been argued in some circles that the hopelessly ignorant Donald Trump and the dementia plagued Joe Biden have done one positive thing, and that has been to keep us out of an actual shooting war with anyone able to retaliate in kind, which means in practice Russia and possibly China. Even if that were so, one might question a clumsy foreign policy devoid of any genuine national interest that is a train wreck waiting to happen. It has no off switch and has pushed America’s two principal rivals into becoming willy-nilly de facto enemies, something which neither Moscow nor Beijing wished to see develop.

Contrary to the claims that Trump and Biden are war-shy, both men have in fact committed war crimes by carrying out attacks on targets in both Syria and Iraq, to include the assassination of senior Iranian general Qasim Soleimani in January 2020. Though it was claimed at the time that the attacks were retaliatory, evidence supporting that view was either non-existent or deliberately fabricated.

Part of the problem for Washington is that the US had inextricably tied itself to worthless so-called allies in the Middle East, most notably Israel and Saudi Arabia. The real danger is not that Joe Biden or Kamala Harris will do something really stupid but rather that Riyadh or Jerusalem will get involved in something over their heads and demand, as “allies,” that they be bailed out by Uncle Sam. Biden will be unable to resist, particularly if it is the Israel Lobby that is doing the pushing.

Perhaps one of the more interesting news plus analysis articles along those lines that I have read in a while appeared last week in the Business Insider, written by one Mitchell Plitnick, who is described as president of ReThinking Foreign Policy. The article bears the headline “Russia and Israel may be on a collision course in Syria” and it argues that Russia’s commitment to Syria and Israel’s interest in actively deterring Iran and its proxies are irreconcilable, with the US ending up in an extremely difficult position which could easily lead to its involvement in what could become a new shooting war. The White House would have to tread very carefully as it would likely want to avoid sending the wrong signals either to Moscow or Jerusalem, but that realization may be beyond the thinking of the warhawks on the National Security Council.

To place the Plitnick article in its current context of rumors of wars, one might cite yet another piece in Business Insider about the July 30th explosive drone attack on an oil tanker off the coast of Oman in the northern Indian Ocean, which killed two crewmen, a Briton and a Romanian. The bombing was immediately attributed to Iran by both Israel and Washington, though the only proof presented was that the fragments of the drone appeared to demonstrate that it was Iranian made, which means little as the device is available to and used by various players throughout the Middle East and in central Asia.

The tanker in question was the MT Mercer Street, sailing under a Liberian flag but Japanese-owned and managed by Zodiac Maritime, an international ship management company headquartered in London and owned by Israeli shipping magnate Eyal Ofer. It was empty, sailing to pick up a cargo, and had a mixed international crew. Inevitably, initial media reporting depended on analysis by the US and Israel, which saw the attack as a warning or retaliatory strike executed or ordered by the newly elected government currently assuming control in Tehran.

US Secretary of State Tony Blinken, who could not possibly have known who carried out the attack, was not shy about expressing his “authoritative” viewpoint, asserting that “We are confident that Iran conducted this attack. We are working with our partners to consider our next steps and consulting with governments inside the region and beyond on an appropriate response, which will be forthcoming.”

The US Central Command (CENTCOM) also all too quickly pointed to Iran, stating that

“The use of Iranian designed and produced one way attack ‘kamikaze’ UAVs is a growing trend in the region. They are actively used by Iran and their proxies against coalition forces in the region, to include targets in Saudi Arabia and Iraq.”

Tehran denied that it had carried out the attack but the Israeli Defense Minister Benny Gantz was not accepting that and threatened to attack Iran, saying predictably that

“We are at a point where we need to take military action against Iran. The world needs to take action against Iran now… Now is the time for deeds — words are not enough. … It is time for diplomatic, economic and even military deeds. Otherwise the attacks will continue.” Gantz also confirmed that “Israel is ready to attack Iran, yes…”

New Israeli Prime Minister Naftali Bennett also made the same demand, saying Israel could “…act alone. They can’t sit calmly in Tehran while igniting the entire Middle East — that’s over. We are working to enlist the whole world, but when the time comes, we know how to act alone.” If the level of verbal vituperation coming out of Israel is anything to go by, an attack on Iran would appear to be imminent.

After the attack on the MT Mercer Street, there soon followed the panicked account the panicked account of an alleged hijacking of a second tanker by personnel initially reported to be wearing “Iranian military uniforms.” The “…hijacking incident in international waters in the Gulf of Oman” ended peacefully however. The US State Department subsequently reported that “We can confirm that personnel have left the Panama-flagged Asphalt Princess… We believe that these personnel were Iranian, but we’re not in a position to confirm this at this time.”

So, the United States government does not actually know who did what to whom but is evidently willing to indict Iran and look the other way if Israel should choose to start a war. Conservative columnist Pat Buchanan is right to compare the drone attack on the Mercer Street to the alleged Gulf of Tonkin Incident in 1964, which was deliberately distorted by the Lyndon B. Johnson Administration and used to justify rapid escalation of US involvement in the Vietnam War. Buchanan observes that it is by no means clear that Iran was behind the Mercer Street attack and there are a number of good reasons to doubt it, including Iranian hopes to have sanctions against its economy lifted which will require best behavior. Also, Iran would have known that it would be blamed for such an incident in any event, so why should it risk going to war with Israel and the US, a war that it knows it cannot win?

Buchanan observes that whoever attacked the tanker wants war and also to derail any negotiations to de-sanction Iran, but he stops short of suggesting who that might be. The answer is of course Israel, engaging in a false flag operation employing an Iranian produced drone. And I would add to Buchanan’s comments that there is in any event a terrible stink of hypocrisy over the threat of war to avenge the tanker incident. Israel has attacked Iranian ships in the past and has been regularly bombing Syria in often successful attempts to kill Iranians who are, by the way, in the country at the invitation of its legitimate government. Zionist Joe Biden has yet to condemn those war crimes, nor has the suddenly aroused Tony Blinken. And Joe, who surely knows that neither Syria nor Iran threatens the United States, also continues to keep American troops in Syria, occupying a large part of the country, which directly confront the Kremlin’s forces. Israel wants a war that will inevitably involve the United States and maybe also Russia to some degree as collateral damage. Will it get that or will Biden have the courage to say “No!”


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

This article was originally published on The Unz Review.

Philip M. Giraldi, Ph.D., is Executive Director of the Council for the National Interest, a 501(c)3 tax deductible educational foundation (Federal ID Number #52-1739023) that seeks a more interests-based U.S. foreign policy in the Middle East. Website is address is P.O. Box 2157, Purcellville VA 20134 and its email is [email protected]

Featured image is from The Unz Review

150115 Long War Cover hi-res finalv2 copy3.jpg

The Globalization of War: America’s “Long War” against Humanity

Michel Chossudovsky

The “globalization of war” is a hegemonic project. Major military and covert intelligence operations are being undertaken simultaneously in the Middle East, Eastern Europe, sub-Saharan Africa, Central Asia and the Far East. The U.S. military agenda combines both major theater operations as well as covert actions geared towards destabilizing sovereign states.

ISBN Number: 978-0-9737147-6-0
Year: 2015
Pages: 240 Pages

List Price: $22.95

Special Price: $15.00

Click here to order.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Monsanto owner Bayer AG has lost another appeals court decision in the sweeping U.S. Roundup  litigation, continuing to struggle to find a way out from under the crush of tens of thousands of claims alleging that Monsanto’s glyphosate-based herbicides cause cancer.

In a decision handed down on Monday, the 1st Appellate District in the Court of Appeal for California rejected Monsanto’s bid to overturn the trial loss in a case brought by husband-and-wife plaintiffs, Alva and Alberta Pilliod.

“We find that substantial evidence supports the jury’s verdicts,” the court stated. “Monsanto’s conduct evidenced reckless disregard of the health and safety of the multitude of unsuspecting consumers it kept in the dark. This was not an isolated incident; Monsanto’s conduct involved repeated actions over a period of many years motivated by the desire for sales and profit.”

The court specifically rejected the argument that federal law preempts such claims, an argument Bayer has told investors offers a potential path out of the litigation. Bayer has said it hopes it can get the U.S. Supreme  Court to agree with its preemption argument.

In May 2019 a jury awarded the Pilliods more than $2 billion in punitive and compensatory damages after lawyers for the couple argued they both developed non-Hodgkin lymphoma caused by their many years of using Roundup products.

The trial judge lowered the combined award to $87 million.

In appealing the loss, Monsanto argued not only that the Pilliod claims were preempted by federal law, but also that the jury’s causation findings were flawed, the trial court should not have admitted certain evidence, and that “the verdict is the product of attorney misconduct.” Monsanto also wanted the damage awards further slashed.

Court slams company

In the appeals court decision, the court left the award unchanged, and said that Monsanto had not shown that federal law did preempt such claims as those made by the Pilliods. The court also said there was substantial evidence that Monsanto acted with a “willful and conscious disregard for the safety of others,” supporting the awarding of punitive damages.

The evidence showed that Monsanto “failed to conduct adequate studies on glyphosate and Roundup, thus impeding discouraging, or distorting scientific inquiry concerning glyphosate and Roundup,” the court said.

The court also chastised Monsanto for not accurately presenting “all of the record evidence” in making its appeal:

“But rather than fairly stating all the relevant evidence, Monsanto has made a lopsided presentation that relies primarily on the evidence in its favor. This type of presentation may work for a jury, but it will not work for the Court of Appeal.”

The court added:

“The trial described in Monsanto’s opening brief bears little resemblance to the trial reflected in the record.”

“Summed up, the evidence shows Monsanto’s intransigent unwillingness to inform the public about the carcinogenic dangers of a product it made abundantly available at hardware stores and garden shops across the country,” the court said.

Another trial underway now

The Pilliod trial was the third against Monsanto. In the first trial, a unanimous jury awarded plaintiff Dewayne Johnson $289 million;  the plaintiff in the second trial was awarded $80 million.

The fourth trial began last week. A jury of seven men and five women on Monday were hearing testimony in the case of Donnetta Stephens v. Monsanto in the Superior Court of San Bernardino County in California.  Retired U.S. government scientist Christopher Portier, who has been an expert witness for the plaintiffs in prior Roundup trials, testified at length on Monday, reiterating previous testimony that there is clear scientific evidence showing glyphosate and glyphosate-based formulations such as Roundup can cause cancer.

Bayer, which bought Monsanto in 2018, has settled several other cases that were scheduled to go to trial over the last two years. And in 2020, the company said it would pay roughly $11 billion to settle about 100,0000 existing Roundup cancer claims. Late last month, Bayer said it would set aside another $4.5 billion toward Roundup litigation liability.

Bayer also announced it would stop selling Roundup, and other herbicides made with the active ingredient glyphosate, to U.S. consumers by 2023. But the company continues to sell the products for use by farmers and commercial applicators.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on Appeals Court Rejects Bayer Bid to Overturn Roundup Trial Loss; Cites Monsanto “Reckless Disregard” for Consumer Safety
  • Tags: , , ,

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


The scenes from western Florida are hard to stomach: fish carcasses dotting beaches for miles, a backhoe lifting a 400-pound goliath grouper out of the water, hundreds of sharks swimming through neighborhoods, and hordes of maggots wriggling along the shore.

In the past three weeks, more than 1,700 tons of dead fish and other marine organisms and debris have washed ashore along beaches near Tampa Bay. They were killed by an overgrowth of toxic algae, known as red tide, that came inland earlier this summer.

While algal blooms are a natural phenomenon in southwest Florida — and across much of the world — they’re typically not this severe. The algae have not only killed untold thousands of fish and more than a dozen manatees but also sickened some beachgoers, who can experience respiratory issues when the toxins become airborne.

Now scientists are racing to determine what makes a year particularly bad for red tides — and whether they’re becoming more common. The last major red tide was just three years ago, when then-Gov. Rick Scott declared a state of emergency, as Vox’s Brian Resnick previously reported. The state’s current governor, Ron DeSantis, has rebuffed calls from environmental groups to declare a state of emergency for this year’s red tide.

Red tides in Florida result from a complicated set of variables, from ocean currents to weather patterns, researchers have learned. And while these events are not necessarily becoming more common, as you might expect, climate change is making them much harder to forecast — and Florida’s booming population is making them far more visible.

How a microscopic creature can kill so many fish

Dead fish, ruined vacations, and other consequences of Florida’s red tide can be tied to just one tiny species: Karenia brevis. It’s a type of marine algae, or phytoplankton, native to the Gulf of Mexico.

While they don’t always make national news, blooms of K. brevis typically occur every year. Starting in late summer, a deep-water current in the Gulf tends to move east toward Florida, causing an upwelling of nutrients like phosphorous and nitrogen that feed the algae and push them toward the coast, where they find other sources of nutrients.

Karenia brevis, a type of marine algae responsible for Florida red tides.Florida Fish and Wildlife Conservation Commission

Normally, the blooms — which can be a rusty red in hue — last for only a few months and impact a relatively small area. But on occasion, they grow uncontrollably and start wreaking havoc on marine ecosystems. That’s because K. brevis produces brevetoxin, an odorless neurotoxin that can be fatal to fish and other marine animals.

While scientists aren’t sure why the algae make toxins, one interesting theory is that it’s to kill fish by design. Rotting fish essentially fertilize the water, which in turn creates more algae. “The toxins have to have a purpose, and it might be killing fish to get the nutrients,” said Cynthia Heil, director of the Red Tide Institute at Florida’s Mote Marine Laboratory & Aquarium. “This little one-cell plant may actually be farming.”

In large numbers, these microscopic organisms also pose a threat to human health. Waves can break open the algae cells and release the toxin into the air. Inhaling it can cause respiratory issues and feel like “you’re starting to get a cold,” Heil said. Studies have linked severe red tides with a rise in hospital visits, especially among older adults.

Where red tide is found in Florida, as of late July. The red dots show areas with high concentrations of Karenia brevis, the algae that cause red tide.Florida Fish and Wildlife Commission

Why this year’s red tide has been so bad

Although K. brevis is well-studied, it’s still not clear why it explodes in some years. Each major red tide event seems to have its own unique equation, experts say.

This year, southerly winds helped keep the bloom close to shore, where it could feed off pollution spilling into the water. Meanwhile, months of drought ahead of Hurricane Elsa likely made estuaries around Tampa Bay saltier, allowing the marine algae to move farther inshore. Plus, more than 200 million gallons of wastewater from an abandoned phosphate mine known as Piney Point was pumped into Tampa Bay last spring.

“There was this huge pulse of nutrients into the bay,” Heil said. While it didn’t outright cause the bloom, it may have made it worse, she added. “It’s been a very odd year.”

Ultimately, the red tide killed more than 1,700 tons of sea life in Pinellas County, which hugs Tampa Bay, and that number could continue to grow. The bloom is also implicated in the death of 17 manatees in June and July, according to the Florida Fish and Wildlife Conservation Commission (FWC).

Floridians also reported seeing hundreds of live sharks evading the red tide by swimming into human-made canals and waterways in the Tampa region. “You literally could have walked across the canal on the backs of sharks — that’s how many there were,” Janelle Branower, a resident of Longboat Key, told Allyson Henning, a reporter with a local NBC news channel.

The toxic bloom is now beginning to dissipate, and hundreds of government workers have been working to clean up mountains of dead fish. (In Pinellas County, dead fish can be burned along with other trash to produce electricity, a county official told Vox.) But it’s only a matter of time before the next severe bloom strikes, experts say.

Researchers measure a dead goliath grouper that washed ashore at St. Pete Beach, Florida.Florida Fish and Wildlife Conservation Commission

Red tides aren’t becoming more common in Florida

A cursory glance at state data showing the number of red tides over time suggests that these events are becoming more common in Florida. That’s in line with a handful of media reportsthat indicate climate change is fueling harmful algal blooms.

But that frightening conclusion isn’t quite right, experts say. “I don’t think we’re in a position to say with any certainty that the frequency of the events has been increasing,” said Thomas Frazer, a professor in the college of marine science at the University of South Florida. A recently published review of the evidence came to the same conclusion for Florida’s red tides: “no significant trend over time is evident,” the review reads.

So why do harmful blooms appear to be increasing?

For one, scientists have ramped up sampling efforts over time, Frazer said. The more you sample, the more likely you’ll be able to detect a toxic algae bloom. Florida has also seen a massive influx of residents in the past decade, so there are simply more people affected by red tides. “Each new bloom is undoubtedly the worst for many residents, regardless of trends,” Heil said. Plus, social media platforms like TikTok have brought a new level of attention to algal blooms. (Several top recent red tide videos on TikTok have tens of thousands of views.)

“You should not underestimate that there is a very strong human behavior factor involved,” said Gustaaf Hallegraeff, a professor emeritus at the University of Tasmania who’s been studying harmful algal blooms for decades. “The more people there are on the coast, the more blooms they see.”

Hallegraeff points out that records of red tides date back hundreds of years, and fish kills have been documented since at least the mid-1800s. The worst bloom in history — which spread from Sarasota down to the Florida Keys — was likely in 1947 and killed an estimated half a billion fish.

Climate change is making blooms unpredictable, but forecasts are improving

There’s some reassuring news in this history, Hallegraeff says. For one thing, “it’s not a new phenomenon. It’s always been there.” Other parts of the world are dealing with new outbreaks of harmful invasive species, he said, and this isn’t one of those.

Still, red tides could get more severe or longer-lasting, he said, as coastal houses and factories contribute to algae-fueling pollution. (There’s not great data showing whether the severity or duration of blooms is increasing, and it’s still a matter of debate among scientists.)

“Red tides are naturally occurring, but we have the capacity to make them worse,” Frazer said. “Increased nutrient delivery is a global problem and arguably the largest problem affecting water quality around the globe.” Nutrient-rich runoff is also fueling a massive “dead zone” farther east in the Gulf of Mexico, which is also caused by algal growth.

Climate change is certain to have some effect, experts say. Rising temperatures can alter ocean currents, raise sea levels, heat the water, and increase the frequency and intensity of droughts and hurricanes. Meanwhile, carbon dioxide affects the acidity of water and the growth rate of photosynthetic organisms like algae. All these variables will likely impact red tide. “Climate change makes algal blooms less predictable,” Hallegraeff said. “That’s the real impact.”

It’s a good thing, then, that researchers are getting better at forecasting blooms. The Florida Fish and Wildlife Conservation Commission can process hundreds of water samples a week, with the help of a sampling robot that measures levels of K. brevis and whether they’re growing.

“The more we know about the ecology of the organism, the better we are able to model it under different conditions,” said Kate Hubbard, director of the Center for Red Tide Research at FWC. Researchers are also experimenting with tools that can fight the blooms directly, from clay (which is used to fight blooms in China) to brewer’s spent grain (a common byproduct in making beer).

In the meantime, the National Centers for Coastal Ocean Science runs a respiratory forecastfor red tide in beaches in western Florida, which is updated every three hours. “It’s really helpful to have these new forecasting tools and models that try to predict where it’s good to go, given that there’s an ongoing bloom,” Hubbard said. “It can change over the course of the day, or over the course of a few days — it’s a dynamic organism.”


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

This story is part of Down to Earth, a Vox reporting initiative on the science, politics, and economics of the biodiversity crisis.

Featured image: The red tide bloom off the coast of northern Pinellas County, Florida.Florida Fish and Wildlife Conservation Commission

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on Why So Many Dead Fish Are Washing Up on Florida’s Beaches
  • Tags: ,

Why Do So Many Believe the Official COVID Narratives?

August 10th, 2021 by Gary Weglarz

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


To understand how the intersecting propaganda operations associated with the “official” MSM covid narratives function, it is useful to examine both the larger historical context from which they emerge, as well as exploring specific individual psychological factors at play.  

Let’s begin by acknowledging the larger socio/cultural “context” that acts as the “backdrop” for the covid propaganda.   We exist globally within a framework of Neo-colonial Western oligarchic dominance that has essentially controlled most of the planet for over 500 years. It is a system that has morphed in important features over time, but it has never lost its ultimate power and control.  It has never been “overthrown.”

This Western dominated global system is responsible for fomenting two World Wars during the last century.  Those wars and the smaller in scale Neo-colonial blood baths that followed led to the deaths of an estimated 124,000,000 and 215,000,000 people during the past century.(1)

The oligarchic power structures that emerged from WWII engaged in a process of violent repression that continues to this day. Standard operating procedure in the West has been to destabilize and/or destroy literally every attempt by the citizens of “formerly colonized” nations to develop independent paths focused on the domestic needs of their populations rather than serving the needs of Western capital.

Both pre-and-post WWII history is comprised of an endless litany of American, British, French and other Western powers attempting to at all costs prevent the emergence of a more equitable post-colonial world.  The types of interventions have ranged from economic strangulation to death squads, torture, invasions, coups, election rigging and unwavering support for “reliable” “pro-Western” dictators.

This same unreformed, unrepentant, Western controlled, oligarchic-run global “system” further solidified power with the disintegration of the former Soviet Union.  It has, to varying degrees, integrated former “communist” enemies into the neoliberal economic order though often maintaining an apparently adversarial relationship with such nations. The Western dominated neoliberal neocolonial model continues to hold the entire world hostage to this day, covering its blood soaked behavior with blatant “propaganda” operations that utilize rubrics such as the West’s claimed “respect for human rights,” adherence to a “rules based order,” and “duty to protect.”

Image on the right is from

Attempts by journalists and whistleblowers to share the truth of routine Western criminality, endless violations of human rights, as well as violations of international and domestic law, are severely punished.  The courage of a Chelsea Manning, Edward Snowdon and Julian Assange in exposing Western governments for the criminal cabals they are, rather than being celebrated by Western MSM, are in fact ignored and such truth-tellers are roundly vilified. Vilified by that same MSM which acts as the official public voice for the global oligarchy that literally “owns” those same media.

This is the world we live in.  This is the “context” we must consider when attempting to understand why so many otherwise intelligent friends, family, and acquaintances seem so willing to credulously absorb the MSM covid narratives.

No person who is actually informed regarding these historical relationships of power and its abuse could possibly simply default to a position of credulously – “trusting the authority” – of the same oligarchic controlled system of actors who are now “officially” at the helm of the so called “global pandemic.”  The question of course is how many people in the West really are “informed” in any meaningful and deep way regarding this history of routine and ongoing Western plunder and mass murder?

Most normally empathic human beings can’t imagine a fellow human being so different from themselves that such a person could think or say literally – that they consider bringing about the deaths of a half a million children as – “worth it.”(2)  We can’t imagine such a mind and moral code, though the history of the West demonstrates that such people routinely occupy positions of power and control in our societies decade after decade, and century after century.

This inability of the “normal” human psyche to imagine the depths of amorality and depravity that routinely characterize oligarchic power acts as a powerful “protectant” for that power.

The Western populace by and large can’t bring itself to “imagine” that our betters would lie about matters of literal life and death related to, for example – “the assassinations of America’s top progressive leaders of the 1960’s”(3); “the Gulf of Tonkin war propaganda operation”(4); the “Kuwaiti incubator babies” war propaganda (5); the “Iraqi WMDs” war propaganda (6); the “9/11” false flag (7); the “Gaddafi’s viagra fueled rape camps” war propaganda (8); or the “Assad is gassing his own people” war propaganda (9).  This brief and very incomplete list of deep state assassinations and propaganda operations is sadly for humanity almost endless in scope and is of course routinely ignored and/or intentionally distorted by the MSM acting on behalf of oligarchy.

A populace subjected unceasingly to such “official lies,” lies that are not allowed to be challenged in MSM, cannot possibly see and understand the world accurately or develop an appropriate distrust of such “official narratives.”  How could such a populace be expected to allow itself the necessary psychic space to even begin to imagine that our betters might in fact be intentionally lying to us about a global pandemic officially projected to kill millions?  It is the endless list of smaller official lies that citizens of the West have credulously accepted, or failed to question, that has set the stage for acceptance of this “big lie” that is the MSM promoted pandemic narrative.

The same oligarchic families, political structures and economic structures that literally profited from the deaths of millions in the last century have never been dismantled or driven from power.  They have not been somehow “reformed” through our democratic structures.  They are now planning through their “Great Reset”(10) agenda just how they will retain their power as public unrest and ecosystem deterioration render a continuation of the savage economic neoliberal status quo untenable.  We should not be surprised that to them a half-a-million dead Iraqi children are worth it.  Given the death count of the past century we should instead ask ourselves if there is literally ANY evil, ANY monstrous actions such people and the amoral institutional structures under their control are somehow NOT capable of carrying out while deeming the mass deaths of faceless others as “worth it.”

Amazingly the same global oligarchy that doesn’t care if you are homeless and living under a freeway overpass, living without food, without basic medical care, without an education, without a job and without any hope for the future – somehow this same global oligarchy expects you and me to believe that they care about us so very much that they just couldn’t bear it if we were to get sick.

They don’t care about poisonous additives and pesticides in our food.

They don’t care about pumping fracking toxins into the water we drink and polluting the air we all breathe for their profit.

They don’t care about an American epidemic of obesity, type two diabetes, heart disease and drug abuse related to endemic structural poverty, inequality and the intentional refusal to allow adequate regulation of toxic and/or unhealthy foods, additives and polluting toxins.

Private equity firms are quietly buying up entire neighborhoods of single family homes at over market value while driving home ownership out of reach of many workers.  But simultaneously our global elites want us to believe that they deeply care about you and me, and that they want to be sure we don’t get covid.  Needless to say the level of disconnect from reality necessary to believe such nonsense is rather significant. Unfortunately it is a very real level of disconnect from reality that characterizes a rather large percentage of the Western populace.

Many of us have been asking ourselves quite regularly over the last 17 odd months how is it that so many otherwise intelligent people, friends, family and acquaintances seem to credulously believe whatever they are told in MSM about our so-called covid ‘pandemic’?  Why, we wonder, don’t they see through the blatantly obvious fear mongering, pseudo-scientific public health measures, and endless MSM propaganda?

For many of us this issue of “credulous acceptance” is at the heart of ongoing frustrations, tensions, family and friendship discord, and even outright anger and “canceling” within otherwise close or genial relationships.  One’s perception of the “covid” situation has become yet another place for fragmentation within our societies leading to even yet greater levels of alienation and lack of social cohesion in societies which can bear no further  divisions.

To better examine this issue let us look at what I will call – “trust in authority” – for lack of a better descriptor.  What is one’s basic orientation to the voice of authority in one’s society?  Is one’s default position “credulous trust,” “guarded skepticism,” or “outright disbelief” when faced with the proclamations of “truth” by our “authorities?”

I will use a brief examination of my own journey regarding my  sense of – “trust in authority” – as an example here, as through reflection over the last year and some months I’ve come to think that this factor is rather critical in how susceptible our friends and family are to the MSM covid narratives.  I wasn’t always, but today I am a clear “outlier” to most Americans in this matter of “trust in authority.”

Earlier in life as part of the Central American solidarity movement in the U.S. I travelled as a human rights activist into three Central American nations where U.S. sponsored counter-insurgency warfare operations were underway, Nicaragua during the Contra war, as well as to El Salvador and two visits in Colombia during those nations’ U.S. supported and sponsored “dirty wars.”  Those personal experiences completely and forever altered my perceptions about the nature of “official truth” as proclaimed by our “authorities.”

There is something profoundly different in simply becoming aware of the body count, the “number of dead,” either spoken of or depicted in print, and actually meeting face to face with survivors of those who have been murdered by American supported counter-insurgency operations.  There was something profoundly life changing about meeting a poor farmer one day and finding out the next morning that he had been murdered during the night by the AUC death squads of Colombia, and then riding in a flatbed truck with his corpse and widow in order to accompany her to a safer zone away from the area openly and brazenly occupied by these U.S. supported death squads.  There was something profoundly life changing in seeing the torture scars on the living, or walking accompanied by survivors through the many small “galleries of heroes and martyrs” in Nicaragua and looking into the faces and eyes of the countless photos of countless victims of the Contra war thus putting a human face to otherwise faceless numbers.

The “coup de grâce” in such a loss of “trust in authority” and “the official narratives” occurred each time one of the human rights delegations I was part of would “debrief” at the U.S. embassy before returning to the U.S. (once in El Salvador and twice in Colombia).  Here at the American embassies is where the grinning pathologically lying jackals, many no doubt who were young CIA in training, would tell us that we simply had “not seen” what we had seen, had “not heard” the testimony that we had heard, that the human rights situation is “improving,” that the torture scars we had seen were likely “self-inflicted for our benefit” (I am not kidding), and that there are “no government sponsored death squads,” among other carefully rehearsed and brazenly dishonest total lies.

Most normally empathic individuals can’t imagine someone so different from themselves ethically that they could think or say literally – that the bringing about the deaths of a half a million children is somehow “worth it.”(2)  We can’t imagine such a mind and moral code, though the history of the West demonstrates that such people routinely occupy the highest positions of power and control in our societies.  They do so while acting on behalf of the oligarchy, whether that oligarchy was once church and crown during the period of the Holy Inquisition, Crusades and witch burnings, or the uber-wealthy global class and corporations that profited off of two world wars during the past century and that today are at the helm of their massively destructive and rapidly disintegrating neoliberal economic order.

I share my own history, because in spite of my own powerful and profound personal experiences, as I look back I remember that I struggled mightily over a period of almost a decade after my first trip to Central America with letting go of the notion that perhaps all this amoral mayhem, torture and mass murder I had seen first-hand was somehow only related to “a few bad apples” in the CIA, the military and in our government.  It took me years to come to terms with the fact that “the whole barrel of apples was rotten,” and that the lies and mass murder were about “the system” (the ‘barrel’ itself) not simply a small number of rogue individuals. In some ways one could say I was dragged “kicking and screaming” to my new perspectives that so very threatened my very sense of grounding in the cultural ‘reality’ I had been indoctrinated into since birth.

This journey of my “loss of trust” in American “authority” involved a very psychologically and spiritually difficult existential crisis that required I relinquish any and all comfort in the thought that those in authority were anything but apologists for amoral mass murder who – without batting an eyelash – could proclaim that a half-a-million dead children were – “worth it.”  This sort of “loss of trust” is no small matter as it essentially means having to accept and come to terms with the fact that one is now an “outsider” within one’s own society.  As such I had come to perceive the world and global events, including the “trustworthiness” of American “authority,” in a very different fashion than almost the entirety of my family, friends and acquaintances.  This journey also demolished my deeper default sense of culturally supported “reality” in which I had been indoctrinated to see the West itself as humane, virtuous and just. Meaning well, in spite of our “mistakes.” To call this loss of my very cultural moorings a profound “existential” crisis would be putting it mildly.

I share these experiences because for me, like many of us who each have our “own story” of “how” we came to this place of  “distrust” of official authority, skepticism came quite naturally when the MSM began promoting the 24/7 covid fear campaign.  Many of us simply instinctively smelled the odor of propaganda and thus quickly brought to bear both our skepticism and a commitment to educate ourselves rather than simply “trust” the official proclamations.

In my circle of friends and family only one of my friends has had similar human rights experiences as those I have shared.  I don’t find it a coincidence that he is my only close friend who disbelieves the official covid narratives.  The point being that the rest of my friends, family and acquaintances did not enter into their encounter with the covid narratives with the absolute and complete “distrust” in “all Western authority” that I have now possessed for some two decades.  How susceptible to the covid fear-mongering might I have been without that complete “distrust” that characterizes my initial response to any and all “official narratives.”  In other words, the impact and influence of covid propaganda narratives can’t be understood in isolation from previous ongoing oligarchic promoted propaganda narratives across other realms that have essentially left most citizens of the West living in a complete fantasy world in which they daily routinely mis-understand and mis-interpret both global and domestic events and the intentions of the oligarchy at the helm.

Like many others who are questioning the MSM covid narratives I have engaged in decades of self-education through reading the investigative work of the many brave researchers who questioned many other government “official truths.” Once armed with such an historical knowledge base and the appropriate skepticism, I was able like many others in real time to question, and be proven correct to question, the “official truths” of any number of government propaganda operations.  From the non-existent Kuwaiti incubator babies (5), to the non-existent Iraqi WMD’s (6), to the fabricated Gaddafi’s viagra fueled rape camps (8), to the false-flag propaganda that Assad is gassing his own people (9), to those oh so convenient “Maidan snipers” (11).  In other words, the experience of many decades has taught me to assume the government and MSM are lying about any important matter unless I can myself find evidence that would convince me otherwise.

As I reflect upon the credulous acceptance of the covid narratives by so many that I know and love, I realize that the simple reality is that they do not share my default position because they have not had my life experiences and they have not spent decades engaged in self-education regarding the endless government propaganda operations peddled breathlessly and ceaselessly by MSM. Instead they have relied on that same MSM to inform them and shape their world views.  These simple facts make them much more susceptible to the ongoing covid propaganda than I could ever be.  I do not know, but I suspect that most of us who were instinctively suspicious of the covid fear-mongering from the very beginning, also shared this default “skepticism” regarding “all such” official narratives.  The fact that any challenge to the official MSM covid narratives have often been rigorously censored, rather than simply marginalized as in many previous propaganda operations, has of course acted as yet another serious “red flag” for many of us.

Along with this issue of “trust” in authority, there is an individual psychological factor that I think also is powerfully at play in making so many otherwise rational people susceptible to believing the endless “you’re going to die soon” fear-mongering carried out 24/7 by MSM regarding covid.  Ernest Becker’s 1973 book ‘The Denial Of Death’ (12) both expanded upon and synthesized the work of others who had explored the centrality of death and self-esteem in human experience, thinkers such as Otto Rank, Alfred Adler and Norman O. Brown.

“The world of human aspiration is largely fictitious and if we do not understand this we understand nothing about man. It is a largely symbolic creation by an ego-controlled animal that permits action in a psychological world, a symbolic-behavioral world removed from the bound-ness of the present moment, from the immediate stimuli which enslave all lower organisms. Man’s freedom is a fabricated freedom, and he pays a price for it. He must at all times defend the utter fragility of his delicately constituted fiction, deny its artificiality.” – Ernest Becker (1971) (13)

Terror Management Theory – (TMT) (14) evolved out of the attempt by a group of social science researchers (15) to systematically test Becker’s insights, in which Becker postulated that our largely unconscious fear of death was in fact THE fundamental motivator of the human being and was in fact the underlying impetus behind the creation of the intersecting myth systems that evolve to constitute “culture” as the foundation of human societies.

Hundreds of TMT social science experiments have now been conducted which have supported Becker’s thesis.  That is that conscious or unconscious reminders of our mortality induce us to unconsciously defend and cling to our basic cultural assumptions, loyalties and foundational myth systems.

Hundreds of variations on these experiments exist, but as a real-life example one might remember how the approval rating of George W. Bush magically and dramatically increased following the events of 9/11. This occurred in conjunction of course with the MSM’s endless fear-mongering in promising more death and mayhem that was sure to follow if we did not agree to whatever civil liberties concessions authorities demanded.  Potent “death reminders” at that time included everything from endless replay of the videos of the towers disintegrating in mid-air, to official presidential comments proclaiming that we cannot afford to wait for an attack from other ‘terrorists’ that might come – “in the form of a mushroom cloud.”

Along with these MSM efforts at constantly reminding the population of “death,” both with conscious and unconscious priming, were also the ubiquitous “Orange Alerts,” and “Red Alerts” which functioned as “death reminders” in the same way masks and mask requirement signs, and social distancing signs, on every store and public building have functioned around the covid death/fear narratives.  The government connected “anthrax attacks” were of course a not so subtle reminder that death could literally arrive (similar to covid) unannounced at one’s doorstep – so the appropriate position was to – “be afraid, be very afraid.”

In many ways I understand TMT as simply offering a deeper, more subtle, understanding of what has long been understood in the psycho-historical analysis of how oligarchic or elite power operates.  Elites effectively frighten their subjects with the fear of death from an enemy in order to mobilize them to fight on behalf of the interests of said elites, or to simply induce the populace to uncritically follow the dictates demanded by said elites.

TMT demonstrates that the activation of such fear of death can occur quite unconsciously through the manipulation of symbols.  The fear of death and the stimulation and mobilization of our unconscious fears of death has been shown by hundreds of TMT experiments to short-circuit objective critical thinking functions in pushing people toward uncritically following their societal leaders directives and/or doubling down on their embrace of deep underlying cultural myths they are often largely unaware of consciously.

“Making death salient by asking people to think about themselves dying (or viewing graphic depictions of death, being interviewed in front of a funeral parlor, or subliminal exposure to the word “dead” or “death”) intensifies strivings to defend their cultural world-views by increasing positive reactions to similar others, and negative reactions toward those who are different. – Ernest Becker Foundation (16)

Those of us who have chosen not to “vaccinate” pose an existential “threat” to the fear-based world-views of those who have credulously accepted the endless – “death is just around the corner if one fails to comply” – narratives peddled constantly by MSM.  The “mask” and one’s “vaccination” status offer a way to identify “similar others” and a way to identify and vilify “those who are different.”  We who question are now “those who are different.”

If one’s default intellectual position is NOT to simply on all counts initially distrust the proclamations of official authority, than one can assume using TMT ‘theorizing’ that many individuals are now doubling-down unconsciously in support of the official narratives in order to perhaps rather desperately “defend their world-views.” This happens through the triggering of what is referred to in TMT as “mortality salience” (the priming of conscious or unconscious awareness of death).  Such “mortality salience” is being promoted constantly by the almost 24/7 barrage of “death reminders” we are bombarded with daily through the MSM covid propaganda.

Through MSM the masses are the target of constant endless fear-mongering about new and infinitely more deadly “variants,” about the “numbers” of the dead, the “numbers” of hospitalized, the “numbers” of “new cases,” the “number” of available ventilators or ICU beds, the images of masks, the images of dead bodies in the streets, in piles, in refrigerator trucks, stories of those “dying” in hospitals who “wish they had gotten the vaccine,” etc.  Everything, of course, BUT the images or numbers of those who have died or been harmed by the “vaccines” themselves.

“According to TMT, people need to insulate themselves from their deep fear of living an insignificant life destined to be erased by death. One path to address this fear is to assure themselves that they are part of an important group. This desire to reinforce cultural significance in the face of death often results in displays of prejudice based on the belief that the group with which one identifies is superior to others. In this way, people confirm their self-importance, at least to themselves.” (17)

It is not simply the fear of death, but the fear of death without “meaning” (as Becker maintains) that acts as a powerful, largely unconscious force in human perception and motivation.  Could it be that in our modern consumer society, so devoid and barren of any individual or collective “meaning,” that the covid narrative provides such “meaning” for many people in ways that deserve our attention and analysis if we hope to challenge the impact of the official propaganda narratives?  Perhaps our efforts at debunking covid propaganda are in some ways frustrated because in doing so we are also challenging the modern human hunger for “meaning,” both “individual and collective,” that otherwise simply does not exist for most people in our modern, highly alienated and ever more fragmented Western consumer societies?

From this perspective, “belief” in the covid narratives may take on an existential or almost religious quality even more so than an intellectual one – making the debunking of fictitious information a much more complex undertaking than we might at first assume.  What will those who believe with their whole hearts in the “covid” narratives, and who feel the thrill of experiencing the sense of collective “virtue” of their in-group status, use to “replace” the shattered world-view that would exist should their belief in the covid fairy tales now implode and disintegrate?

For any of us hoping to challenge the covid lies and to thus alter the course of where all of this appears to be going, this is hardly an insignificant question and one that deserves our attention.

Simply writing off and dismissing our ever fearful “covid obsessed” family, friends and acquaintances as gullible, hopeless, or worse, becomes the mirror of the “in-group” vs “out-group” thinking which the covid true-believers reflexively apply to we the unwashed and unvaxed heretics.  The heresy that is our “disbelief” will require more than simply “facts” and “the truth” if we are to reach them.  It will also require a more nuanced understanding of the “reasons why” so many are caught in a web of fear-based acceptance of the official covid narratives.

Finding effective ways to challenge the popular fear based “acceptance” of the MSM lies and propaganda around covid is critical if we hope to alter the frightening global trajectory that those narratives ominously portend for all of us, regardless of one’s personal “disbelief” in the covid propaganda.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Gary Weglarz retired in 2014 from practice as a clinical social worker.  He worked with, and learned from, Alaskan Native peoples who were attempting to heal the damage inflicted by the collective ongoing intergenerational trauma of colonization.  Currently he is engaged in research and writing regarding the relationship between past mass trauma in Western societies, and the subsequent colonial violence that has characterized the behavior of Europe and her colonies. He was actively involved in Central American solidarity efforts throughout the 1990’s, traveling with human rights delegations to Nicaragua, El Salvador and Colombia. 



















All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


According to such modern climate experts as Bill Gates, Greta Thunberg, Michael Bloomberg, Mark Carney, Al Gore, Alexandria Ocasio Cortez, Prince Charles and Klaus Schwab, carbon dioxide (CO2) must be stopped at all cost. Images of submerged cities, drowning polar bears and burning deserts taking over civilization flash before our eyes repeatedly in schools, mainstream media and films.

The Paris Climate Accords demand that all nations reduce their emissions to pre-industrial levels and the upcoming COP27 Summit in the UK will certainly demand that these reductions be made legally binding and enforceable by new global governance mechanisms.

But is CO2 really the existential threat it is being made out to be?

I would like to take a few moments to entertain the hypothesis that we may be drinking some poisonous Kool-Aid in a modern-day Jonestown cult and we are just minutes away from a hearty “bottoms up”.

While some of the questions and facts you are about to read are considered heretical in certain quarters, I think that history has shown that it is only by permitting the mind to question sacred cows at the risk of being denounced as “heretical” that any creative progress can be made. With this thought in mind, I will venture the risk and only ask that you accompany me for this thought experiment with an open mind.

A Preface on Climategate

Back in November 17, 2009, a major scandal erupted when the 61 Mb of emails internally circulated among the directors and researchers at East Anglia University’s Climate Research Unit (CRU) were made public. To this day, it has not been verified if the scandal occurred via an internal leak or a hack, but what was verified throughout the hundreds of emails between director Phil Jones and the teams of climatologists staffing the CRU, was that vast scales of fraud were occurring. Jones himself was caught red handed[1] demanding that data sets be ignored and massaged in order to justify the climate models that had all been used to sell the idea that CO2 was driving startling rates of warming.

East Anglia’s CRU is the world’s foremost center of data set centralization and climate model generation which feed directly into the UN’s Independent Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) and which in turn feeds into every major NGO, school, corporation and government. The other central control point of data selection and model generation (for both climate change and covid-19 data sets) is an Oxford-based operation called “Our World In Data”, funded in large measure by the UK government and Bill Gates[2].

Climategate couldn’t have come at a worse time, as the COP15 Climate Summit was scheduled for December 2009 where the world’s first legally binding carbon reduction treaties were expected to finalize an end to sovereign nation states. The terrible publicity of climategate essentially caused the event to become a big goose egg, as Chinese and Indian delegates refused to play along, and ensured that all teeth were removed from any binding carbon caps[3].

In December 2009, former chief economic advisor to Putin, Dr. Andrei Illarionov stated that Russia had sent data to East Anglia’s CRU from 476 meteorological stations covering over 20% of the globe’s surface hosting a wide range of data from as far back as 1865 to 2005. Dr. Illarionov explained[4] that he was dismayed to see that Phil Jones and the CRU entirely ignored the data from all but 121 stations, and from those stations they did use, they artificially cherry-picked data that gave off the false result that temperatures between 1860-1965 were 0.67 degrees colder than they truly were while temperatures from 1965-2005 were made artificially high.

After being suspended for a few months, a UK review panel absolved Jones from his transgressions and re-installed him into his old position of carbon data gatekeeper at the CRU.

Development Greens the Earth

Many people were taken aback by the findings published by a team of scientists analyzing the results of Moderate Resolution Imaging Spectroradiometer (MODIS) instruments on NASA’s Terra and Aqua satellites. NASA’s website[5] described the findings (published on February 11, 2019[6]) in the following way: “The research team found that global green leaf area has increased by 5 percent since the early 2000s, an area equivalent to all of the Amazon rainforests. At least 25 percent of that gain came in China.”

Up until this study’s publication, scientists were not certain what role human economic activity played in this anomalous greening of the earth.

The NASA study demonstrated that this dramatic rate of greening between 2000-2017 was being driven largely by China and India’s combined efforts at eradicating poverty which involves both reforestation, desert greening efforts (see China’s Move South Water North megaproject[7]), agricultural innovation and also, general industrial growth policies. The latter policies represent genuine efforts by Asian nations to wipe out poverty by investments into large scale infrastructure… a practice once used in the west before the days of “post-industrialism” induced a collective insanity of consumerism in the early 1970s.

A perplexed reader might now be heard to ask: but how can industrial growth have anything to do with greening of the planet?

One simple answer is: carbon dioxide.

CO2: An Innocent Victim 

As children, we are taught that CO2 is an integral part of our ecosystem and that plants love it.

The processes of photosynthesis which evolved over long spans of time with the advent of the chlorophyll molecule eons ago requires constant infusions of carbon dioxide that are broken down along with H2O, releasing oxygen back into the biosphere. Over time, free oxygen slowly formed the earth’s ozone layer and fueled the rise of ever higher life forms that relied on this “plant waste” for life.

Today, large amounts of carbon dioxide is regularly generated by biotic and abiotic activity from living animals, decaying biomass as well as volcanos which constantly emit CO2 and other greenhouse gases. A surprisingly small portion of that naturally occurring CO2 is caused by human economic activity.

Taking the entire composition of greenhouse gases together, water vapour makes up 95% of the bulk, carbon dioxide makes up 3.6%, nitrous oxide (0.9%), methane (0.3%), and aerosols about 0.07%.

Of the sum total of the 3.6% carbon dioxide released into the atmosphere, approximately 0.9% is caused by human activity. To restate this statistic: Human CO2 makes up less than 1% of the 3.6% of the total greenhouse gases influencing our climate.

During the mid-20th century, a belief began to emerge among some fringe climate scientists that the 400 parts per million (PPM) average carbon dioxide in the atmosphere is the “natural and ideal amount”, such that any upset of this mathematical average would supposedly result in destruction of biodiversity. These same mathematicians also presumed that the biosphere could be defined as closed systems such that rules of entropy were the natural organizing principles- ignoring the obvious fact that ecosystems are OPEN, connected to oceans of active cosmic radiations from other stars, galaxies, supernova and more while being mediated by nested arrays of electromagnetic fields.

As film maker Adam Curtis demonstrated in his All Watched Over By Machines of Love and Grace (2011)[8], this belief slowly moved from the fringe into mainstream thinking despite the fact that it is simply wrong.

Beyond the facts already presented above, another persuasive piece of evidence can be found in carbon dioxide generators which are commonly purchased by anyone managing a greenhouse[9]. These widely-used generators increase CO2 to amounts as high as 1,500 PPM. What is the effect of such increases? Healthier, happier, greener plants and vegetables.

Temperature and CO2: Who Leads in this Dance?

Amidst the frantic alarms sounding daily over the impending climate emergency threatening the world, we often forget to ask if anyone ever actually proved the claim that CO2 drives the climate?

To begin to answer this question, let’s start with a graph showcasing the rise of human industrial CO2 from 1751-2015 broken down into various regions of the earth. What we can see is consistent increase from the mid 19th century until 1950, when a vast spike of emission rate increases can be viewed. This increase obviously accompanies world population growth and the correlated agro-industrial output.

Next, let us look at the global mean temperature changes from 1880-present.

Here several anomalies strike the thinking mind.

For starters, absolutely no warming accompanies the period of intensive industrial growth of 1940-1977. In fact during this period, many climate scientists were ringing the alarm over an impending ice age![10]

Another anomaly: Since carbon dioxide emissions have increased continuously over the past 20 years, one would expect to see a correlated spike in warming trends. However, this expected correlation is entirely absent between the year 1998 and 2012 when warming tappers off to a near standstill sometimes called “the global warming pause” of 1998-2012[11]. This has been an embarrassment for all modellers whose scare-mongering predictions have fallen to pieces to the point that they can only pretend this pause doesn’t exist. Again, the question must be asked: why would this anomaly appear if CO2 drove temperature?

Let’s take one more anomaly from our temperature records before digging into the hard proof that CO2 does not cause temperature changes: The medieval warming period [see graph].

While certain analysts [12] have attempted to erase this warming period from existence with things like the famous “hockey stick” model crafted with the help of East Anglia’s Phil Jones, the fact remains that from 1000-1350 A.D. global mean temperatures were significantly warmer than anything we are currently living through. The Vikings in Greenland had no coal plants or SUVs, and yet mean temperatures were still warmer than today by a long shot. Why?

Perhaps taking a wider look at the CO2: climate correlation might give us a better idea of what is actually happening.

Below we can see a chart taking 600,000 years of data into account. It is certainly the case that CO2 and temperature have a connection on these scales… but correlation is not causation, and as the author of How to Lie with Statistics[13] famously stated “a well-wrapped statistic is better than Hitler’s Big Lie; it misleads, yet it cannot be pinned on you.”

When a 70,000 year sampling is inspected, we find the slight of hand fully exposed by observing the peaks and troughs of temperature and CO2. If the later were truly the driving force as the Great Resetters of our day proclaim, then CO2 peaks and troughs would happen before temperature, but the evidence shows us the inverse. Let’s look at one more example of an 800 year CO2/temperature lag about 130,000 years ago…

Going back even further into the climate records, it has been revealed that during many of the past ice ages, carbon dioxide had risen up to 800% higher than our current levels, despite the fact that human activity played zero role[14].

A Brief Look at Space Weather

Technically, I could end right now and feel like any honest jury would conclude that CO2 has been falsely framed for murder. But I would like to introduce one more dramatic piece of evidence that gets us back on the path of a true science of climate change and ecosystems management: Astroclimatology.

The fact that the earth is but one of a multitude of spherical bodies in space speedily revolving around an incredibly active sun within the outskirts of a galaxy within a broader cluster of galaxies is often ignored by many computer modelling statisticians for a very simple reason. Anyone who has been conditioned to look at the universe through a filter of linear computer models is obsessed with control, and is incredibly uncomfortable with the unknown. The amount of actual factors shaping the weather, ice ages, and volcanism are so complex, vast and mostly undiscovered that computer modellers would prefer to simply pretend they don’t exist… or if they do acknowledge such celestial phenomena to have any function in climate change, it is often dismissed as “negligible”.

Despite this culture of laziness and dishonesty, the question is worth asking: WHY does evidence of climate change occur across so many other planets and moons of our solar system? Ice caps on Mars melt periodically[15] and have been melting at faster rates in recent years. Why is this happening? Could the sun’s coronal mass ejections, solar wind, or electromagnetic field be affecting climate change within the solar system as one unifying process?

Often Venus with its atmosphere of 96.5% CO2 is used as a warning for people on the earth what sort of terrible oven we will create by producing more CO2. It is hot after all with temperatures averaging 467 degrees Celsius (872 degrees Fahrenheit). However, if CO2 were truly to blame for the heating, then why is Mars so cold with temperatures averaging minus 125 degrees Celsius (-195 degrees Fahrenheit) despite the fact that it’s atmosphere is 95% CO2?

Similarly, what role does cosmic radiation play in driving climate change? Based on the recent discoveries of Heinrich Svensmark and his team in Denmark, strong correlations were found linking cloud formation, climate and cosmic radiation flux over time. Cosmic radiation flux into the earth is a continuous process mediated by the earth’s magnetic field as well as the oscillating magnetic field of the sun which shapes the entire solar system as we revolve around the galactic center of the Milky Way every 225-250 million years. Svensmark’s discovery was outlined beautifully in the 2011 documentary The Cloud Mystery.[16]

A Return to a True Science of Climate

The point to re-emphasize is that the weather is, and always has been, a complex process shaped by galactic forces that have driven a miraculous system of life on the earth over hundreds of millions of years.

During this time amounting to approximately two revolutions around the galactic center, living matter has transformed from relatively boring (high entropy) single celled organisms, through a continuous process of increased complexity, and increased power of self-direction (low entropy). Up until now, there is no actual evidence that this process is a closed system and as such, that any fixed state of no change/heat death is controlling its behavior. While some might deny this claim, citing the redshifts of galaxies as proof that the universe is in fact dying (or inversely had a starting point “in time” 13.6 billion years ago before there was nothing), I refer you to the work of Halton Arp[17].

This process has been characterized by non-linear discontinuities of living matter emerging where only nonliving matter previously existed, followed later by conscious life having appeared where only non-conscious life had been found and most recently self-conscious life endowed with creative reason appearing onto the scene. While this process has been punctuated by sometimes violent mass-extinction cycles, the overall direction of life has not been shaped by randomness, chance or chaos, but rather improvement, perfectibility and harmony.

When humanity appeared onto the scene, a new phenomenon began expressing itself in a form which the great Russian academician Vladimir Vernadsky (1863-1945) described as the Noosphere (as opposed to the lithosphere and biosphere). Vernadsky understood this new geological force to be driven by human creative reason, and devoted his life to teaching the world that the law of humanity must accord with the law of nature stating:

“The noösphere is a new geological phenomenon on our planet. In it, for the first time, man becomes a large-scale geological force. He can, and must, rebuild the province of his life by his work and thought, rebuild it radically in comparison with the past. Wider and wider creative possibilities open before him. It may be that the generation of our grandchildren will approach their blossoming”.[18]

In Vernadsky’s mind, neither the noosphere, nor the biosphere obeyed a law of mathematical equilibrium or statis, but was rather governed by an asymmetrical harmony and progress from lower to higher states of organization. It was only by coming to understand the principles of nature that mankind became morally and intellectually fit to improve upon nature by turning deserts green, harnessing the power of the atom or applying scientific progress to health and agriculture. Some of his most important insights were published in his Scientific Thought as a Planetary Phenomena (1938), Evolution of Species and Living Matter (1928) Some Words About the Noosphere (1943), and The Transition of the Biosphere to the Noosphere (1938).[19]

Despite the lasting contributions made by Vernadsky to human knowledge, here we sit, 76 years after the end of WW2 tolerating an unscientific policy of mass decarbonization which threatens to radically undermine civilization for countless generations.

Is this change being forced upon humanity? Unlike the forces of fascism and imperialism of the past, today’s terrible self-implosion of civilization is occurring via the consent of those intended to perish under a Great Reset via the collective guilt for the crime of simply being human. It has become the norm for the majority of today’s children to think of themselves as belonging not to a beautiful species made in the image of a Creator, but rather to a parasitic race guilty for the crime of sinning against nature.

So let’s take this opportunity to re-introduce truth back into climate science, and let the social engineers drooling over a Great Reset scream and whine as nations choose a new open system paradigm of life and anti-entropy rather than a closed system world of decay and heat death. This positive new paradigm of cooperation, scientific and technological progress, and cultural optimism is getting stronger by the day led by Russia, China and other nations joining the international New Silk Road. Most importantly, let’s finally absolve CO2 of its accused sins, and celebrate this wonderful little molecule as our friend and ally.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Matthew Ehret is the Editor-in-Chief of the Canadian Patriot Review , a BRI Expert on Tactical talk, and Senior Fellow at the American University in Moscow. He is author of the‘Untold History of Canada’ book series, and Clash of the Two Americas. In 2019 he co-founded the Montreal-based Rising Tide Foundation .


[1] The Evidence of Climate Fraud, By Marc Sheppard, American Thinker Nov. 21, 2009


[3] How do I know China wrecked the Copenhagen deal? I was in the room by Mark Lynas, London Guardian, Dec. 22, 2009

[4] ClimateGate Fallout: Russian Think Tank Says Temperature Data was ‘Cherry-Picked’, Media Research Center, December 2009

[5] China and India Lead the Way in Greening, NASA Earth Observatory, Feb. 12, 2019

[6] China and India lead in greening of the world through land-use management, Nature Sustainability, Feb. 11, 2019

[7] China’s South-to-North Water Diversion Project benefits 120 million people, CGTN, Dec. 13, 2020

[8] Watch full documentary here:

[9] To examine one of many models of CO2 generators, visit:

[10] The 1970s Ice Age Scare, by Steve Goddard, May 12, 2013


[12]  Dr. Tim Ball Defeats Michael ‘Hockey Stick’ Mann’s Climate Lawsuit, Aug. 24, 2019, Climate Change Dispatch

[13] How to Lie with Statistics, by Darrell Huff, 1954

[14] Ice age occurred when CO2 levels were 800 percent higher than now,, July 23, 2016

[15] Mars is Melting,, Aug 7, 2003

[16] To watch the full documentary, visit:

[17] A Look Into Halton Arp’s “Peculiar Galaxies” and its Implications for the World We Live In, by Matthew Ehret, Rising Tide Foundation

[18] Some Words About the Noosphere by V.I. Vernadsky, 1943, republished in 21st Century Science and Technology, Spring 2005 TS5467.SP05 (

[19] To access all of these referenced works by Vernadsky, visit:

Featured image is from EcoWatch

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


I was the CIA director. We lied, we cheated, we stole. — Mike Pompeo, former US secretary of state on how the United States conducts its business

One of the filters in the Propaganda Model propounded by professors Edward Herman and Noam Chomsky was stoking a fear of communism. [1] The establishment’s anti-communism has never abated in the United States. The elitists require a populace fearful of communism to protect their own misbegotten wealth accumulation. Thus, the bugaboo of communism must be opposed wherever it arises. At its worst, the US would wage war against communist countries such as North Korea, Viet Nam, Cambodia, and Yugoslavia. When not militarily attacked, communist governments will be demonized by a relentless campaign of disinformation designed to bring about the fall of the government and its replacement by a government amenable to the US establishment, as happened in the Soviet Union. That is the nature of imperialism and predatory capitalism.

The establishment’s anti-communism is alive and kicking in The Diplomat, a current-affairs magazine for the Asia-Pacific region. This one can readily glean from its article titled “How China Helps the Cuban Regime Stay Afloat and Shut [sic] Down Protests.” [2]

Screenshot from The Diplomat

The in-one’s-face bias of the article’s heading and the subheading (“Chinese companies have played a key part in building Cuba’s telecommunications infrastructure, a system the regime uses to control its people, just as the CCP does within its own borders.”) immediately gives pause to the discerning reader. First, regime is a tendentious term meant to delegitimize a government. Second, the subheading asserts Chinese governmental control. While it points at the means, it does not provide any evidence that the assertion holds true.

The leaning of the writers is apparent from their bios: Leland Lazarus is a speechwriter to US Southern Command’s admiral Craig Faller, and Dr Evan Ellis is a research professor of Latin American Studies at the US Army War College Strategic Studies Institute. They write, “July 11, thousands of people across Cuba took to the streets, fed up with the lack of food, basic products, medicine, and vaccines to combat COVID-19.”

This flash-in-the-pan, minor protest was allegedly orchestrated by the NED and US AID. Furthermore, the monopoly media narrative has been undermined by its use of fake and doctored images. [3]

The writers complain, “Protesters used social media to broadcast to the world what was happening, but the communist regime shut off the internet and telephone services, pulling the plug on their connection outside the island.”

A question: If your government is targeted by a barrage of disinformation from outside actors, would you allow for the disinformation to continue? Disinformation is hailed by many to be a crime against humanity and a crime against peace. And the disinformation campaigns of the US are myriad. Among them are the phantom missile attack in the Gulf of Tonkin, the non-existent WMDs in Iraq, the Viagra-fueled rapes in Libya, the Syrian government chemical-weapon attacks, and the current allegation of a genocide in Xinjiang, China. Millions of people died as a result of such disinformation.

It is clear that Lazarus and Ellis would like to knock down two communist governments that US capitalism finds antithetical, with one article. What is the crime of Cuba? The State Department Policy Planning Staff pointed to the “primary danger” the US faces, “The simple fact is that [former Cuban leader Fidel] Castro represents a successful defiance of the US…,” [4] a slap in the face to the imperialist Monroe doctrine.

The writers turned to the old-school Cuba policy advocacy of US senator Marco Rubio who tweeted:

“Expect the regime in #Cuba to block internet & cell phone service soon to prevent videos about what is happening to get out to the world… By the way, they use a system made, sold & installed by #China to control and block access to the internet in #Cuba.’”

Again, monopoly media undermines itself and senator Rubio:

“… Fox News, however, included a small detail that went largely unnoticed. As he [Rubio] was speaking about ‘brutal oppression’ by the Cuban government and hailing the protesters, the footage shown by the cable station depicted a rally by Cuban government supporters. Fox News apparently knew exactly what it was airing, since it was careful to blur the slogans that some of the activists were carrying.”

Lazarus and Ellis see a sinister hand: “China’s role in helping the regime cut off communications during the protests has exposed one of the many ways Beijing helps keep the Cuban communist regime afloat.”

Meanwhile the capitalist [5] government in the US is trying its damnedest to sink the communist government in Cuba. The US has long had an adversarial relationship with Cuba, starting with launching the Spanish-American War based on a lie concocted by US media. After the successful Cuban Revolution, the US has kept in place an economic blockade of the island. And seldom discussed is the fact that the US continues to occupy Guantánamo Bay, which Cuba has often demanded be returned to its sovereignty.

Since the article never mentions otherwise, it is assumed to be predicated upon the US and its Occidental allies not engaging in monitoring telecommunications and digital surveillance, which Edward Snowden has revealed to be patently false. This is not whataboutism because there is no evidence of a Chinese backdoor to Huawei and the company has pledged to not insert spying devices in its products; to do otherwise would be a bad business decision.

China’s Interests in Cuba

Lazarus and Ellis envision nefarious Chinese stratagems underlying their trade with Cuba:

China recognizes Cuba’s geostrategic importance. Due to its position in the Caribbean, Cuba can exert influence over the southeastern maritime approach to the United States, which contains vital sea lanes leading to ports in Miami, New Orleans, and Houston. Author George Friedman has argued that, with an increased presence in Cuba, China could potentially “block American ports without actually blocking them,” just like U.S. naval bases and installations pose a similar challenge to China around the first island chain and Straits of Malacca. Cuba’s influence in the Caribbean also makes it a useful proxy through which Beijing can pressure the four countries in the region (out of the 15 total globally) that recognize Taiwan to switch recognition.

The entire article is speculative. It is littered with words like “possible,” “can,” and “could.” The writers do not elaborate on how China might pressure the Caribbean countries. Usually countries switch allegiance to China from Taiwan based on financial inducements and not from hegemonic pressure.

Economic Support versus Economic Sanctions

The Diplomat writers argue that “China helps sustain the [Cuban] regime through economic engagement.”

What exactly do the writers intend to imply by economic engagement sustaining a regime? The logical corollary is that economic sanctions are aimed at “regime change.” Stemming from this logic, the US uses economic measures to sustain the theocratic criminality and corruption in Saudi Arabia and economic sanctions to try and change socialistic governments in, among others, Venezuela, Cuba, and China. Nonetheless, trade is what countries do to build their economies.

Regarding the US favored method of applying pressure, American academics John Mueller and Karl Mueller wrote:

“economic sanctions … may have contributed to more deaths during the post-Cold War era than all weapons of mass destruction throughout history.”

The academics further noted,

It is interesting that this loss of human life has failed to make a great impression in the United States….

Some of the inattention may derive from a lack of concern about foreign lives. Although Americans are extremely sensitive to American casualties, they – like others – often seem quite insensitive to casualties suffered by those on the opposing side, whether military or civilian.

The world views economic sanctions in a different light from the US. This was illuminated by the UN General Assembly vote demanding an end to the US economic blockade on Cuba for the 29th year in a row. Aside from two negative votes cast by the US and its Israeli ally, 184 countries voted in favor of the resolution.

Perplexingly, the writers pointed out that “China has not, however, sold Cuba any significant weapons systems, as it has done with other states in the region such as Venezuela, Ecuador, and Bolivia.”

To the extent that selling armaments is a legitimate business, then why shouldn’t China sell armaments? Venezuela, Ecuador, and Bolivia are not warring with other countries. Regarding the morality of selling weapons, consider that the US sells weapons to Saudi Arabia, a country committing genocide against Yemen and to Israel, a country that serially aggresses and economically strangulates Palestine. Are the writers not aware that the US pokes China in the eye by selling armaments to its renegade province, Taiwan, in contravention of the One-China policy to which the US shook hands?

“Digital Authoritarianism”

The writers complain about “China exporting ‘digital authoritarianism’ to illiberal regimes across the region. In Venezuela, Chinese telecommunication firm ZTE helped the Maduro regime establish the ‘fatherland ID card’ system, which it used to control not only voting, but the distribution of scarce food packages.”

As for the ID cards, the link provided by the writers notes that the “system could lead to abuses of privacy by Venezuela’s government.” Besides, which country does not require ID in order to cast a vote?

Why are the food packages scarce? What would one expect when the US has sanctions against Venezuela? It is quite disingenuous to criticize a government for food packages being scarce when that scarcity is caused by the writers’ own government. Moreover, the writers continue to use the word control pejoratively. Are the voting systems and economic distribution networks not a function of government implementation everywhere? If the writers want to insist that voting and the results are manipulated, then provide the evidence. Contrariwise, US observers endorsed the legitimacy of Venezuela’s May 2020 election; also, international observers were “unanimous in concluding that the elections were conducted fairly.” The link supplied by the writers is now dead, but the title reads: “For poor Venezuelans, a box of food may sway vote for Maduro.” While in Venezuela, a group of us visited the mercals — where food was being made affordable for the masses — where we were informed: “The Chavez administration does not want Venezuela’s food needs to be dependent on outside sources, so a concerted effort has been made to produce all foods locally.” Obviously that food independence is still a work in progress. Such progress is not made easier by being targeted by economic sanctions.

The writers make clear their anti-leftist and their anti-democracy views:

Leftist authoritarian regimes are consolidating control in Venezuela and Nicaragua. The populist left has returned to power in Bolivia in the form of the MAS party, in Argentina with the Peronists, and in Mexico with Andres Manuel Lopez Obrador and the Morena movement. In Peru, the recent election of Pedro Castillo, a teacher from Cajamarca with a radical left agenda, similarly raises alarm bells. Upcoming elections in the region raise the prospects for an even broader spread of the populist left, including the prospect of victory by Xiomara Castro in November 2021 elections in Honduras, a President Petro emerging from Colombia’s 2022 elections, or the return of Lula da Silva and his Workers’ Party in Brazil’s October 2022 elections.

Yikes! Democracy can be such a pain in the butt. As the anarchist professor Noam Chomsky wrote, “In the real world, elite dislike of democracy is the norm.” [6] For American elitists, “the United States supports democracy if, and only if, the outcomes accord with its strategic and economic objectives.” [7] That the US did and would seek “regime change” in Latin America is borne out by its Operation Condor.

Lazarus and Ellis attempt to justify the US’ machinations against Cuba and China:

China’s continued efforts to prop up the Cuban regime matters to U.S. national security. For both good and bad, Cuba is connected to the United States through geographic proximity, historical connections, and family ties. The U.S. government has long focused on violations of the freedoms and human rights of the Cuban people.

The language of Lazarus and Ellis is oleaginous. Having a focus on human rights violations is qualitatively different from opposing human rights violations and quantitatively different from supporting human rights violations, as the US did when it supported the Fulgencio Batista “regime” (to use the parlance of Lazarus and Ellis) in Cuba, which served American corporate and military interests while massacring his own people. How does the occupation of Guantánamo Bay, where prisoners of war languish in what Amnesty International called the “gulag of our time”; the Bay of Pigs fiasco; Operation Northwoods; and economic sanctions speak for American fidelity to human rights?

The writers with ties to the US military accuse China of a “malign intent against the U.S. in cyberspace.” They reason that “Cuba could also be an area from which China could gather intelligence and conduct cyberattacks against the United States.”

The writers speculate about a malign Chinese intent. Malign intent is evidenced by the Stuxnet virus that the USA and Israel inserted into the Iranian nuclear program. The authors write as if the US is not guilty of the malignity they assert that China is guilty of.

How the United States Can Respond

Lazarus and Ellis argue that the US “should concentrate on helping partners in the region to engage with China in the most healthy, productive ways. For example, an emphasis on transparency inhibits the ability to engage in corrupt backroom deals with the Chinese that benefit the elites signing the deals rather than the country as a whole.”

Helping partners and advocating for transparency is great. Is this what the US does? It would be foolish to deny that the US does not engage with corrupt rulers, rulers who siphon off the loans meant for the people of the country who are then held responsible for the odious debt to the financial lenders? [8]

Lazarus and Ellis write, “With respect to cybersecurity, the United States should similarly look to increase support to partners in protecting their citizens’ privacy and security from malign actors like China.”

Let’s leave aside the unsupported allegation that China might be a malign actor. Instead, let’s ask what kind of actor is the US? Is it a benevolent actor? This is the actor that just recently ended a two-decade war in impoverished Afghanistan — a country where the US engaged in a cycle of war crimes. Ask yourself: is it a benevolent actor who engages in disinformation campaigns against countries like China that have eradicated absolute poverty (while in the US a 2019 measure of poverty showed a rate of 10.5%) and accuse it of the scurrilous and easily debunked allegation of committing genocide in Xinjiang? Is it an upstanding country that pursues the locking away of Julian Assange for exposing US war crimes in Iraq and elsewhere?

The writers suggest part of the solution for escaping Chinese spying is cybersecurity training by the US.

Is that a good idea — trusting Uncle Sam? If you get trained by the US and use US technology, then you might end up being surveilled by the US. Ask German chancellor Angela Merkel and dozens of other world leaders.

Lazarus and Ellis persist:

While recent events in Cuba show China’s growing influence in the region, the CCP’s emphatic support of the Cuban regime’s repressive acts also highlights that it is on the wrong side of history. The U.S. must deepen partnerships with Latin American countries and Caribbean friends.

Was the US on the right side of history in Korea, Viet Nam, Cambodia, Laos, historical Palestine, Iraq, Iran, Haiti, Chile, Grenada, etc? How should countries like Guatemala, Honduras, Chile, Venezuela, Argentina, Bolivia and the other Latin American countries targeted by Operation Condor feel about a deepened partnership? And how would the peoples of Caribbean countries — e.g., Haiti, Grenada, Puerto Rico, etc — feel about a deepened partnership with the US?

Lazarus and Ellis proffer the haggard imperialist platitudes of partnership based on shared values, security, prosperity, and freedom. Which populations would they like to tempt with such an offer? To the people who experienced US-supported coups in Nicaragua, Honduras, Haiti, Bolivia, Brazil, or the masses in Venezuela subjected to unceasing American-government intrigues against their country? There is a reason why Latin Americans and Caribbean countries are leftists or turning leftward.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Kim Petersen is a former co-editor of the Dissident Voice newsletter. He can be emailed at: [email protected] Twitter: @kimpetersen. He is a frequent contributor to Global Research.


  1. See Edward S. Herman and Noam Chomsky, Manufacturing Consent: The Political Economy of the Mass Media (Pantheon Books, 2002 edition).
  2. Throughout the article all emphases within quotations have been added by this writer.
  3. See here, here, and here.
  4. Cited in Noam Chomsky, Who Rules the World? Metropolitan Books, 2014: 100.
  5. Since the writers deem it important to identify the governments in China and Cuba as communist, it would seem appropriate and balanced to identify other governments by their ideology.
  6. Chomsky, 45.
  7. Chomsky, 74.
  8. See Noam Chomsky, Profit over People: Neoliberalism and Global Order (Seven Stories Press, 1999). Chomsky describes how neoliberalism and financial institutions like the IMF and its structural adjustments have plunged the masses in developing countries into despair.

What Will Segregated Society Look Like for the Unvaxxed?

August 10th, 2021 by Dr. Joseph Mercola

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


High-profile restaurant chains like Shake Shack and Union Square Hospitality will require staff and indoor diners in New York City and Washington D.C. to show proof of COVID “vaccination,” starting September 7, 2021

Vaccinated-only bars and restaurants have also popped up in Seattle, Los Angeles, San Francisco, Oakland, Philadelphia, Boston, Atlanta, Boulder, St. Louis and New Orleans

A growing number of private companies are also requiring workers to participate in human medical experimentation or forfeit their job. High profile examples include Facebook, Google, Twitter, Lyft, Uber, Saks Fifth Avenue, The Washington Post, BlackRock, Ascension Health, Netflix, Walmart, the Walt Disney Corporation and Morgan Stanley

PayPal is vowing to block transactions and cancel accounts held by “extremists” and anyone endangering “at-risk communities,” which could include just about anything, including anti-vaccine rhetoric

CNN anchor Don Lemon has suggested unvaccinated people ought to be barred from buying food in grocery stores and have their driver’s license taken away


In 2020, the proposition that COVID-19 countermeasures would come to include forced vaccination and vaccine passports, resulting in a segregated society where only those participating in the COVID injection experiment have human rights, was labeled a wild conspiracy theory unworthy of discussion.

Fast-forward to August 2, 2021, and Forbes announces, “No Vax, No Service: Here’s Where Bars and Restaurants Across U.S. Are Requiring Proof of Vaccination.”1

No Jab, No Dining

According to Forbes,2 high-profile restaurant chains like Shake Shack and Union Square Hospitality are leading the way, requiring all staff and indoor diners in New York City and Washington D.C. to prove they’ve received the required doses of COVID-19 injections, starting September 7, 2021.

New York Mayor Bill de Blasio hailed the decision, saying others will follow — and indeed, they did, with de Blasio himself announcing August 3, 2021, that proof of vaccination will be mandatory for all indoor dining, visiting gyms and going to movie theaters in the city:3

“This is a miraculous place literally full of wonders,” Mr. de Blasio said. “If you’re vaccinated, all that’s going to open up to you. But if you’re unvaccinated, unfortunately you will not be able to participate in many things.”

Several New York City eateries were already checking vaccination status, and during the last week of July 2021, the San Francisco Bar Owners Alliance urged its 300 members to require proof of COVID-19 injection or a negative COVID test for patrons wanting to have a drink indoors.

Several Los Angeles restaurants, bars and comedy clubs are also following suit, as are more than 60 establishments in Seattle. Vaccinated-only restaurants have also popped up in Oakland, Philadelphia, Boston, Atlanta, Boulder, St. Louis and New Orleans.

Since COVID countermeasures are a global lockstep operation,4 the same segregation trend is emerging in other countries as well. On the other hand, in Florida, where I live, businesses are prohibited by law5,6 from requiring customers to show proof of participation in the COVID jab experiment.

No Jab, No Job

A growing number of private companies are also requiring workers to participate in human medical experimentation or forfeit their job. As reported by Axios,7 this includes Facebook, Google, Twitter, Lyft, Uber, Saks Fifth Avenue, The Washington Post, BlackRock, Ascension Health, Netflix, Walmart, the Walt Disney Corporation and Morgan Stanley.

As mentioned, Florida prohibits businesses from requiring customers to provide proof of COVID “vaccination,” but it does not bar companies from mandating vaccination for its employees.

For now, Disney’s jab mandate only pertains to salaried and nonunion hourly employees, but according to Yahoo! News,8 Disney is in negotiations with union officials who represent theme park employees and members of its movie and TV production crews. The goal is to extend the vaccine mandate to union employees as well.

In May 2021, the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission decreed that it is legal for companies to require employees to get the COVID shots.9 This despite the fact that the four available COVID injections are only authorized for emergency use and are as yet unlicensed.10 Testing is not expected to conclude for another two years.

No Jab, No Business

Private companies also have the right to not mandate COVID shots, of course, but standing up for workers’ right to choose could hamper their ability to conduct business at all, as PayPal is now vowing to block transactions and cancel accounts held by “extremists” and anyone endangering “at-risk communities,”11 which could include just about anything at this point.

Seeing how the White House is promoting the idea that people who question the safety and effectiveness of COVID shots are “killing people” and the Center for Countering Digital Hate (CCDH) labels anti-vaccine rhetoric as a form of hate speech, is it a stretch to suspect PayPal will start taking down the accounts of so-called “anti-vaxxers”?

Business owners and self-employed entrepreneurs who speak out against other official narratives probably face the same risk. Venture capitalist David Sacks recently commented on the situation:12

“When I helped create PayPal in 1999, it was in furtherance of a revolutionary idea. No longer would ordinary people be dependent on large financial institutions to start a business …

But now PayPal is turning its back on its original mission. It is now leading the charge to restrict participation by those it deems unworthy … [W]e are talking about … shutting down people and organizations that express views that are entirely lawful …

If history is any guide, other fintech companies will soon follow suit … When … your name lands on a No-Buy List created by a consortium of private fintech companies, to whom can you appeal?

As for the notion of building your own PayPal or Facebook: because of their gigantic network effects and economies of scale, there is no viable alternative when the whole industry works together to deny you access.

Kicking people off social media deprives them of the right to speak in our increasingly online world. Locking them out of the financial economy is worse: It deprives them of the right to make a living.

We have seen how cancel culture can obliterate one’s ability to earn an income, but now the cancelled may find themselves without a way to pay for goods and services.

Previously, cancelled employees who would never again have the opportunity to work for a Fortune 500 company at least had the option to go into business for themselves. But if they cannot purchase equipment, pay employees, or receive payment from clients and customers, that door closes on them, too.”

If this trend continues, which it probably will, might people who question COVID shots and/or refuse to participate in human experimentation be barred from having a credit card or a bank account?

No Jab, No Food

Some are promoting even more severe punishment for the unvaccinated. Yet, it’s not enough for some thought leaders that unvaccinated individuals can’t enter a bar or restaurant, and might lose their ability to send or receive money for goods and services using PayPal (and potentially other digital transaction services).

For example, CNN anchor Don Lemon recently suggested unvaccinated people ought to be barred from buying food and have their driver’s license taken away.13,14

I’d like you to conduct a thought experiment, and think this through from start to finish. What would your life be like if you were:

  1. Barred from driving
  2. Barred from working and earning a paycheck
  3. Barred from sending or receiving money online
  4. Barred from having a bank account and credit card
  5. Barred from eating food at a restaurant (assuming you somehow got the cash to pay for it)
  6. Barred from buying food in a grocery store (again, assuming you somehow got the cash to pay for it)

Are Lemon and countless others actually saying it is acceptable to make half the U.S. population homeless and starve them to death in order to, theoretically, prevent the spread of an infection that, so far, has had a 99.74% survival rate?15

Mob Morality

To understand what’s really happening and what Lemon’s rhetoric is accomplishing, I highly recommend reading Charles Eisenstein’s article “Mob Morality and the Unvaxxed.” It’s an excellent and thought-provoking piece. Here’s a few chosen excerpts:16

“We would like to think that modern societies like ours have outgrown barbaric customs like human sacrifice … we don’t actually kill people in hopes of placating the gods and restoring order. Or do we? …

Not just any victim will do as an object of human sacrifice. Victims must be, as [legal scholar Roberta] Harding puts it, ‘in, but not of, the society.’ That is why, during the Black Death, mobs roamed about murdering Jews for ‘poisoning the wells.’

The entire Jewish population of Basel was burned alive, a scene repeated throughout Western Europe. Yet this was not mainly the result of preexisting virulent hatred of Jews waiting for an excuse to erupt; it was that victims were needed to release social tension, and hatred, an instrument of that release, coalesced opportunistically on the Jews …

‘Combatting hatred’ is combatting a symptom. Scapegoats needn’t be guilty, but they must be marginal, outcasts, heretics, taboo-breakers, or infidels of one kind or another … If they are not already marginal, they must be made so …

[D]efying left-right categorization is a promising new scapegoat class, the heretics of our time: the anti-vaxxers. As a readily identifiable subpopulation, they are ideal candidates for scapegoating. It matters little whether any of these pose a real threat to society … their guilt is irrelevant to the project of restoring order through blood sacrifice …

All that is necessary is that the dehumanized class arouse the blind indignation and rage necessary to incite a paroxysm of unifying violence. More relevant to current times, this primal mob energy can be harnessed toward fascistic political ends …

Sacrificial subjects carry an association of pollution or contagion; their removal thus cleanses society. I know people in the alternative health field who are considered so unclean that if I so much as mention their names in a Tweet or Facebook post, the post may be deleted …

The public’s ready acceptance of such blatant censorship cannot be explained solely in terms of its believing the pretext of ‘controlling misinformation.’ Unconsciously, the public recognizes and conforms to the age-old program of investing a pariah subclass with the symbology of pollution …

This program is well underway toward the Covid-unvaxxed, who are being portrayed as walking cesspools of germs who might contaminate the Sanctified Brethren (the vaccinated).

My wife perused an acupuncture Facebook page today … where someone asked, ‘What is the word that comes to mind to describe unvaccinated people?’ The responses were things like ‘filth,’ ‘assholes,’ and ‘death-eaters.’ This is precisely the dehumanization necessary to prepare a class of people for cleansing …

To prepare someone for removal as the repository of all that is evil, it helps to heap upon them every imaginable calumny. Thus we hear in mainstream publications that anti-vaxxers not only are killing people, but are raging narcissists … and tantamount to domestic terrorists.”

Dangerous Territory Ahead

If deep down in your gut you sense that we’re speeding into dangerous territory, you’re probably right. The “vaccinated” public are actively encouraged and manipulated both by media and government officials into literally despising and wishing death upon the unvaccinated, and this is indeed a very dangerous thing. It breeds mob mentality devoid of reason and logic, which can have tragic consequences.

“Why is fascism so commonly associated with genocide, when as a political philosophy it is about unity, nationalism, and the merger of corporate and state power?” Eisenstein asks.17

“It is because it needs a unifying force powerful enough to sweep aside all resistance. The us of fascism requires a them. The civic-minded moral majority participates willingly, assured that it is for the greater good. Something must be done. The doubters go along too, for their own safety.

No wonder today’s authoritarian institutions know, as if instinctively, to whip up hysteria toward the … unvaccinated. Fascism taps into, exploits, and institutionalizes a deeper instinct.

The practice of creating dehumanized classes of people and then murdering them is older than history … The campaign against the unvaccinated, garbed in the white lab coat of Science, munitioned with biased data, and waving the pennant of altruism, channels a brutal, ancient impulse.”

The Constitution still offers some measure of protection in the United States, but it may be naïve to assume it will be adhered to in the long term unless we the people demand it. In Australia, military are now roaming the streets of Sydney to make sure no one strays beyond their front door, as the country has implemented one of its strictest lockdowns yet.18

Fanning the flames of anger and hatred, Prime Minister Scott Morrison has stated that vaccinated Australians might be able to regain some of their mobility once the vaccination rate reaches 70%, and broad lockdowns may be avoidable altogether if the vaccination rate hits 80%.

“If you get vaccinated, there will be special rules that apply to you,” Morrison told reporters. “Why? Because if you’re vaccinated, you present less of a public health risk.”

A rational person might question whether Morrison would actually hold true to his word. A person blinded by anger probably won’t, but will instead direct their frustration onto the holdouts that prevent the vaccination rate from reaching that magical threshold where they believe freedom will be restored.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.


1, 2 Forbes August 2, 2021

3 New York Times August 4, 2021

4 Scenarios for the Future of Technology and International Development

5 State of Florida Executive Order 21-81

6 JDsupra May 13, 2021

7 Axios July 30, 2021

8 Yahoo! July 30, 2021

9 Axios May 28, 2021

10 Emergency Use Authorization

11 NY Post July 29, 2021

12 July 30, 2021

13 Fox News July 31, 2021

14 Air.TV Lemon Says … Unvaccinated Can’t Work or Have a Driver’s License

15 Annals of Internal Medicine September 2, 2020 DOI: 10.7326/M20-5352

16, 17 Charles Eisenstein substack August 1, 2021

18 NPR July 30, 2021

Featured image is from Mercola

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


The Taliban is trying its best to distract Kabul from the defense of the capitals of the southern Kandahar and Helmand provinces as well as in western Herat, which it has been trying to take over for several weeks now. The group has stepped up attacks on cities throughout northern Afghanistan, so far successfully.

Afghan National Security Forces claimed counter-offensive operations in the cities as Taliban militants mount around the outskirts, and civilians are fleeing the areas.

People suffer not only from the clashes, but also from regular air strikes on targets inside the cities, as Taliban militants often hide in civilian settlements. On August 8, a Helmand provincial council member said government air attacks had damaged a health clinic and a high school in Lashkar Gah.

At the very moment when the government forces are mainly concentrated on the protection of the large southern cities, the Taliban wastes no time and takes control over other provincial capitals one by one

The first provincial capital came under the Taliban’s control on August 6th. The city of Zaranj in Afghanistan’s western Nimruz province, located on the border with Iran and Pakistan fell almost without a fight. Taliban fighters entered the city in U.S. Humvee vehicles taken from the Afghan forces. They’re now used to patrol the streets of Zaranj.

The next day, the city of Sheberghan in northern Jawzjan province became the second provincial capital to be taken by the Taliban. According to the deputy governor, government forces and officials had retreated to the airport on the outskirts of the city, where they were preparing to defend themselves.

On August 7th, the Taliban launched an advance in the city of Kunduz in north-eastern Afghanistan.According to local reports, the Afghan security forces retreated to the airport area, preparing for a counter-offensive.

Even the air support from the U.S. failed to prevent the loss of the city. U.S. B-52s bombed targets in Kunduz, starting major fires. During the day of fighting, some 50 to 70 civilians were reportedly killed.

On August 8, the town of Sar-e-Pol in northern Afghanistan fell under Taliban’s control. Government officials and the remaining forces had retreated to the army barracks about 3km from the city.

The city of Taloqan, the capital of Takhar province was taken over by the Taliban late on August 8.

The last but not the least on the list of the Taliban’s victories was the city of Aibak, the capital of Samangan in northern Afghanistan that fell in the early hours of August 9. The Taliban claimed that a commander and former member of parliament Mohammad Asif Nabi Jan had joined the Mujahideen along with his eight armed men.

The provincial capital of Balkh Province, Mazar-e Sharif, and the town of Gardez, the center of Paktia, in northern Afghanistan are likely to become the next trophies for the Taliban, as fierce clashes broke out in the cities’ outskirts.

Amid the Taliban’s advance, the U.S. and Great Britiain urged their citizens to leave Afghanistan immediately using available commercial flight options. Washington condemned the Taliban’s violent new offensive against Afghan cities.

The United Nations claimed that Afghanistan was descending into a situation of catastrophe so serious that it would have few, if any, parallels in this century.

Meanwhile, the MSM sound the alarm, forgetting that the entire responsibility for the current situation in Afghanistan lies with the United States and its satellites.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.


PayPal: [email protected], or via:

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on Video: Taliban Tightens Its Grip in North While Kabul Retains Last Strongholds in South
  • Tags: ,

Does the Virus Exist? The SARS-CoV-2 Has Not Been Isolated? “Biggest Fraud in Medical History”

By Prof Michel Chossudovsky, August 10, 2021

How did Big Pharma manage to develop a vaccine (sponsored by the WHO, GAVI, the Gates Foundation, et al.) with a mandate “to protect people” against a virus which has not been isolated/ purified?

How Myanmar Fits into China’s New Silk Roads

By Pepe Escobar, August 10, 2021

How Beijing approaches the Myanmar maze is conditioned by four variables: natural gas; water; the drug trade; and the fractious clashes between the Tatmadaw and a dizzying patchwork of over 135 ethnic minorities.

Video: Prominent Pathologist: What These Jabs Do to the Brain and Other Organs

By Dr. Ryan Cole, August 10, 2021

Member of America’s Frontline Doctors Dr. Ryan Cole provides a scientific clarification of what these injections do in the head and other organs of the vaccinated people.

Tyranny: The Deadliest Pandemic

By Michael J. Talmo, August 09, 2021

The pandemic I’m talking about is tyranny—the need to have power over others—to strip others of all they own including their dignity. In the case of COVID-19, with gene altering vaccines, they even want to strip us of what it means to be human.

Video: Remember Hiroshima: “People Became Nothing, … People Dying All Around Me”

By Sumner Jules Glimcher and Prof Michel Chossudovsky, August 09, 2021

Within 9 seconds one hundred thousand people were killed or doomed… And that’s what is on the drawing board of the Pentagon on a much larger scale, with a trillion dollar nuclear weapons program.

Canada Adds Bell’s Palsy Warning to Pfizer COVID Vaccine

By Great Game India, August 09, 2021

So far in Canada, “there has been a total of 206 reports of Bell’s Palsy following a Pfizer vaccination,” the health agency told Global News in an email Friday.

Physician Speaks Out Against ‘Vaccine Mandates for All’ — Especially Children and Those with Natural Immunity

By Megan Redshaw, August 09, 2021

In an interview with U.S. News & World Report, Dr. Marty Makary said the CDC’s relentless focus on vaccine-induced immunity and its “demonizing” of those who choose not to get the vaccine make the agency “the most slow, reactionary, political CDC in American history.”

Florida Governor Ron DeSantis Is Defending Freedom by ‘Getting in the Way’ of COVID Authoritarians

By Jordan Schachtel, August 09, 2021

n an ideal nation, the most important duty of an elected politician involves ensuring the protection of their constituents’ individual rights. During COVID Mania, the political forces for tyranny in America have attempted to contaminate this sacred ideal — under the guise of keeping us safe from a virus — by running roughshod over every aspect of our lives.

The “COVID Pandemic” Is a Money-making Hoax and Perhaps Serves Darker Agendas

By Dr. Paul Craig Roberts, August 09, 2021

Big Pharma apparently  also funds Coronavirus World Updates which pours out lies to counter the overwhelming evidence that can no longer be suppressed about Covid and the ineffectiveness and danger of the vaccines.

Data Reveal the Truth About COVID Countermeasures. “What’s Behind the Covid Jab Narrative”

By Dr. Joseph Mercola, August 09, 2021

Data from Israel, where the vast majority of the population has been injected with the Pfizer mRNA concoction, show those “vaccinated” against COVID-19 and unvaccinated have the same infection rate, regardless of age.

German Chief Pathologist Sounds Alarm on Fatal Vaccine Injuries

By Free West Media, August 09, 2021

The director of the Pathological Institute of the University of Heidelberg, Peter Schirmacher, has carried out over forty autopsies on people who had died within two weeks of their vaccination. Schirmacher expressed alarm over his findings.

Dr. McCullough: COVID Vaccines Have Already Killed Up to 50,000 Americans, According to Whistleblowers

By Debra Heine, August 09, 2021

In an extraordinary interview last week, Dr. Peter McCullough, an American professor of Medicine and Vice Chief of Internal Medicine at Baylor University, declared that the world has been subjected to a form of bioterrorism, and that the suppression of early treatments for COVID-19—such as hydroxychloroquine— “was tightly linked to the development of a vaccine.”

  • Posted in NO READ MORE LINK
  • Comments Off on Selected Articles: Does the Virus Exist? The SARS-CoV-2 Has Not Been Isolated? “Biggest Fraud in Medical History”

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.



Hell is Empty and the Devils are All Here, William Shakespeare, The Tempest, 1610- 1611



There is a sequence of outright lies and fabrications used to justify far-reaching policy decisions which in the course of the last 18 months are literally destroying people’s lives Worldwide. 

“Fake science” is used to justify confinement, social distancing, the face mask, the prohibition of social gatherings,  cultural and sports events, the closure of economic activity, all of which are upheld as a means to repealing the “killer virus”. 

Who is this “Killer Virus” which has been personified by both the media and our governments, held responsible for triggering economic and social chaos Worldwide? 

You might recall that at the height of the February 2020 financial collapse, “V the Virus” was held responsible for the largest stock market crash since 1929. 

Has the “Killer Virus” been Identified. Has SARS-CoV-2 been Isolated?

This article will review this contentious issue starting at the outset of the crisis in January 2020. Part of this analysis is based on research conducted in early 2020. 

The central question raised in this review is the following: is there reliable evidence provided by the WHO and national  health authorities that the alleged SARS-CoV-2  virus has been isolated/purified  from an “unadulterated sample taken from a diseased patient”? 

While the alleged virus was initially defined as the 2019 novel coronavirus (2019-nCoV) in January 2020, the World Health Organization (WHO) did not have in its possession details regarding the isolation/purification and identity of  2019-nCoV.

And because details concerning isolation / purification were not available, the WHO decided to “customize” The Real Time Reverse Transcription Polymerase Chain Reaction (rRT-PCR) Test using the alleged “similar” 2003 SARS virus (subsequently renamed SARS-1) as “a point of reference” for detecting genetic fragments of the novel 2019-nCoV. 

What this decision entails is that novel 2019-CoV-2 is NOT a novel virus. It was categorized by the Chinese authorities and the WHO as “similar” to the 2003 SARS-CoV as well as to MERS. 

2003 SARS-CoV was subsequently renamed SARS-CoV-1.

History: Isolation of the Virus 

Chinese Health Authorities

The Chinese authorities announced on January 7, 2020 that “a new type of virus”  had been identified  “similar to the one associated with SARS and MERS” (related report , not original Chinese government source).  The underlying method is described below:

We prospectively collected and analysed data on patients with laboratory-confirmed 2019-nCoV infection by real-time RT-PCR and next-generation sequencing.

Data were obtained with standardised data collection forms shared by WHO and the International Severe Acute Respiratory and Emerging Infection Consortium from electronic medical records. (emphasis added)

The  following article entitled A new coronavirus associated with human respiratory disease in China(Nature, February 3, 2021) was among the first to report on China’s novel coronavirus:

…[We] collected bronchoalveolar lavage fluid (BALF) and performed deep meta-transcriptomic sequencing. The clinical specimen was handled in a biosafety level 3 laboratory at Shanghai Public Health Clinical Center. Total RNA was extracted from 200 μl of BALF and a meta-transcriptomic library was constructed for pair-end (150-bp reads) sequencing using an Illumina MiniSeq as previously described 4,6,7,8.
In total, we generated 56,565,928 sequence reads that were de novo-assembled and screened for potential aetiological agents. 
The genome sequence of this virus, as well as its termini, were determined and confirmed by reverse-transcription PCR (RT–PCR)10 and 5′/3′ rapid amplification of cDNA ends (RACE), respectively. This virus strain was designated as WH-Human 1 coronavirus (WHCV) (and has also been referred to as ‘2019-nCoV’) and its whole genome sequence (29,903 nt) has been assigned GenBank accession number MN908947.
The viral genome organization of WHCV was determined by sequence alignment to two representative members of the genus Betacoronavirus: a coronavirus associated with humans (SARS-CoV Tor2, GenBank accession number AY274119) [2003] and a coronavirus associated with bats (bat SL-CoVZC45, GenBank accession number MG772933) . (Nature, February 3, 2020)

It is unclear from the above quotations as well as from the documents consulted, whether the Chinese health authorities undertook an isolation / purification of  a patient’s specimen.

US Centre for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC)

Following the Chinese announcement  on the 28th of January 2020, the US Centre for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) stated that the novela corona virus had been isolated.  The CDC statement dated January 28th, 2020 (updated December 2020) is unequivocal:

SARS-CoV-2, the virus that causes COVID-19, was isolated in the laboratory and is available for research by the scientific and medical community.



  • On January 20, 2020, CDC received a clinical specimen collected from the first reported U.S. patient infected with SARS-CoV-2. CDC immediately placed the specimen into cell culture to grow a sufficient amount of virus for study.
  • On February 2, 2020, CDC generated enough SARS-CoV-2 grown in cell culture to distribute to medical and scientific researchers.
  • On February 4, 2020, CDC shipped SARS-CoV-2 to the BEI Resources Repository.
  • An article discussing the isolation and characterization of this virus specimen is available in Emerging Infectious Diseases.

One important way that CDC has supported global efforts to study and learn about SARS-CoV-2 in the laboratory was by growing the virus in cell culture and ensuring that it was widely available. Researchers in the scientific and medical community can use virus obtained from this work in their studies.

SARS-CoV-2 strains supplied by CDC and other researchers can be requested, free, from the Biodefense and Emerging Infections Research (BEI) Resources Repositoryexternal icon by established institutions that meet BEI requirements. These requirements include maintaining appropriate facilities and safety programs, as well as having the appropriate expertise. BEI supplies organisms and reagents to the broader community of microbiology and infectious disease researchers.  (Emphasis added).

See also related study which was posted on the CDC website.

The CDC Acknowledges that SARS-CoV-2 has not been  Isolated.


The official CDC document, (dated July 21, 2021) entitled “CDC 2019-Novel Coronavirus (2019-nCoV) Real-Time RT-PCR Diagnostic Panel reads as follows:

Since no quantified virus isolates of the 2019-nCoV were available for CDC use at the time the test was developed [January 2020] and this study conducted, assays designed for detection of the 2019-nCoV RNA were tested with characterized stocks of in vitro transcribed full length RNA (N gene; GenBank accession: MN908947.2) of known titer (RNA copies/µL) spiked into a diluent consisting of a suspension of human A549 cells and viral transport medium (VTM) to mimic clinical specimen. (emphasis added, page 40)

Compare the above statement to the CDC January 28th, 2020 advisory confirming the isolation of SARS-CoV-2:

On January 20, 2020, CDC received a clinical specimen collected from the first reported U.S. patient infected with SARS-CoV-2. CDC immediately placed the specimen into cell culture to grow a sufficient amount of virus for study.


See the analysis of CDC responses in the section below on Freedom of Information Requests.

The World Health Organization (WHO) Did Not Undertake The Isolation / Purification of a Specimen

From the documents quoted below, the Chinese authorities did not provide the WHO with a specimen of isolated /  purified  SARS-CoV-2.

And because details concerning isolation were not available, the WHO  decided to “customize” its Real Time Reverse Transcription Polymerase Chain Reaction (rRT-PCR)  test using a so-called isolate of the “similar” 2003 SARS corona virus (subsequently renamed SARS-CoV-1) as “a point of reference” (or proxy) for detecting genetic fragments of the 2019 SARS-CoV-2.

The WHO sought the advice of   Victor M. Corman, Christian Drosten, et al  of the Berlin Virology Institute at Charité Hospital. The study entitled “Detection of 2019 novel coronavirus (2019-nCoV) by real-time RT-PCR” ) was subsequently submitted to the WHO. 

While Corman, Drosten et al’s study confirmed that “several viral genome sequences had been released”, in the case of 2019-nCoV, “virus isolates or samples from infected patients were not available …

The recommendations to the WHO were as follows:

“The genome sequences suggest presence of a virus closely related to the members of a viral species termed severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS)-related CoV, a species defined by the agent of the 2002/03 outbreak of SARS in humans [3,4].

 We report on the the establishment and validation of a diagnostic workflow for 2019-nCoV screening and specific confirmation [using the RT-PCR test], designed in absence of available virus isolates or original patient specimens. Design and validation were enabled by the close genetic relatedness to the 2003 SARS-CoV, and aided by the use of synthetic nucleic acid technology.”  (Eurosurveillance, January 23, 2020, emphasis added).

What this bold statement suggests is that the isolation / purification of 2019-nCoV was not required and that “validation” would be enabled by “the close genetic relatedness to the 2003-SARS-CoV.”

The recommendations of the Corman- Drosten study (supported and financed by the Gates Foundation) pertaining to the use of the RT-PCR test applied to 2019-nCoV were then firmly endorsed by the Director General of the WHO, Dr. Tedros Adhanom. (For further details see Michel Chossudovsky, E-Book, Chapter II).

Freedom of Information: No Record of SARS-CoV-2 Isolation-Purification

An important ongoing and detailed investigative project by Christine Massey, M.Sc. of Ontario, Canada is entitled:

Freedom of Information Requests: Health/ Science Institutions Worldwide “Have No Record” of SARS-COV-2 Isolation/Purification  (work in progress since 2020)

by Fluoride Free Peel, August 04, 2021

A related text shows the list of institutions contacted

90 Health/Science Institutions Globally All Failed to Cite Even 1 Record of “SARS-COV-2” Purification, by Anyone, Anywhere, Ever 

By Fluoride Free Peel, August 04, 2021

The investigative report provides detailed documentation based on Freedom of Information (FOI) requests addressed to ninety Health /Science institutions in a large number of countries.

The responses to these requests confirm that there is no record of isolation / purification of SARS-CoV-2 “having been performed by anyone, anywhere, ever.”

“The 90 Health /Science institutions that have responded thus far have provided and/or cited, in total, zero such records:

Our requests [under “freedom of information”] have not been limited to records of isolation performed by the respective institution, or limited to records authored by the respective institution, rather they were open to any records describing “COVID-19 virus” (aka “SARS-COV-2”) isolation/purification performed by anyone, ever, anywhere on the planet.”



The Centre for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC)

The CDC was contacted by the author of this report in the form of four separate requests: November 2, 2020, March 1, 2021, March 3, 2021, which are reviewed below:


On November 2, 2020.

The CDC admitted they have no records of actual isolation/purification by anyone, anywhere, ever, by any method” :

The CDC again made clear that they still have no records of “SARS-COV-2” isolation performed by anyone, anywhere on the planet, ever… just not in so many words. Instead, the CDC absurdly implied that isolation/purification of “SARS-COV-2” would require the replication of a “virus” without host cells and thus is impossible.  (The request had nothing to do with replication.)

CDC again failed to provide/cite any records describing “SARS-COV-2” isolation/purification by anyone anywhere ever… but would no longer simply say so (as they did on November 2nd); instead they gave song and dance citing the study by Harcourt et al. which is the same one posted on CDC’s website:

June 7, 2021:

CDC admitted they have no record of “SARS-COV-2” purification from a patient sample via maceration, filtration and use of an ultracentrifuge, by anyone, anywhere, ever:

Conclusive Results of the Investigation

What the author of this incisive and detailed report has confirmed is that:

Every institution has failed to provide even 1 record describing the isolation aka purification of any “COVID-19 virus” directly from a patient sample that was not first adulterated with other sources of genetic material. (Those other sources are typically monkey kidney aka “Vero” cells and fetal bovine serum).

Here are 5 compilation pdfs containing FOI responses from 79 institutions in 22 countries/jurisdictions, re the isolation/purification/existence of “SARS-COV-2”, as well as emails from authors of studies that claimed to have “isolated the virus” and an email from the Head of the Consultant Laboratory for Diagnostic Electron Microscopy of Infectious Pathogens at Germany’s Robert Koch Institut, last updated July 13, 2021

Screenshot of a selected responses are provided below : New Zealand, Canada, UK.

Consult the full archive of letters and responses. This work was undertaken over a period of more than 12 months.

Response Public Health England

It follows from the above detailed study that there is no evidence that the SARS-CoV-2 virus has been isolated/purified from a patient’s sample, as  evidenced by the responses “under freedom of information” (FOI) from some 90 health / science institutions Worldwide.  

Thus far (July 9, 2021) 27 Canadian institutions have provided their responses. (click to access list)

Republic of Ireland:  “The Virus does not Exist”

“⁣Gemma O’Doherty is an Investigative Journalist in Ireland.

“This Irish Investigation into Covid shows that The Department of Health refuses to confirm the existence of a “virus” in writing. Confirmation that the virus was never isolated.”


“As part of our legal action we had been demanding the evidence that this virus actually exists [as well as] evidence that lock downs actually have any impact on the spread of viruses; that face-masks are safe, and do deter the spread of viruses – They don’t. No such studies exist; that social distancing is based in science – It isn’t. it’s made up; that contact tracing has any bearing on the spread of a virus – of course it doesn’t. This organization here – is making it up as they go along.” – Gemma O’Doherty 


Isolation of the Virus. The Legal Battle in Alberta. Patrick King

Patrick King. The Virus Has Not Been Isolated! “No I Did Not Win The Court Case”. “They Do Not Have the Evidence”.

The following video features Patrick King in his legal Battle against the Alberta Government.

There are a lot of people in Alberta and around the World who are Fighting against the Big Lie. 
Video:  Patrick King embodies the Truth. 


Concluding Remarks: “Biggest Medical Fraud in World History”

SARS-CoV-2 has not been isolated. Does the virus Exist?

Neither the Chinese authorities nor the CDC, the WHO, national governments, scientific /  health authorities have provided evidence that SARS-CoV-2 has been  isolated /purified.

Based on the investigative research of Christine Massey we have access to the responses of numerous governments and health authorities, including that provided by the Republic of Ireland to journalist Gemma O’Doherty.

What this means is that the entire covid narrative falls flat.

We have been systematically misled.

Everything you have been told by your governments is a lie, a complexity of lies and falsehoods.

There is no pandemic. The isolation / purification of the virus has not been undertaken.

All the policies adopted by governments worldwide allegedly to “save lives” are illegal, socially destructive and in violation of fundamental human rights.

These policies have been instrumental in “destroying people’s lives”.

Dr. Stephen Frost  refers to the alleged “Covid pandemic” as The Biggest Medical Fraud in World History”.

From the outset in January 2020, the flawed and invalid RT-PCR test was used to “detect” the alleged 2019 SARS-CoV-2 virus,  despite the fact that details regarding the isolation/purification of the original virus were not available.

All far-reaching policy decisions imposed on people Worlwide were based on a data bank of fake  case positives coupled with false mortality data pertaining to Covid-19 related deaths.

Curbing the alleged SARS-CoV-2 pandemic through the imposition of face masks, social distancing, closing down of national economies has absolutely no validity,

The original strain of SARS-CoV-2 has not be isolated /purified: How does that affect the process of so-called “detection” of the “deadly variants” of the original virus?

Mortality and Morbidity: While there is “No Killer Virus”, there is a “Killer Vaccine”.

While the SARS-CoV-2 virus is presented by the media and the governments as a “killer virus” (when in fact the WHO and CDC describe it as “similar to seasonal influenza”), a totally invalid and dysfunctional Covid -19 vaccine is currently being imposed on the entire population of Planet Earth: 7.9 billion people.

It’s a multibillion dollar endeavour with Pfizer in the lead, establishing a near Worldwide monopoly for the sale and distribution of the mRNA killer vaccine.

Important Question: 

How did Big Pharma manage to develop a vaccine (sponsored by the WHO, GAVI, the Gates Foundation, et al) with a mandate “to protect people” against a virus which has not been isolated/ purified  from an “unadulterated sample taken from a diseased patient”?

Vaccine in relation to What? The virus has not been identified.

Moreover, 2019 SARS-CoV-2 has been categorized as similar to the 2003 SARS-CoV which means that the 2019 SARS-CoV-2 is not a novel virus. 

The legitimacy of the Covid vaccine project hinges upon the validity of hundreds of thousands of RT-PCR fake positive cases Worldwide combined with fake Covid related mortality data.

Big Pharma’s mRNA vaccine has resulted in countless deaths and injuries Worldwide which are barely reported by the mainstream media. 

While we do not have figures for the entire Planet, the latest official figures for the European Union and the U.S are revealing. Bear in mind they vastly underestimate the real trends in vaccin related mortality and morbidity:

EU/EEA/Switzerland to 31 July 2021 – 20,595 Covid-19 injection related deaths and over 1.94 million injuries, per EudraVigilance Database.

UK to 21 July 2021 – 1,517 Covid-19 injection related deaths and over 1.1 million injuries, per MHRA Yellow Card Scheme.

USA to 23 July 2021 – 11,940 Covid-19 injection related deaths and over 2.4 million injuries, per VAERS database.

TOTAL for EU/UK/USA – 34,052 Covid-19 injection related deaths and over 5.46 million injuries reported as at 1 August 2021

Nota Bene: It is important to be aware that the official figures above (reported to the health authorities) are but a small percentage of the actual figures. Furthermore, people continue to die (and suffer injury) from the injections with every day which passes.  (D4CE

So why are governments pressuring people to get vaccinated?

Heads of State and heads of government Worldwide are being pressured, bribed, coopted and/or threatened by powerful financial interests into accepting the Covid vaccine consensus. The vaccine passport is the endgame, which constitutes a transition towards digital tyranny.

The study and reports analyzed in this article should be used to confront politicians as well as inform and sensitize people in towns and villages, across the land, nationally and internationally.

At this stage in our history, solidarity is absolutely fundamental. 

Does the Virus Exist?

The governments and the WHO do not have a Leg to Stand On. And neither does Bill Gates.

What we must seek is to confront a very fragile covid-19 consensus, which is based on fraud and deceit.


See also Michel Chossudovsky’s E-book (10 chapters) entitled:

The 2020-21 Worldwide Corona Crisis: Destroying Civil Society, Engineered Economic Depression, Global Coup d’État and the “Great Reset”

By Prof Michel Chossudovsky,


Author’s Note. I remain indebted to Christine Massey for her extensive research and investigation on the issue of isolation /purification.


About the Author

Michel Chossudovsky is an award-winning author, Professor of Economics (emeritus) at the University of Ottawa, Founder and Director of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG), Montreal, Editor of Global Research.

He has undertaken field research in Latin America, Asia, the Middle East, sub-Saharan Africa and the Pacific and has written extensively on the economies of developing countries with a focus on poverty and social inequality. He has also undertaken research in Health Economics (UN Economic Commission for Latin America and the Caribbean (ECLAC),  UNFPA, CIDA, WHO, Government of Venezuela, John Hopkins International Journal of Health Services (1979, 1983)

He is the author of twelve books including The Globalization of Poverty and The New World Order (2003), America’s “War on Terrorism” (2005),  The Globalization of War, America’s Long War against Humanity (2015).

He is a contributor to the Encyclopaedia Britannica.  His writings have been published in more than twenty languages. In 2014, he was awarded the Gold Medal for Merit of the Republic of Serbia for his writings on NATO’s war of aggression against Yugoslavia. He can be reached at [email protected]

See Michel Chossudovsky, Biographical Note

Michel Chossudovsky’s Articles on Global Research

  • Posted in English, Mobile
  • Comments Off on Does the Virus Exist? SARS-CoV-2 Has Not Been Isolated? “Biggest Fraud in Medical History”

How Myanmar Fits into China’s New Silk Roads

August 10th, 2021 by Pepe Escobar

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


You don’t argue with the Tatmadaw – the Myanmar Armed Forces. It’s always their way, or the highway. Since the mid-20th century, the Chinese have come to understand it quite well.

How Beijing approaches the Myanmar maze is conditioned by four variables: natural gas; water; the drug trade; and the fractious clashes between the Tatmadaw and a dizzying patchwork of over 135 ethnic minorities.

Each Myanmar ethnic group exhibits its own peculiar history, culture and language. They control vast territories, whole industries and serious militias. Myanmar’s two-third majority is represented by the Bamar – also known as the Lowland Burmese. The Tatmadaw is largely a Lowland Burmese army – in perennial conflict with that large ethnic jigsaw puzzle.

The ethnic minorities live mostly in the hills and along Myanmar’s porous jungle borders. Myanmar is divided into seven states – named after the seven largest ethnic groups: Kachin, Chin, Karenni, Karen, Mon, Shan and Rakhine. Alliances tend to be quite fragile, but historically the Chinese have been inclined to support a few of them in their fight against the Tatmadaw.

Drug trade in Myanmar is a virtually impenetrable matryoshka – with most of these groups connected across the Golden Triangle to partners in China, Thailand and Laos, and on top of it competing against each other.

The Shan traditionally have used huge profits in the drug trade to buy an array of weapons. There is a wealth of competing Shan groups, among them the army of the late, notoriously flamboyant drug lord Khun Sa, known as “The Opium King of Burma”; the former headhunters that compose the Wa tribe; and a bunch of Kokang Chinese who form the eastern Shan State army.

The opium/heroin business – and much of the ya ba (amphetamine) trafficking – in the Golden Triangle is now largely controlled by the much feared United Wa State Army: a 20,000-strong ultra-hardcore militia, one of the most powerful on the planet, complete with their private collection of surface-to-air missiles.

And that brings us to the Chinese angle – because many of these ethnic potentates, from Khun Sa to Kyi Myint, a.k.a. Zhang Zhiming, a former head of the Communist Party of Burma, have forged very close relations with Chinese Triads.

Yet what does the central government in Myanmar have to do with the heart of the action in the Golden Triangle? Not much. The Tatmadaw may strike the odd peace deal with these unruly actors, but they usually don’t last long.

What the Tatmadaw did over these past decades was a crash course on business – learning the ropes about post-Mao China. That’s how they evolved into a major corporate empire – much more than an army.

Myanmar was already on the front line when sections of the People’s Liberation Army (PL) in China got into business. For instance, Yunnan province in southern China was the operating base for the top three heroin Triad families. So the first step was Burma linked to the Chinese triads as the logistical arm of the Golden Triangle drug trade. The next step featured China building railways to link Yunnan to Burma/Myanmar.

Oil and gas star as the next piece of the puzzle. As France’s Total started to expand their initial oil and gas exploits off Rakhine – formerly known as Arakan state – the Chinese had the foresight to invest in a long oil and gas pipeline linking it to Yunnan. From Beijing’s point of view, what really matters is this Sino-Myanmar oil and gas pipeline from the Bay of Bengal to southern China – with the Tatmadaw in charge of security.

While China invests in copper mines and dams, but arguably its key investment in Myanmar is a new deep-water port on the Bay of Bengal, with the accompanying Kyaukphyu Special Free Trade Zone. The port and the pipeline interconnect, representing the Myanmar backbone of the vitally important Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) Southeast Asia corridor.

And that brings us to the intractable Rohingya problem.

China’s absolute priority is to protect the new port plus the Special Free Trade Zone being built in Rakhine.

For quite a while the Myanmar government’s income – now controlled by the Tatmadaw – has depended on the oil/gas from onshore and offshore operations in Rakhine as well as the rail/road connectivity.

The Chinese for their part are in close touch with the Kachin Army and the Kokang ethnic group. If the going gets tough, the plan is to use them as well as the Arakan Army, active in the region, to manage the Tatmadaw in case they start having funny ideas. The only thing that matters for the Chinese is the BRI corridor and the Rohingya find themselves caught in the middle of this serious power play.

The Myanmar puzzle is made even more complex by the issue of water. The Beijing leadership knows very well how strategic Myanmar is in terms of solving China’s critical water imbalance. China, with 20% of the world’s population, can count on only 7% of the world’s fresh water. And 80% of China’s water is in the south, while over 700 million Chinese and two-thirds of its farmland are in the north.

The solution has been to build 11 of the world’s largest hydroelectric dams on the key rivers which flow towards China’s neighbors. And this has given rise to dramatic problems, especially in the case of the Mekong, where every region below the dams, in Myanmar, Laos, Thailand, Cambodia, and Vietnam, has been extremely handicapped. And the issue is far from over: 11 more dams will be built in the lower Mekong, in Laos and Cambodia.

The relationship between Beijing and the Tatmadaw was never a bed of roses. Overall, the Chinese were seen with much suspicion at the Ministry of Foreign Relations level during the NLD years, while most Tatmadaw Generals admire China’s economic power. Beijing’s immutable diplomatic law amounts to non-interference in the domestic policies of its partners – so it has refrained from weighing in on whether the military coup earlier this year was actually not really a coup, as the Tadmadaw argues.

Facts on the ground spell out the Tatdadaw making a lot of money over the years by collecting fees and owning shares in Chinese deals struck in the ethnic regions. At the same time the Tatmadaw know that the Chinese, even indirectly, provide military support to quite a few militias. And drug kingpins are only able to operate smoothly across the Golden Triangle because the Chinese allow it.

So, the relationship is undoubtedly an uneasy one. A great deal of Chinese influence in Myanmar was somewhat restricted during the NLD government. Now the whole situation is in limbo. Yet Beijing never takes its eyes off the Big Prize: BRI corridor projects should never be in danger, and Myanmar will always be an inextricable part of the New Silk Roads.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

This article was originally published on Inside Over.

Pepe Escobar, born in Brazil, is a correspondent and editor-at-large at Asia Times and columnist for Consortium News and Strategic Culture in Moscow. Since the mid-1980s he’s lived and worked as a foreign correspondent in London, Paris, Milan, Los Angeles, Singapore, Bangkok. He has extensively covered Pakistan, Afghanistan and Central Asia to China, Iran, Iraq and the wider Middle East. Pepe is the author of Globalistan – How the Globalized World is Dissolving into Liquid War; Red Zone Blues: A Snapshot of Baghdad during the Surge. He was contributing editor to The Empire and The Crescent and Tutto in Vendita in Italy. His last two books are Empire of Chaos and 2030. Pepe is also associated with the Paris-based European Academy of Geopolitics. When not on the road he lives between Paris and Bangkok.

He is a frequent contributor to Global Research.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Brazil and the US seem to be getting closer once again, after a short period of diplomatic tensions. Recently, US officials expressed their support for Brazil to be promoted to the status of NATO’s global partner. Due to Biden’s criticisms against Bolsonaro (motivated by the environmental crimes committed in the Amazon Forest), the Brazilian government reversed a part of its anti-China narrative in 2021 and allowed Huawei’s participation in the Brazilian 5G market. Now, apparently, the US wants to “regain” Brazil as a regional ally, aiming to prevent China’s advance into South America. Also, with Latin America gradually returning to the center of Washington’s geopolitical interests, Brazil’s role as a US satellite becomes progressively more important, considering Brazil’s strategic value in building an encirclement strategy against Venezuela.

Last week, a committee of American officials traveled to Brazil’s capital, Brasilia, to initiate a series of strategic dialogues with representatives of the Brazilian government. On the occasion, US National Security Adviser Jake Sullivan demonstrated the US support for Brazil to become a global NATO partner. The country’s entry into the Western military alliance’s cooperation program was discussed between Sullivan and Brazilian Defense Minister Walter Braga Netto. Subsequently, Sullivan met with President Bolsonaro himself, reinforcing bilateral diplomacy, offering the proposal and showing his personal support for this measure.

Sullivan imposed only one condition on Brazil: the return of the veto to Huawei. Chinese participation in the Brazilian 5G is considered a frontal threat to American interests as it represents an expansion of the influence of one of Washington’s biggest geopolitical rivals into an extremely strategic territory within the American continent itself. For the US, banishing China from the central and southern subcontinents is crucial to ensuring its regional hegemony – and it is precisely regional hegemony that the US is trying to consolidate by growing NATO’s presence in South America. In this sense, the American adviser’s message was clear: one thing depends on the other – to enter the NATO program, Brazil needs to ban the Chinese company, without a third way.

To avoid conflicts and try to maintain the current 5G market scenario, Brazilian officials tried to negotiate some alternatives, proposing ways to limit the Chinese presence without resorting to a total ban, but Sullivan denied any negotiations in this regard. Later, the American Embassy reaffirmed the adviser’s words and published a note showing that it was very concerned about the national security of countries that allow Huawei to act (maintaining Donald Trump’s narrative on the use of 5G services for espionage by Beijing). The Chinese Embassy in Brasilia vehemently repudiated the American attitude and also published a note, stating that the Americans want to “sabotage the Sino-Brazilian partnership”, in addition to saying that the US is a “hacker empire” and the real threat to global cybersecurity.

Within the Bolsonaro team, there are many different opinions on the topic. In fact, Bolsonaro personally believes in all anti-China narratives and supports the banishment of Huawei, but he had to give up his ideologically motivated plans and think pragmatically in recent months as he no longer had American backing. Now, this backing resurfaces and then the Brazilian president will have to decide between maintaining the status quo or resuming the policy of automatic alignment with Washington. The Brazilian Intelligence Agency is also in favor of the ban because it fears possible threats to national security, but the Armed Forces, on the other hand, are not unanimously in favor of the measure, as they know that it is important for national defense to maintain peaceful relations with the US rivals. With this scenario, the debate is far from over.

Bolsonaro has always tried to guarantee Brazil’s entry into NATO (as a member or partner) and this was one of the main promises of his electoral campaign. Former President Trump himself never promised Brazil a role in the alliance and with Biden the project became even more distant – now, suddenly, it is the Biden government itself that makes the idea come back with much more force, which is not by chance: occupying Brazil is important for the US to be able to curtail Chinese influence on the American continent and, even more, consolidate a strategy of encirclement against Venezuela.

US interest in Brazil emerges as a continuation of recent events in the Americas. The assassination of the Haitian president, the attempted colorful revolution in Cuba and the crisis with foreign ships along the Venezuelan coast are multiple aspects of the American new incursion on its own continent. Washington is trying to neutralize the territories where it disputes influence with China (such as Brazil) and, as a result, suffocate “unrecoverable” governments (such as Venezuela, Cuba, and Nicaragua). “Regaining” Brazil is positive for the Americans in this double sense: reducing Chinese influence and encircling Caracas.

It is more likely that Bolsonaro will accept the proposal, considering that not only he but also the Intelligence Agency, some ministers and many parliamentarians want Brazil’s entry into NATO. But the measure will encounter resistance, as a part of the military has a pure pragmatic view and knows that accepting the proposal means exchanging peaceful relations with major world powers, such as China and Russia, for a subordinate role in the alliance, which seems to favor only the US. In addition, it must be remembered that China is Brazil’s largest trading partner and that Brazilian participation in NATO would represent a real blow to bilateral relations. In this sense, the Brazilian business and agrarian sector will severely oppose the acceptance of the American offer.

Certainly, there will be even more polarization in the Brazilian scenario in the coming months.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Lucas Leiroz is a research fellow in international law at the Federal University of Rio de Janeiro.

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on Washington Wants Brazil to Become a NATO Partner, but this Does Not Favor Brazilian Interests
  • Tags: , ,

Will India & Iran Ally with Kabul Against the Taliban?

August 9th, 2021 by Andrew Korybko

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on Will India & Iran Ally with Kabul Against the Taliban?
  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on US-led Information War Targets Southeast Asia (and China)

Tyranny: The Deadliest Pandemic

August 9th, 2021 by Michael J. Talmo

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Over the centuries pandemics have come and gone. Some were real like the Bubonic plague of the 14th Century and some, like AIDS, were fake. But there is one pandemic that has always been with us. It never goes away and outbreaks can occur anywhere at any time. Sometimes it’s a small outbreak and sometimes it’s huge and global, such as WWII and now COVID-19. It hangs over the human race like a rotten rag soaked with blood, and death, and corruption.

The pandemic I’m talking about is tyranny—the need to have power over others—to strip others of all they own including their dignity. In the case of COVID-19, with gene altering vaccines, they even want to strip us of what it means to be human.

The overwhelming majority of the human race isn’t interested in tyranny. Only a tiny minority of corrupt and greedy psychopaths want to rule with an iron fist. In my opinion they are like malignant cancer cells.

There are about 30 trillion cells in the human body. For whatever reason some cells go haywire and turn against the rest of the body—they become cancerous. Instead of helping the body these trouble making disruptive cells seek to interfere with its normal functions and destroy it. In too many cases they succeed.

Just as cancer cells can corrupt and make other cells malignant, power-hungry psychopaths are often charismatic and can turn a percentage of the population into their minions of flying monkeys who will carry out their agenda and destroy a free and peaceful society. That’s the biggest problem of all: there is always a percentage of the population who are willing to carry out their orders.

Government power is a two-edged sword. It can be used to do good or evil.

Political scientist Rudolph Rummel (1932-2014) coined the term “democide” which he defined as murder by government. After studying over 8,000 reports of government-caused deaths, Rummel estimated that 262 million people were victims of government murder in the 20th Century alone—six times the number of people who died in battle. Personally, I would include soldiers who died in unnecessary wars which would make it a lot more than 262 million.

One of Professor Rummel’s main findings was that political mass murder is much more common under authoritarian regimes. But where power is diffuse, checked, and balanced, political violence is rare. In other words, the more power government has the more dangerous it becomes. This is why preserving freedom is so vital because as Rummel stated: “concentrated political power is the most dangerous thing on earth.”

The big bamboozle

How do governments get the masses to go along with tyranny?

Consider the words of our second U.S. President, John Adams (1735-1826):

“Be not intimidated, therefore, by any terrors, from publishing with the utmost freedom…nor suffer yourselves to be wheedled out of your liberty by any pretences of politeness, delicacy, or decency. These, as they are often used, are but three different names for hypocrisy, chicanery, and cowardice.”

There be monsters here

The most common form of chicanery that governments use to wheedle people out of their liberty are moral panics. The red thread that runs through all of them is that some danger/evil lurks everywhere and must be stamped out. Due process of law and other Constitutional rights just get in the way and must be swept aside.

All moral panics are ploys to scare us into giving up our freedom.

Even if it’s Just plain folks that unintentionally start a moral panic, governments will be quick to jump on the bandwagon to acquire more power and revenue. They will use propaganda to manipulate you into being so anxious to save yourself that you will be willing to give up everything you believe in—to sell your soul to the devil.

Moral panics, crusades, witch hunts, mass hysteria, call them whatever you like, can take many forms. They can occur on the authoritarian left or right. Prohibition, McCarthyism, Women Against Pornography, the War on Drugs, the Christian Right, Mothers Against Drunk Driving (MADD), the War on Terror, Me Too, QAnon, Satanic Panic, (the belief that children in daycare centers were being molested and forced to participate in satanic rituals during the 1980s and 1990s along with many other outlandish notions), Blue Lives Matter, the Victims Rights Movement, are but a few examples of misguided crusades.

Don’t misunderstand me. I’m not saying that some of the things that the aforementioned crusade against aren’t real problems. My point is that moral panics of this nature distort real problems by blowing them way out of proportion which in the end winds up making them a lot worse as well as causing additional problems.

Bottom line: Don’t confuse revenge with justice. Don’t be conned into throwing away your freedom in the name of stopping the bad guys and the evil doers. Because, if you do, all of us will be victims—women as well as men.

It’s your duty

The core belief of all moral panics is Communitarianism, the belief that the collective society is more important than the individual, that you have to give up your natural inalienable rights for some greater good or higher purpose. This nonsensical propaganda has been used by every two-bit dictator from time immemorial.

In some primitive cultures this kind of stupid thinking resulted in human sacrifice, such as allowing a religious nut who calls himself a high priest to cut someone’s heart out on a sacrificial altar or throw children off a cliff in order to make sure that the Sun will continue to rise, or that the crops will grow.

It is true that we are part of a collective society, but only in limited ways. Yes, we are obligated to pay taxes because there are things that we can’t do on our own. We have an interdependence on each other. We need each other. For example, it takes the efforts of a complex technological collective society to build and maintain our modern infrastructure and make sure our air, water, and food are safe. All of these things are what governments do best. But that’s as far as it goes.

First and foremost, we are free, sovereign individuals. What we wear, what we think, what we read see, and hear, where we choose to go, what makes us happy, and what we choose or not choose to put into our bodies, which includes individual health choices, are no one’s business but our own.

Communities don’t have rights only the individuals who live in them have rights. There is no such thing as “community standards” because we all have different standards. To be free only as long as you conform is no freedom at all—it is replacing real freedom with pseudo liberty.

The COVID con job

In the case of COVID-19, the newest mantra is that the unvaccinated are spreading COVID-19 and forcing governments to impose more lockdowns, mask mandates, etc. Don’t fall for it. There is no pandemic. There is no emergency. There was no excess mortality in 2020.

What’s really going on is that they have to keep the fear porn going in order to install the Chinese social credit system via vaccine passports and create a totalitarian world government. None of this oppression is about a virus.

Think about it. If the COVID vaccines are “safe and effective” as they claim, why are huge percentages of doctors, nurses, and other health care workers refusing to get them? Why is a huge percentage of the public refusing to get them? Could it be because so many have already died and become permanently disabled—nearly 25,000 in the U.S. alone as of July 23, 2021 according to VAERS (Vaccine Adverse Events Reporting System). And according to a study conducted from 2007-2010, that number is many, many times times higher because the VAERS system is grossly inefficient.

And If the vaccines work why worry about the unvaccinated if you’re vaccinated? Why even have a vaccine for a virus with an over 99% survival rate for people under 70 and that numerous studies, like the recent CDC study in Cape Cod Massachusetts, show won’t protect vaccinated people from COVID-19? What is the point in getting a vaccine that doesn’t vaccinate you?

If COVID-19 was a real pandemic and the vaccines really worked, governments and their corporate masters wouldn’t need to bully and coerce people into taking them via mandates like the one just passed in New York City that will prohibit unvaccinated people from fully participating in society.

See this medical apartheid for what it really is: Jim Crow in a white lab coat. Pardon me while I barf.

How we got into this mess

In the 1980s former U.S. President Ronald Reagan (1911-2004) changed the Zeitgeist of our country from being focused on building a strong and prosperous middle class to creating an oligarchy on steroids via massive tax cuts for the wealthy along with deregulation of corporations and banks.

Reagan’s policies, known as Reaganomics, eventually also embraced by the Democratic Party, changed our nation and ultimately the Western world from liberal to neoliberal. It is what allowed people like Bill Gates, and Warren Buffet to become obscenely wealthy. 40 years of Reaganomics is why we are in this COVID quagmire.

The very rich are not like the rest of us. Put money into the pockets of the poor and middle class and they put it back into the economy. This is what drives an economy: demand. People having money in their pockets to buy things. Give money to the very rich and they suck all the wealth out of society because they can only buy so much of anything—there aren’t enough of them. Instead, they either hoard their wealth, gamble with it in the stock market, which can create global poverty and instability, or use it to bribe politicians and corrupt governments.

This is why The World Health Organization has degenerated into The World Vaccine Organization. This is why the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention has become the Centers for Dictatorship Control and Propaganda.

This why it is power and not people that needs to be controlled.

Creating real monsters

When you take ordinary people and allow them to become multibillionaires you create monsters. Meek Dr. Jekylls are turned into Mr Hydes. Monsters from the Freudian ID are freed to wreck havoc upon the world. Not with a potion or an alien technology, but with the power that vast amounts of money can bring. The kind of power to do things that the rest of us wouldn’t dare to do. But they’ll dare because they don’t need to care. They rule and are free to mold the world into their own misshapen and perverted image.

Today’s mega billionaires are kings, queens, princes, and princesses with the mentality of a petulant spoiled child. They think that they can take what they want. They think that there is nothing we can do to stop them. They are wrong.

What must be done

If we don’t change the current system which is global and utterly corrupt then the same problems will continue. So, first and foremost, All billionaires must go—strip them of their wealth. The most money a wealthy person should have is around maybe 30-50 million dollars.

Abolish Big Pharma and all other mega corporations. Keep businesses small to medium sized. And never let any business lobby the government or give politicians money. All elections should be publicly financed. No donations from anyone—especially the rich.

Abolish all standing armies including the police. Without them, governments could not oppress us. The main purpose of police and other military forces has always been to serve the ruling elite—not the people. COVID-19 should have made this abundantly clear. Better to have a citizen police force where its members serve for a month and then rotate back into the civilian population. They should be answerable to and work directly for local communities and not local, state, or national governments. In other words, a militia instead of professional soldiers.

For protection of the nation from foreign enemies a navy and an air force are more than adequate.

Abolish MSEHPA (Model State Emergency Health Powers Act). After 911, the CDC along with a couple of other medical institutions lobbied state governments, and succeeded, in getting them to pass versions of this draconian legislation that gave sweeping powers to Governors and public health departments if medical emergencies are declared. MSEHPA laws abridge every right enumerated in the U.S. Constitution as well as the great principles of liberty enumerated in the Declaration of Independence. All of the vile acts that governments have inflicted on us under the banner of fighting COVID-19 are mainly due to this horrible legislation.

Don’t consolidate government power. Keep its different functions separate. Don’t fall for the efficiency argument. Keep government fragmented and you keep your freedom.

To the brainwashed and still asleep

Be warned people. Continue to hold on to this false belief called COVID-19, do nothing to educate yourselves to the truth, do nothing to fight this evil, and you condemn all of us to a life of slavery. The flame of liberty will be extinguished and our humanity will perish.

Never trust any government or institution with power—it is foolhardy and dangerous. Politicians and those in high-level positions, like all humans, can be ignorant, reactionary, intellectually lazy, illogical, and irresponsible. The less power they have the better so keep them on a very short leash.

And be ever vigilant—especially when those in power tell you that oppressive measures are for your protection and to save lives because as the old saying goes:

The road to hell is paved with good intentions.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Michael J. Talmo has been a professional writer for over 40 years and is strongly committed to the protection of civil liberties. He also did three music videos on COVID-19: The Masker Mash, COVID Vaccine Man, and The Corona Globalists. He can be reached at [email protected]

Featured image is from Children’s Health Defense

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


First published on August 6, 2017

Within 9 seconds one hundred thousand people were killed or doomed… 

And that’s what is on the drawing board of the Pentagon on a much larger scale, with a trillion dollar nuclear weapons program. 

And they say that nuclear weapons are “harmless to the surrounding civilian population”.

And the mainstream media will tell you that nuclear weapons are “peacemaking” bombs to be used against the enemies of America.

I have a dream, we have a dream: criminalize war, abolish nuclear weapons, unseat the war criminals in high office, restore “sanity” in US foreign policy…

Rise up against the dangers of nuclear war.

Spread the word far and wide. View Jules Glimcher’s video below.

Michel Chossudovsky, Remembering Hiroshima August 6, Nagasaki August 9, 2021


Sumner Jules Glimcher’s Video: 

Published on Apr 23, 2014

This sequence from “Hiroshima-Nagasaki: August 1944,” by filmmaker Sumner Jules Glimcher, is featured in his new ebook, “How To Make A Movie: A Few Secrets.”

This book is meant to be a primer for all, from the first time filmmaker to the advanced professional. The concept is to teach by example. I have made some three-dozen films in every genre imaginable, which have won dozens of awards.

For this book, my plan was to write some twenty chapters, each about a specific work, and then describe one unique aspect of that film. After writing about that aspect (music, montage, aerial photography, narration, etc.)

I then embedded an excerpt from that film (or in two cases the entire film) so that the reader may click on the image on his/her iPAD, and watch how that situation was resolved.

Presumably reading of the problem and then seeing its resolution might inspire readers how to find their own solutions in the work I have spent about one third of my career, some twenty years, in teaching at Harvard, my alma mater, Columbia University for ten years, and NYU for eight, where I was the Director of the “Department of Film, Video and Broadcasting” at NYU’s School of Continuing Education.

At the latter position, I was largely responsible for creating the finest film program on the East Coast. With this background, I believed I have developed some insights in the learning process. When students ask, “What is the most important rule to follow in making a film,” I answer, “Enjoy every minute of what you are doing.”

“How To Make A Movie: A Few Secrets” is now available for download on your iPad, Kindle, Nook and all e-readers, as well as print, which you can purchase from Amazon.


Sumner Jules Glimcher is a World War II veteran, professor, author and filmmaker.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on Video: Remember Hiroshima: “People Became Nothing, … People Dying All Around Me”

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


This book presents a history which is nearing its nadir, where a species of warlike primates is destroying the delicate web of life perceived by Charles Darwin in The Origin of Species, committing a war against nature and the fastest mass extinction in the history of of Earth since 65 million years ago, with global temperatures incinerating the biosphere by several degrees Celsius, within a lifetime. Despite of this knowledge, Homo “sapiens” is proceeding to transfer every accessible molecule of carbon from the Earth crust to the atmosphere and hydrosphere, an auto-da-fe ensues of the terrestrial biosphere. As amplifying feedbacks to global warming—including fires, methane release, ice melt, and warming oceans—are intensifying, at a pace exceeding any recorded in the geological past, societies are pouring their remaining resources into wars. These include likely nuclear wars triggered by arsenals many thousands of missiles strong, posing an equal threat to human existence and that of many other species. Humans, having mastered fire, which allowed them to survive the extreme ice ages, have emerged in the current interglacial as major civilizations coupled with major bloodsheds, called “war”, engulfing multitudes of innocent yet betrayed humans. Long suffering from illusions of omnipotence and omniscience, paranoid fears, a warlike mindset, aggression toward the animals and disrespect of females, coupled with artistic excellence and technical brilliance, humans have become victims of a tragic conflict between the mind and the heart, with fatal consequences.

The Fatal Species: From Warlike Primates to Planetary Mass Extinction

By Andrew Y. Glikson

Publisher: Springer; 1st ed. 2021 edition (June 25, 2021)

ISBN-10: 3030754677

ISBN-13: 978-3030754679

Purchase the book here.

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on New Book: The Fatal Species: From Warlike Primates to Planetary Mass Extinction

Canada Adds Bell’s Palsy Warning to Pfizer COVID Vaccine

August 9th, 2021 by Great Game India

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version). 

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.


Health Canada, the department of the Government of Canada responsible for national health policy has added Bell’s Palsy as a warning to Pfizer COVID-19 vaccine labels.

Cases of Bell’s Palsy have been reported in a number of people in Canada and internationally.

So far in Canada, “there has been a total of 206 reports of Bell’s Palsy following a Pfizer vaccination,” the health agency told Global News in an email Friday.

Symptoms after vaccination may include temporary weakness or paralysis on one side of the face, according to an advisory issued by the department.

Other symptoms include, “uncoordinated movement of the muscles that control facial expression; loss of feeling in the face; headache; tearing from the eye; drooling; lost sense of taste on the front two-thirds of the tongue; hypersensitivity to sound in one ear; or inability to close an eye on one side of the face,” according to the advisory.

Health Canada has received 2,849 reports of serious adverse events, including heart inflammation, allergic reactions, blood clots and strokes.

The Moderna COVID-19 vaccine label already comes with information about reported cases of Bell’s Palsy, and Health Canada “is continuing to assess this issue for all authorized COVID-19 vaccines” currently in use in the country, the release clarified. “The Department will take further action if necessary.”

Health Canada advises people who feel the symptoms of Bell’s Palsy to seek medical attention.

Earlier it was revealed, the Pfizer coronavirus vaccine may be linked to a form of severe eye inflammation called uveitis which can lead to permanent loss of vision, according to a multicenter Israeli study led by Prof. Zohar Habot-Wilner from Tel Aviv’s Sourasky Medical Center.

The Israeli Peoples Committee (IPC), a civilian body made of leading Israeli health experts, published its April report into the Pfizer vaccine’s side effects indicating damage to almost every system in the human body.

Pfizer vaccine is linked to more deaths in Israel than AstraZeneca’s in the whole of Europe. The findings are catastrophic on every possible level. This is a detailed report that highlights the most devastating findings.

As reported by GreatGameIndia earlier, Pfizer manipulated COVID vaccine trial protocols to obtain emergency FDA authorisation for children.

The U.S. Food and Drug Administration on Friday added a warning to patient and provider fact sheets for the Pfizer and Moderna Covid-19 vaccines to indicate risk of heart inflammation.

Inflammation and swelling of the heart, a condition known as Myocarditis, has been identified in many youngsters who have received their dose of Pfizer-BioNTech COVID-19 vaccine.

Myocarditis is a heart condition that leads to the inflammation of the heart muscles. The inflammation is a result of the body’s immune response to a certain infection, which leads to weakening and swelling of the heart.


Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

Featured image is from Children’s Health Defense